0% found this document useful (0 votes)
63 views359 pages

E6581697 User Manual VF Mb1 Eng

The document is an instruction manual for the TOSVERT VF-MB1 industrial inverter, detailing safety precautions, handling, transportation, installation, wiring, and operations. It emphasizes the importance of following safety warnings to prevent electric shock, fire, and injury, and specifies that the inverter is designed for controlling three-phase induction motors in industrial applications. Users are advised to read the manual thoroughly before installation and operation, and to contact a qualified expert for electrical installation work.

Uploaded by

Adnan Ansari
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
63 views359 pages

E6581697 User Manual VF Mb1 Eng

The document is an instruction manual for the TOSVERT VF-MB1 industrial inverter, detailing safety precautions, handling, transportation, installation, wiring, and operations. It emphasizes the importance of following safety warnings to prevent electric shock, fire, and injury, and specifies that the inverter is designed for controlling three-phase induction motors in industrial applications. Users are advised to read the manual thoroughly before installation and operation, and to contact a qualified expert for electrical installation work.

Uploaded by

Adnan Ansari
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 359

E6581697Ԙ

Safety
precautions I
Introduction
II
Contents

Industrial Inverter Read first


1
For 3-phase induction motors
Connection
2
Operations
3

Industrial Inverter
Instruction Manual Setting
parameters 4
Main
5
TOSVERT TM
VF-MB1 parameters

Other
parameters 6
7
Operation

TOSVERT VF-MB1
with external
signal

Monitoring the
operation status 8
9
Measures
to satisfy the
standards
1-phase 240V class 0.2 VQ2.2kW
3-phase 500V class 0.4 VQ15kW
Peripheral
devices 10
11
Table of
parameters
and data

Specifications
12

Instruction Manual
Before making
a service call 13
NOTICE
1.Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the
Inspection and
maintenance 14
15
end user of the inverter unit.
Warranty
2.Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter

16
unit, and store it in a safe place for reference. Disposal of the
inverter

2010-07
E6581697

I. Safety precautions I
The items described in these instructions and on the inverter itself are very important so that you can use the
inverter safely, prevent injury to yourself and other people around you as well as to prevent damage to property in
the area. Thoroughly familiarize yourself with the symbols and indications shown below and then continue to read
the manual. Make sure that you observe all warnings given.

Explanation of markings
Marking Meaning of marking

Warning Indicates that errors in operation may lead to death or serious injury.

Indicates that errors in operation may lead to injury (*1) to people or that these errors may
Caution cause damage to physical property. (*2)
(*1) Such things as injury, burns or shock that will not require hospitalization or long periods of outpatient
treatment.
(*2) Physical property damage refers to wide-ranging damage to assets and materials.

Meanings of symbols
Marking Meaning of marking
Indicates prohibition (Don't do it).
What is prohibited will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.
Indicates an instruction that must be followed.
Detailed instructions are described in illustrations and text in or near the symbol.
-Indicates warning.
What is warned will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.
-Indicates caution.
What the caution should be applied to will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.

„ Limits in purpose
This inverter is used for controlling speeds of three-phase induction motors in general industrial use.
Output by the inverter is as 3-phase output and cannot drive a single-phase motor.

Safety precautions
The inverter cannot be used in any device that would present danger to the human body or from which
malfunction or error in operation would present a direct threat to human life (nuclear power control
device, aviation and space flight control device, traffic device, life support or operation system, safety
device, etc.). If the inverter is to be used for any special purpose, first get in touch with the supplier.
This product was manufactured under the strictest quality controls but if it is to be used in critical
equipment, for example, equipment in which errors in malfunctioning signal output system would cause
a major accident, safety devices must be installed on the equipment.
Do not use the inverter for loads other than those of properly applied three-phase induction motors in
general industrial use. (Use in other than properly applied three-phase induction motors may cause an
accident.)

1
E6581697

I „ Handling
Reference
Warning section
• Never disassemble, modify or repair. 2.
This can result in electric shock, fire and injury. For repairs, call your sales distributor.

Disassembly
prohibited
• Do not open the terminal block cover while the inverter is on. 2.1
The unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in electric shock.
• Do not stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring holes and cooling fan covers. 2.
This can result in electric shock or other injury.
• Do not place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings, rods, wires 2.
Prohibited etc.).
This can result in electric shock or fire. 2.
• Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter.
This can result in electric shock or fire.
• After replacing the terminal block cover, turn the input power on. 2.1
Turning on the input power without replacing the terminal block cover may lead to electric
shock.
• If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds, immediately 3.
turn power off.
Mandatory If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire. Call your
action local sales agency for repairs.
• Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time since there is a 3.
possibility of malfunction caused by leaks, dust and other material. If power is left on with
the inverter in that state, it may result in fire.

Reference
Caution section
• Do not touch heat radiating fins or discharge resistors. 3.
These devices are hot, and you'll get burned if you touch them.

Contact
prohibited
• Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase 1.1
induction motor being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to those
specifications, not only will the three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, it
Mandatory may also cause serious accidents through overheating and fire.
action

2
E6581697

„ Transportation & installation I


Reference
Warning section
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing. 1.4.4
This can result in electric shock or fire. Call your local sales agency for repairs.
• Do not place any inflammable objects nearby.
If a flame is emitted due to malfunction, it may result in a fire. 1.4.4
Prohibited
• Do not install in any location where the inverter could come into contact with water or
other fluids. 1.4.4
This can result in electric shock or fire.

Reference
Warning section
• Must be used in the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual. 1.4.4
Use under any other conditions may result in malfunction.
• Mount the inverter on a metal plate. 1.4.4
The rear panel gets very hot. Do not install in an inflammable object, this can result in fire.
• Do not use the inverter without the terminal block cover. This can result in electric shock. 1.4.4
Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious injury.
• An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications (e.g. shut 1.4.4
Mandatory off input power then engage mechanical brake). Operation cannot be stopped immediately
action by the inverter alone, thus risking an accident or injury.
• All options used must be those specified by Toshiba. 1.4.4
The use of any other option may result in an accident.
• When using switchgear for the inverter, it must be installed in a cabinet. 10
Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious injury.

Reference
Caution section
• When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers. 2.
The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.
• Do not install in any area where the unit would be subject to large amounts of vibration. 1.4.4
Prohibited That could result in the unit falling, resulting in injury.
• When removing and installing the terminal cover with a screwdriver, be sure not to scratch 1.3.2
your hand as this results in injury.
• Pressing too hard on the screwdriver may scratch the inverter. 1.3.2
• Always cut the power supply when removing the wiring cover. 1.3.2
• After wiring is complete, be sure to replace the terminal cover. 1.3.2
Mandatory • The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight. 1.4.4
action If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall
resulting in injury.
• If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake. 1.4.4
The brake on the inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that
purpose, injury may result.

3
E6581697

I „ Wiring
Reference
Warning section
• Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1,V/T2,W/T3). 2.2
That will destroy the inverter and may result in fire.
• Do not connect braking resistors to the DC terminals (across PA/+ - PC/-). 2.2
That may cause a fire.
• Within 15 minutes after turning off input power, do not touch wires of devices (MCCB) 2.2
connected to the input side of the inverter.
Prohibited
That could result in electric shock.
• Do not shut down the external power supply on ahead when VIA or VIB terminals are 2.2
used as logic input terminal by external power supply.
It could cause unexpected result as VIA or VIB terminals are ON status.

Reference
Warning section
• Electrical installation work must be done by a qualified expert. 2.1
Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge may
result in fire or electric shock.
• Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly. 2.1
If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may result in
injury.
• Wiring must be done after installation. 2.1
If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock
• The following steps must be performed before wiring. 2.1
(1) Turn off all input power.
(2) Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.
Mandatory (3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (800VDC or more), and check to make sure
action that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+ - PC/-) is 45V or less.
If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.
• Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque. 2.1
If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.
• Check to make sure that the input power voltage is +10%, -15% of the rated power 1.4.4
voltage written on the rating label (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous operation).
If the input power voltage is not +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage (±10% when the
load is 100% in continuous operation) this may result in fire.
• Set a parameter f109 when VIA or VIB terminals are used as logic input terminal. 2.2
If it is not set, it could result in malfunction.
• Ground must be connected securely. 2.1
If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire. 2.2
10.
Be Grounded

Reference
Caution section
• Do not attach equipment (such as noise filters or surge absorbers) that have built-in 2.1
capacitors to the output (motor side) terminals.
That could result in a fire.
Prohibited

4
E6581697

„ Operations I
Reference
Warning section
• Never touch the internal connector while the upper terminal cover of control panel is 1.3.2
opened.
There is a risk of shock because it carries a high voltage.
Prohibited

Reference
Warning section
• Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is going to the inverter even if the 3.
motor is stopped.
Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter with a 3.
damp cloth.
Prohibited Such practices may result in electric shock.
• Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected. 3.
The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.
Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents when the
motor unexpectedly restarts.
• After replacing the terminal block cover, turn the input power on. 3.
When installed inside a cabinet and using with the front cover removed, always close the
cabinet doors first and then turn power on. Turning on the power with the terminal block
cover or cabinet doors open may result in electric shock.
Mandatory • Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after malfunction. 3.
action If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart
suddenly causing injury.

Reference
Caution section
• Observe all permissible operating ranges of motors and mechanical equipment. (Refer to 3.
the motor's instruction manual.)
Not observing these ranges may result in injury.
• Do not set the stall prevention level () extremely low. 6.16.2
If the stall prevention level parameter () is set at or below the no-load current of
Prohibited the motor, the stall preventive function will be always active and increase the frequency
when it judges that regenerative braking is taking place.
Do not set the stall prevention level parameter () below 30% under normal use
conditions.
• Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase 1.4.1
induction motor being operated. If the inverter being used does not conform to those
specifications, not only will the three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, but it may
cause serious accidents through overheating and fire.
Mandatory • Current may leak through the inverter's input/output wires because of insufficient 1.4.3
action electrostatic capacity on the motor with bad effects on peripheral equipment.
The leakage current’s value is affected by the carrier frequency and the length of the
input/output wires. Test and adopt the following remedies against leak current.

5
E6581697

I Reference
Warning section
• Configuring settings on the setup menu incorrectly may break the inverter or lead to 3.1
malfunction.
Mandatory
action

„ When operation by using remote keypad is selected


Reference
Warning section
• Set the parameter Communication time-out time (f803), Communication time-out 6.19
action (f804) and Disconnection detection of remote keypad (f731).
If these are not properly set, the inverter can not be stopped immediately in breaking
communication and this could result in injury and accidents.
Mandatory • An emergency stop device and the interlock that fit with system specifications must be
action installed.
If these are not properly installed, the inverter can not be stopped immediately and this
could result in injury and accidents.

„ When sequence for restart after a momentary failure is selected (inverter)


Reference
Caution section
• Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment. 6.12.1
If the motor stops due to a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly
after power recovers. This could result in unexpected injury.
Mandatory 6.12.1
• Attach warnings about sudden restart after a momentary power failure on inverters,
action
motors and equipment for prevention of accidents in advance.

„ When retry function is selected (inverter)


Reference
Caution section
• Stand clear of motors and equipment. 6.12.3
If the motor and equipment stop when the alarm is given, selection of the retry function will
restart them suddenly after the specified time has elapsed. This could result in unexpected
Mandatory injury.
action • Attach warnings about sudden restart in retry function on inverters, motors and equipment 6.12.3
for prevention of accidents in advance.

„ Measures to satisfy the standards


Reference
Caution section
• For preventive maintenance, check at least once a year whether the Safe Torque Off 9.3
safety function operates normally.

Mandatory
action

6
E6581697

„ Maintenance and inspection I


Reference
Warning section
• Do not replace parts. 14.2
This could be a cause of electric shock, fire and bodily injury. To replace parts, call the
local sales agency.
Prohibited
• The equipment must be inspected every day. 14.
If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be
discovered and that could result in accidents.
• Before inspection, perform the following steps. 14.
(1) Turn off all input power to the inverter. 14.2
Mandatory (2) Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.
action (3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (400/800VDC or more), and check to
make sure that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+ - PC/-) is 45V or less.
If inspection is performed without performing these steps first, it could lead to electric
shock.

„ Disposal
Reference
Caution section
• If you dispose of the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste disposal(*). 16.
If you dispose of the inverter in an inappropriate way, this can result in explosion of
capacitor or produce noxious gases, resulting in injury.
(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste
Mandatory product collectors and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons. "If the
action collection, transport and disposal of industrial waste is done by someone who is not
licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the law. (Laws in regard to cleaning
and processing of waste materials)

„ Attach caution labels


Shown here are examples of warning labels to prevent, in advance, accidents in relation to inverters, motors and other
equipment. Be sure to affix the caution label where it is easily visible when selecting the auto-restart function (6.12.1)
or the retry function (6.12.3).

If the inverter has been programmed for restart If the retry function has been selected, place warning
sequence of momentary power failure, place warning labels in a location where they can be easily seen and
labels in a place where they can be easily seen and read.
read.
(Example of warning label) (Example of warning label)
Caution (Functions Caution (Functions
programmed for restart) programmed for retry)
Do not go near motors and equipment. Do not go near motors and equipment.
Motors and equipment that have stopped Motors and equipment that have stopped
temporarily after momentary power failure will temporarily after an alarm will restart suddenly
restart suddenly after recovery. after the specified time has elapsed.

7
E6581697

II. Introduction
II Thank you for your purchase of the Toshiba "TOSVERT VF-MB1” industrial inverter.

This instruction manual is for the Ver. 102 or later CPU of the inverter.
Please be informed that CPU version will be frequently upgraded.

8
E6581697

⎯⎯ Contents ⎯⎯
I Safety precautions......................................................................................................................................................... 1

II Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................... 8

1. Read first ....................................................................................................................................................................... A-1


1.1 Check product purchase.................................................................................................................................... A-1
1.2 Contents of the product ..................................................................................................................................... A-2
1.3 Names and functions......................................................................................................................................... A-3
1.4 Notes on the application .................................................................................................................................... A-15

2. Connection .................................................................................................................................................................... B-1


2.1 Cautions on wiring ............................................................................................................................................. B-1
2.2 Standard connections ........................................................................................................................................ B-3
2.3 Description of terminals ..................................................................................................................................... B-6

3. Operations ..................................................................................................................................................................... C-1


3.1 How to Set the Setup Menu............................................................................................................................... C-2
3.2 Simplified Operation of the VF-MB1 .................................................................................................................. C-4
3.3 How to operate the VF- MB1 ............................................................................................................................. C-9
3.4 Meter setting and adjustment ............................................................................................................................ C-13
3.5 Setting the electronic thermal ............................................................................................................................ C-16
3.6 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 15 steps) .................................................................................................... C-24

4. Setting parameters ........................................................................................................................................................ D-1


4.1 Setting and Display Modes ................................................................................................................................ D-1
4.2 How to set parameters....................................................................................................................................... D-3
4.3 Functions useful in searching for a parameter or changing a parameter setting................................................ D-7
4.4 Checking the region settings selection .............................................................................................................. D-13
4.5 EASY key function ............................................................................................................................................. D-14

5. Main parameters............................................................................................................................................................ E-1


5.1 Searching for changes using the history function () ................................................................................. E-1
5.2 Setting a parameter using the guidance function () .................................................................................. E-2
5.3 Selecting inverter overload characteristic .......................................................................................................... E-4
5.4 Setting acceleration/deceleration time ............................................................................................................... E-5
5.5 Increasing starting torque .................................................................................................................................. E-7
5.6 Selection of operation mode .............................................................................................................................. E-10
5.7 Meter setting and adjustment ............................................................................................................................ E-14
5.8 Forward/reverse run selection (Panel keypad) .................................................................................................. E-14
5.9 Maximum frequency .......................................................................................................................................... E-15
5.10 Upper limit and lower limit frequencies .............................................................................................................. E-16

i
E6581697

5.11 Base frequency ..................................................................................................................................................E-17


5.12 Selecting control mode.......................................................................................................................................E-18
5.13 Manual torque boost - increasing torque boost at low speeds ...........................................................................E-25
5.14 Setting the electronic thermal.............................................................................................................................E-25
5.15 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 15 steps).....................................................................................................E-25
5.16 Process input value of PID control .....................................................................................................................E-26
5.17 Standard default setting .....................................................................................................................................E-26
5.18 Checking the region setting selection ................................................................................................................E-26
5.19 Registered parameters display selection ...........................................................................................................E-26
5.20 Searching for and resetting changed parameters ..............................................................................................E-26

6. Other parameters ...........................................................................................................................................................F-1


6.1 Input/output parameters .....................................................................................................................................F-1
6.2 Input signal selection..........................................................................................................................................F-4
6.3 Terminal function selection.................................................................................................................................F-7
6.4 Basic parameters 2 ............................................................................................................................................F-10
6.5 V/f 5-point setting ...............................................................................................................................................F-12
6.6 Frequency priority selection ...............................................................................................................................F-12
6.7 Operation frequency...........................................................................................................................................F-22
6.8 DC braking .........................................................................................................................................................F-24
6.9 Time limit for lower-limit frequency operation .....................................................................................................F-26
6.10 Jog run mode .....................................................................................................................................................F-27
6.11 Jump frequency - avoiding resonant frequencies...............................................................................................F-29
6.12 Preset-speed frequencies ..................................................................................................................................F-30
6.13 Bumpless operation ...........................................................................................................................................F-30
6.14 PWM carrier frequency ......................................................................................................................................F-32
6.15 Trip-less intensification.......................................................................................................................................F-35
6.16 Droop control......................................................................................................................................................F-49
6.17 Light-load high-speed operation function ...........................................................................................................F-51
6.18 Braking function .................................................................................................................................................F-51
6.19 Acceleration/deceleration suspend function.......................................................................................................F-55
6.20 PID control .........................................................................................................................................................F-57
6.21 Setting motor constants......................................................................................................................................F-63
6.22 Torque limit.........................................................................................................................................................F-69
6.23 Acceleration/deceleration time 2 and 3 ..............................................................................................................F-73
6.24 Protection functions............................................................................................................................................F-78
6.25 Forced fire-speed control function......................................................................................................................F-92
6.26 Override .............................................................................................................................................................F-93
6.27 Analog input terminal function selection.............................................................................................................F-96
6.28 Adjustment parameters ......................................................................................................................................F-97
6.29 Operation panel parameter ................................................................................................................................F-100
6.30 Tracing functions................................................................................................................................................F-111
6.31 Integrating wattmeter .........................................................................................................................................F-115
6.32 Parameter registration to easy setting mode......................................................................................................F-115

ii
E6581697

6.33 Communication function .................................................................................................................................... F-116


6.34 Permanent magnet motors ................................................................................................................................ F-124
6.35 Traverse function ............................................................................................................................................... F-125
6.36 Logic sequence function .................................................................................................................................... F-125

7. Operations with external signal...................................................................................................................................... G-1


7.1 Operating external signals ................................................................................................................................. G-1
7.2 Applied operations by an I/O signal (operation from the terminal block)............................................................ G-2
7.3 Speed instruction (analog signal) settings from external devices ...................................................................... G-13

8. Monitoring the operation status...................................................................................................................................... H-1


8.1 Flow of status monitor mode.............................................................................................................................. H-1
8.2 Status monitor mode.......................................................................................................................................... H-2
8.3 Display of trip information .................................................................................................................................. H-6

9. Measures to satisfy the standards ................................................................................................................................. I-1


9.1 How to cope with the CE directive ..................................................................................................................... I-1
9.2 Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard ............................................................................................. I-6
9.3 Compliance with Safety Standards .................................................................................................................... I-8

10. Peripheral devices ......................................................................................................................................................... J-1


10.1 Selection of wiring materials and devices .......................................................................................................... J-1
10.2 Installation of a magnetic contactor ................................................................................................................... J-3
10.3 Installation of an overload relay ......................................................................................................................... J-4
10.4 Optional external devices .................................................................................................................................. J-5

11. Table of parameters and data ........................................................................................................................................ K-1


11.1 Frequency setting parameter ............................................................................................................................. K-1
11.2 Basic parameters............................................................................................................................................... K-1
11.3 Extended parameters ........................................................................................................................................ K-5
11.4 Default settings by inverter rating ...................................................................................................................... K-30
11.5 Default settings by setup menu.......................................................................................................................... K-30
11.6 Input Terminal Function ..................................................................................................................................... K-31
11.7 Output Terminal Function................................................................................................................................... K-35

12. Specifications................................................................................................................................................................. L-1


12.1 Models and their standard specifications........................................................................................................... L-1
12.2 Outside dimensions and mass........................................................................................................................... L-4

13. Before making a service call - Trip information and remedies ....................................................................................... M-1
13.1 Trip causes/warnings and remedies .................................................................................................................. M-1
13.2 Restoring the inverter from a trip ....................................................................................................................... M-7
13.3 If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed ............................................................................ M-8
13.4 How to determine the causes of other problems ............................................................................................... M-9

iii
E6581697

14. Inspection and maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................N-1


14.1 Regular inspection .............................................................................................................................................N-1
14.2 Periodical inspection ..........................................................................................................................................N-2
14.3 Making a call for servicing..................................................................................................................................N-5
14.4 Keeping the inverter in storage ..........................................................................................................................N-5

15. Warranty.........................................................................................................................................................................O-1

16. Disposal of the inverter ..................................................................................................................................................P-1

iv
E6581697

1. Read first
1.1 Check product purchase
Before using the product you have purchased, check to make sure that it is exactly what you ordered.

Caution 1
Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase induction
motor being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to those specifications, not only will
the three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, it may also cause serious accidents through
Mandatory overheating and fire.
action

Inverter main unit


Rating label

Model
Power supply
Motor capacity

Carton box
Name plate

Name plate
Rating label
Inverter Type
Type indication label Danger label Inverter rated
output capacity

Setup sheet Power supply


Rated input
current
Danger label
Rated output
current

A-1
E6581697

Instruction manual Danger label kit


E6581697 Danger labels for sticking in 6 languages.

1
EMC plate

1.2 Contents of the product


Explanation of the name plate label

Type Form

V F M B 1 S - 2 0 0 7 P L Y - A 2 2

Applicable motor
Model name Input (AC) voltage Additional functions I Special specification code
capacity

TOSVERT 002 : 0.2kW None: No filter inside


2 : 200V to 240V L: Built-in
VF-MB1series 004 : 0.4kW A††:††is the number
4 : 380V to 500V 007 : 0.75kW high-attenuation
015 : 1.5kW EMC filter
022 : 2.2kW
037 : 4kW
055 : 5.5kW Operation panel Additional function II
Number of 075 : 7.5kW
power phases 110 : 11kW
150 : 15kW P: Provided None: Standard product
S: single-phase
None: Y: Special specifications
three-phase

Warning: Always shut power off first then check the ratings label of inverter held in a cabinet.

A-2
E6581697

1.3 Names and functions

1.3.1 Outside view


Upper terminal cover Charge lamp
[Control panel 1]
This is the cover of input
power circuit terminal for
Indicates there is a high
voltage still in the inverter.
1
up to 4.0 kw. Do not open the terminal
block cover when this lamp
is lit because it is dangerous.

EASY lamp

Lights when operating CANopen® LED


by EASY key.
Lights and blinks when
using CANopen®
communication.
RUN lamp

Lit when a frequency is


not output with the ON
run command. This lamp NET lamp
blinks when operation
starts.
Lights when using the
communication option.

PRG lamp

When lit, the inverter is % lamp


in parameter setting
mode. When blinking,
the inverter is in auh Displayed numbers
or gru. are percents.

MON lamp
Hz lamp
While this is lit, the inverter
is in monitor mode. Displayed numbers are
While blinking, the inverter in Hertz.
is in "Past Trip History
Details Monitor Display".

* CANopen is the registered trademark of CAN in Automation.

A-3
E6581697

[Control panel 2]

1 RUN key

Pressing this key


while the run lamp is
on starts operation. STOP key

While the running lamp


is blinking, pressing
this key slows down
and stops the inverter.
EASY key

Switches between
easy and standard
setting modes.

MODE key

Setting dial Switches between run,


settings, and status
monitor modes.
Turning the dial left and
right changes the
operation frequency,
cycles parameters, and
cycles among menus
within parameters.
Pressing the center of
the setting dial is used RS485 connector
for executing operations
and determining values.
RJ45 connector for
using RS485/CANopen
communication and
other options
Control terminal cover
This is the control terminal
board cover.
Always close this cover
before operation to avoid
accidentally touching the
terminal board.
The serial number is recorded
on the back side.

A-4
E6581697

[Opening the control terminal cover]

1) 2)

1
EASY CAM RUN CAM ERR NET
EASY CAM RUN CAM ERR NET

RUN %
PRG RUN %
MON Hz PRG
MON Hz

RUN STOP
RUN STOP

EASY MODE
EASY MODE

MODBUS
VP10S MODBUS
VP10S

¸About the monitor display


The LED on the operation panel uses the following symbols to indicate parameters and operations.

LED display (numbers)


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -

LED display (letters)


Aa Bb C c Dd Ee Ff Gg H h I i Jj Kk Ll
a b c w d e f g h k i } j l

Mm Nn O o Pp Qq Rr Ss Tt Uu Vv Ww Xx Yy Zz
m n o x p q r s t u v y

A-5
E6581697

1.3.2 Opening terminal cover and terminal block

Warning
• Never touch the internal connector while the upper cover of control panel is opened.
There is a risk of shock because it carries a high voltage.

Prohibited
1
Caution
• When removing and mounting the terminal cover or the terminal block with a screwdriver, be sure not
to scratch your hand as this results in injury.
• Pressing too hard on the screwdriver may scratch the inverter.
Mandatory • Always cut the power supply when removing the wiring cover.
action • After wiring is complete, be sure to replace the terminal cover.

Use the following procedure to open the terminal cover and pull the power terminal block.

(1) Opening the upper terminal (input terminal) cover (VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL)

1) 2)

NET
NET ERR
CAM
ERR RUN
CAM CAM
RUN EASY %
CAM
EASY %
Hz
Hz
RUN
RUN PRG
PRG MON
MON

P
P STO
STO

RUN
RUN

E
E MOD
MOD
Y
Y EAS
EAS

S
DBU
BUS MO 0S
MOD 0S VP1
VP1

Put your finger on the terminal cover. Pull the cover open rotating.

A-6
E6581697

(2) Mounting lower power terminal (output terminal) block (VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL)

1) 2)
EASY
EASY
CAM CAM
RUN
RUN CAM
CAM ERR
ERR
RUN RUN NET
NET
PRG PRG
MON MON

% %

Hz Hz
RUN RUN

STOP STOP

EASY EASY

MODE MODE

MOD MOD
BUS BUS
VP10
VP10

1
S S

Put the terminal block on lower of inverter. Slide the terminal block in upward.

3)
EASY
CAM
RUN
CAM
ERR
RUN NET
PRG
MON

Hz
RUN

STOP

EASY

MODE

MOD
BUS
VP10
S

Insert the attached screw into the hole.


And tighten the screw by a screwdriver.
And then insert the attached earth screw into
the earth hole and tighten the earth screw by a
screwdriver.

A-7
E6581697

(3) Removing lower power terminal (output terminal) block (VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL)

1) 2)
EASY
CAM
RUN
CAM
ERR
RUN NET
EASY
CAM PRG
RUN
CAM MON
ERR
RUN NET %
PRG
MON Hz
RUN
%

Hz
RUN STOP

STOP EASY

EASY MODE

MODE

MOD
BUS
VP10

1
S
MOD
BUS
VP10
S

Loose the earth screw and mounting screw by Move the terminal block downward.
a screwdriver.
And pick the screws up.

3)
EASY
CAM
RUN
CAM
ERR
RUN NET
PRG
MON

Hz
RUN

STOP

EASY

MODE

MOD
BUS
VP10
S

Slide the terminal block to remove it.

A-8
E6581697

(4) Removing the power terminal cover (VFMB1-4055 to 4150PL)

1) 2)

Insert a screwdriver or other thin object into the Press in on the screwdriver.
hole indicated with the mark.

3)

While pressing on the screwdriver, slide the


terminal cover downward to remove it. ★ After wiring is complete, be sure to restore the
terminal cover to its original position.

A-9
E6581697

1.3.3 Power circuit and control circuit terminal boards


1) Power circuit terminal
In case of the lug connector, cover the lug connector with insulated tube, or use the insulated lug
connector.
Use a plus or minus screwdriver to loose or tighten screws.

1 Models
VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL
VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL
VFMB1-4055 to 4150PL

Terminal Screw size Torque Strip length Screw size Torque Strip length
Input M3 0.6Nm 5.3lb y in 7-8mm
M4 1.4Nm 12.4lb y in 9-10mm
Output M3 0.8Nm 7.1lb y in 9-10mm
Earth
M5 3.0Nm 26.6lb y in -
(For input)
M5 3.0Nm 26.6lb y in -
Earth
M4 1.4Nm 12.4lb y in -
(For output)

Refer to section 2.3.1 for details about terminal functions.

VFMB1S-2002 to 2007PL VFMB1S-2015, 2022PL

M3 screw
M3 screw
R/L1 S/L2/N
R/L1 S/L2/N

Earth terminal
(M4 screw) Earth terminal
(M4 screw)

M3 screw PBe PB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 PBe PB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3


M3 screw

EMC plate EMC plate

A-10
E6581697

VFMB1-4004 to 4015PL VFMB1-4022, 4037PL

M3 screw M3 screw

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3


R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
1

Earth terminal
(M4 screw)
Earth terminal
(M4 screw)

PBe PB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3


M3 screw PBe PB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
M3 screw

EMC plate
EMC plate

<Top view>

VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, PC / -
VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL

DC bus connectors PA / +
(PA / +, PC / -)

Earth terminals
Grounding capacitor switch (M5 screw)

A-11
E6581697

VFMB1-4055, 4075PL

M4 screw

1
Grounding
capacitor
switch M4 screw

Earth terminals
(M5 screw)

VFMB1-4110, 4150PL

M4 screw

Grounding
M4 screw
capacitor
switch

Earth terminals
(M5 screw)

Note1) Bend the clips on the wiring port of the terminal cover to connect the PB, PBe, PA/+, and PC/-
terminals.
Note2) Be careful to insert all wires into the cage of terminal block.

A-12
E6581697

2) Grounding capacitor switch

This inverter has a built-in high-attenuation noise filter and is grounded via a capacitor.
A switch makes for easy switching to reduce leakage current from the inverter and the load on the
capacitor. However, be careful, as reducing the load means non-conformity with the EMC standard on
the inverter itself. Always do switching with the power off.

VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL 1


Pressing this switches the grounding capacitor's capacity from small
to large. (Default setting)

Pulling this switches the grounding capacitor's capacity from large to


small. This reduces the leakage current.

VFMB1-4055 to 4150PL

Pressing this switches the grounding capacitor's capacity from small


to large. (Default setting)

Pulling this switches the grounding capacitor's capacity from large to


small. This reduces the leakage current.

A-13
E6581697

3) Control circuit terminal board


The control circuit terminal board is common to all equipment.

FLA
SW1 RY
FLB
SOURCE
RC
PLC FLC
SINK STO
CC

1 SW2 (S3)

LOGIC
+SU
OUT
FM

CC
NO
PTC VIC
S3
VIB
S2
PP
S1
Recommended VIA
Screw size RES
tightening torque CC
R
0.5 Nxm P24
M3 screw F
4.4 lbxin

Stripping length: 6 (mm)


Screwdriver: Small-sized flat-blade screwdriver
Shorting-bar
(Blade thickness: 0.6 mm, blade width: 3.5 mm)

Refer to section 2.3.2 for details about all terminal functions.

Wire size
Conductor 1 wire 2 wires of same size
Solid 2
0.3-1.5mm (AWG 22-16) 0.3-0.75mm2 (AWG 22-18)
Stranded

Recommended ferrule
Using ferrule to be improved efficiency and reliability of wiring is recommended.
Wire size Type
mm2 (AWG) PHOENIX CONTACT Dinkle International.,Ltd
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-6TQ DN00306
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-6WH DN00506
0.75 (18) AI 0.75-6GY DN00706
1 (18) AI 1-6RD DN01006
1.5 (16) AI 1.5-8BK DN01508
*2 2 X 0.5 (-) AI TWIN2 X 0.5-8WH DTE00508
*2 2 X0.75 (-) AI TWIN2 X 0.75-8GY DTE00708
*1: Crimping pliers CRIMPFOX ZA3 (PHOENIX CONTACT), CT1 (Dinkle International., Ltd)
*2: These ferrules enable practical crimping of two wires in a ferrule.

A-14
E6581697

1.4 Notes on the application

1.4.1 Motors
When this inverter and the motor are used in conjunction, pay attention to the following items.

Caution
Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase induction motor
1
being operated. If the inverter being used does not conform to those specifications, not only will the
three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, but it may cause serious accidents through overheating
Mandatory and fire.
action

Comparisons with commercial power operation


This inverter employs the sinusoidal PWM system. However, the output voltage and output current are
not perfect sine waves, they have a distorted wave that is close to sinusoidal waveform. This is why
compared to operation with a commercial power there will be a slight increase in motor temperature,
noise and vibration.

Operation in the low-speed area


When running continuously at low speed in conjunction with a general purpose motor, there may be a
decline in that motor's cooling effect. If this happens, operate with the output decreased from rated load.
To carry out low-speed operation continuously at the rated torque, we recommend to use a inverter
rated motor or a forced cooled motor designed for use with an inverter. When operating in conjunction
with a inverter rated motor, you must change the inverter's motor overload protection level  to VF
motor use.

Adjusting the overload protection level


This inverter protects against overloads with its overload detection circuits (electronic thermal). The
electronic thermal's reference current is set to the inverter's rated current, so it must be adjusted in line
with the rated current of the motor being used in combination.

High speed operation at and above 60Hz


Operating at frequencies greater than 60Hz will increase noise and vibration. There is also a possibility
this will exceed the motor's mechanical strength limits and the bearing limits so you should inquire to
the motor's manufacturer about such operation.

Method of lubricating load mechanisms


Operating an oil-lubricated reduction gear and gear motor in the low-speed areas will worsen the
lubricating effect. Check with the manufacturer of the reduction gear to find out about operable gearing
area.

A-15
E6581697

Low loads and low inertia loads


The motor may demonstrate instability such as abnormal vibrations or overcurrent trips at light loads of
5% or under of the load percentage, or when the load's inertia moment is extremely small. If that
happens reduce the carrier frequency.

Occurrence of instability
Unstable phenomena may occur with the load and motor combinations shown below.

1 ⋅ Combined with a motor that exceeds applicable motor ratings for the inverter
⋅ Combine with a much smaller motor according to the applicable motor rating of the inverter.
⋅ Combined with special motors
To deal with the above lower the settings of inverter carrier frequency.
⋅ Combined with couplings between load devices and motors with high backlash
When using the inverter in the above combination, use the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration function,
or when vector control is selected, adjust the speed control response or switch to V/f control mode.
⋅ Combined with loads that have sharp fluctuations in rotation such as piston movements
In this case, adjust the response time (inertial moment setting) during vector control or switch to V/f
control.

Braking a motor when cutting off power supply


A motor with its power cut off goes into free-run, and does not stop immediately. To stop the motor
quickly as soon as the power is cut off install an auxiliary brake. There are different kinds of brake
devices, both electrical and mechanical. Select the brake that is best for the system.

Load that produces regenerative torque


When combined with a load that produces regenerative torque, the overvoltage or overcurrent
protection function may be activated to trip the inverter.

A-16
E6581697

Motors with a brake


When motors with a brake are directly connected to the inverter's output, the brake cannot be released
at startup because of low voltage. Wire the brake circuit separately from the main circuit.

MC2 MC2
B B

MC1
MC1
IM IM
3-phase
power
source
FLB FLC S2 (ST)

MC3
CC 3-phase
power
source
NO CC P24
+
OUT
– 1
RY

MC1 RY
MC3 MC2

MC3
MC2

Circuit diagram 1 Circuit diagram 2

In circuit diagram 1, the brake is turned on and off through MC2 and MC3. If you do not wire it as shown
in diagram 1, an over-current trip may occur because of a bound current during brake operation.
(Example of running preparation ST assigned to terminal S2.)
In circuit diagram 2, the brake is turned on and off by using low-speed signal OUT.
In some situations, such as with elevators, turning the brake on and off with a low-speed signal may be
appropriate. Be sure to contact us before designing your system.

Measures to protect motors against surge voltages


In a system in which a 500V-class inverter is used to control the operation of a motor, very high surge
voltages may be produced. When applied to the motor coils repeatedly for a long time, may cause
deterioration of their insulation, depending on the cable length, cable routing and types of cables used.
Here are some examples of measures against surge voltages.
(1) Lower the inverter’s carrier frequency.
(2) Set the parameter f316 (Carrier frequency control mode selection) to 2 or 3.
(3) Use a motor with high insulation strength.
(4) Insert an AC reactor or a surge voltage suppression filter between the inverter and the motor.

A-17
E6581697

1.4.2 Inverters
Protecting inverters from overcurrent
The inverter has an overcurrent protection function. The programmed current level is set to the
inverter's maximum applicable motor. If the motor used has a small capacity, the overcurrent level and

1 the electronic thermal protection must be readjusted. If adjustment is necessary, refer to section 5.13,
and make adjustments as directed.

Inverter capacity
Do not use a small-capacity (kVA) inverter to control the operation of a large-capacity motor (two-class
or more larger motor), no matter how light the load is. Current ripple will raise the output peak current
making it easier to set off the overcurrent trip.

Power factor correction capacitor


Power factor correction capacitors cannot be installed on the output side of the inverter. When a motor
is run that has a power factor correction capacitor attached to it, remove the capacitors. This can cause
inverter malfunction and capacitor destruction.

U/T1
Inverter
V/T2 IM
W/T3

Remove the power factor correction


capacitor and surge absorber

Power factor correction capacitor

Operating at other than rated voltage


Connections to voltages other than the rated voltage described in the rating label cannot be made. If a
connection must be made to a power supply other than one with rated voltage, use a transformer to
raise or lower the voltage to the rated voltage.

A-18
E6581697

Circuit breaking when two or more inverters are used on the same power line

MCCB1 MCCB2 (circuit breaking fuse)


INV1
MCCB3
INV2
MCCB:

MCCBn+1
No-fuse breaker
1
INVn

Breaking of selected inverter

There is no fuse in the inverter's main circuit. Thus, as the diagram above shows, when more than one
inverter is used on the same power line, you must select interrupting characteristics so that only
MCCB2 to MCCBn+1 will trip and the MCCB1 will not trip when a short occurs in the inverter (INV1).
When you cannot select the proper characteristics install a circuit interrupting fuse behind MCCB2 to
MCCBn+1.

If power supply distortion is not negligible


If the power supply distortion is not negligible because the inverter shares a power distribution line with
other systems causing distorted waves, such as systems with thyristors or large-capacity inverters,
install an input reactor to improve the input power factor, to reduce higher harmonics, or to suppress
external surges.

„ Disposal
Refer to chapter 16.

A-19
E6581697

1.4.3 What to do about the leakage current

Caution
• The leakage current through the input/output power cables of inverter and capacitance of motor may
affect to peripheral devices.
The value of leakage current is increased under the condition of the PWM carrier frequency and the
Mandatory length of the input/output power cables. In case the total cable length (total of length between an
1 action inverter and motors) is more than 100m, overcurrent trip may occur even the motor no-load current.
Make enough space among each phase cable or install the filter (MSF) as countermeasure.

(1) Effects of leak current across ground


Leakage current may flow not just through the inverter system but also through ground wires to other
systems. Leakage current will cause earth leakage breakers, leakage current relays, ground relays, fire
alarms and sensors to operate improperly, and it will cause superimposed noise on the TV screen or
display of incorrect current detection with the CT.

ELCB Inverter
Power IM
supply

ELCB Inverter
IM

Leakage current path across ground

Remedies:
1. If there is no radio-frequency interference or similar problem, detach the built-in noise filter
capacitor, using the grounding capacitor disconnecting switch.
2. Reduce PWM carrier frequency.
The setting of PWM carrier frequency is done with the parameter .
Although the electromagnetic noise level is reduced, the motor acoustic noise is increased.
3. Use high frequency remedial products for earth leakage breakers

A-20
E6581697

(2) Affects of leakage current across lines


Thermal relays

CT
Power Inverter
IM
supply

Leakage current path across wires


A
1
(1) Thermal relays
The high frequency component of current leaking into electrostatic capacity between inverter out-
put wires will increase the effective current values and make externally connected thermal relays
operate improperly. If the wires are more than 50 meters long, it will be easy for the external
thermal relay to operate improperly with models having motors of low rated current (several
A(ampere) or less), because the leakage current will increase in proportion to the motor rating.

Remedies:
1. Use the electronic thermal built into the inverter. (Refer to section 3.5)
The setting of the electronic thermal is done using parameter , .
2. Reduce the inverter's PWM carrier frequency. However, that will increase the motor's magnetic
noise.
The setting of PWM carrier frequency is done with the parameter . (Refer to section 6.14)
3. This can be improved by installing 0.1μ to 0.5μF - 1000V film capacitor to the input/output terminals
of each phase in the thermal relay.

U/T1

V/T2 IM

W/T3
Thermal relays

(2) CT and ammeter


If a CT and ammeter are connected externally to detect inverter output current, the leak current's high
frequency component may destroy the ammeter. If the wires are more than 50 meters long, it will be
easy for the high frequency component to pass through the externally connected CT and be
superimposed on and burn the ammeter with models having motors of low rated current (several A
(ampere) or less), especially the 400V class low capacity (4.0kW or less) models, because the leakage
current will increase in proportion to the motor's rated current.

A-21
E6581697

Remedies:
1. Use a meter output terminal in the inverter control circuit.
The load current can be output on the meter output terminal (FM). If the meter is connected, use an
ammeter of 1mAdc full scale or a voltmeter of 10V full scale.
0-20mAdc (4-20mAdc) can be also output. (Refer to section 3.4)
2. Use the monitor functions built into the inverter.
1 Use the monitor functions on the panel built into the inverter to check current values. (Refer to
section 8.2.1)

1.4.4 Installation
„ Installation environment
This inverter is an electronic control instrument. Take full consideration to installing it in the proper operating
environment.

Warning
• Do not place any inflammable substances near the inverter.
If an accident occurs in which flame is emitted, this could lead to fire.
• Do not install in any location where the inverter could come into contact with water or other fluids.
Prohibited This can result in electric shock or fire.
• Operate under the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual.
Operations under any other conditions may result in malfunction.
Mandatory
action

Caution
• Do not install the inverter in any location subject to large amounts of vibration.
This could cause the unit to fall, resulting in bodily injury.

Prohibited

A-22
E6581697

• Do not install in any location of high temperature, high humidity,


moisture condensation and freezing and avoid locations where
there is exposure to water and/or where there may be large
amounts of dust, metallic fragments and oil mist.
• Do not install in any location where corrosive gases or grinding
fluids are present.

• Operate in areas where ambient temperature ranges from -10°C to 60°C.


1
When using the inverter in locations with temperatures above 40°C, the current reduction is necessary.
(Refer to section 6.14)

[Position for measuring ambient temperature]

5cm 5cm

Measurement position

5cm
Measurement position

Note: The inverter is a heat-emitting body. Make sure proper space and ventilation is provided when
installing in the cabinet.

• Do not install in any location that is subject to large amounts of vibration.

Note: If the inverter is installed in a location that is subject to


vibration, anti-vibration measures are required. Please
consult with Toshiba about these measures.

• If the inverter is installed near any of the equipment listed below, provide measures to insure against
errors in operation.

Solenoids: Attach surge suppressor on coil.


Brakes: Attach surge suppressor on coil.
Magnetic contactors: Attach surge suppressor on coil.
Fluorescent lights: Attach surge suppressor on coil.
Resistors: Place far away from the inverter.
Resistors

A-23
E6581697

„ How to install

Warning
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing.
This can result in electric shock or fire. Please consult your local sales agency for repairs. Call your
local sales agency for repairs.

1 Prohibited
• Mount the inverter on a metal plate.
The rear panel gets very hot. Do not install in an inflammable object, this can result in fire.
• Do not operate with the front panel cover removed.
This can result in electric shock.
• An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications (e.g. shut off input
Mandatory power then engage mechanical brake).
action Operation cannot be stopped immediately by the inverter alone, thus risking an accident or injury.
• All options used must be those specified by Toshiba.
The use of any other option may result in an accident.

Caution
• The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight.
If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall resulting in injury.
• If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake.
Mandatory
The brake on the inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that purpose, injury
action
may result.

(1) Normal installation


Select an indoor location with good ventilation, and then install it upright on a flat metal plate.
When installing multiple inverters, leave at least 3 cm of space between each inverter and install them
aligned horizontally.
When using the inverter in locations with temperatures above 40°C, the current reduction is necessary.

(2) Side-by-side installation


To align the inverters side-by-side horizontally, the current reduction is necessary.

Normal installation Side-by-side installation

5 cm or more 5 cm or more
Remove seals on top

3 cm or more Inverter 3 cm or more Inverter Inverter Inverter

5 cm or more 5 cm or more

A-24
E6581697

The space shown in the diagram is the minimum allowable space. Because air cooled equipment has cooling
fans built in on the top or bottom surfaces, make the space on top and bottom as large as possible to allow
for air passage.
Note: Do not install in any location where there is high humidity or high temperatures and where there are
large amounts of dust, metallic fragments and oil mist.

(3) Flat mount installation


VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL and VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL can be installed as flat mounting.
1
„ Calorific values of the inverter and the required ventilation
About 5% of the rated power of the inverter will be lost as a result of conversion from AC to DC or from DC to
AC. In order to suppress the rise in temperature inside the cabinet when this loss becomes heat loss, the
interior of the cabinet must be ventilated and cooled.

The amount of forcible air-cooling ventilation required and the necessary heat discharge surface quantity
when operating in a sealed cabinet according to motor capacity are as follows.

Standby
Amount of forcible air Heat discharge surface
Calorific values (W) power
cooling ventilation area required for sealed
Voltage class Inverter type Note 1) requirement
required (m3/min) storage cabinet (m3)
(W)
4kHz 12kHz 4kHz 12kHz 4kHz 12kHz Note 2)
2002PL 25 27 0.14 0.15 0.49 0.54 11
2004PL 38 43 0.22 0.24 0.76 0.86 11
Single-phase
VFMB1S- 2007PL 51 56 0.29 0.32 1.03 1.11 11
240V class
2015PL 81 93 0.46 0.53 1.62 1.86 11
2022PL 103 112 0.58 0.63 2.05 2.23 11
4004PL 28 31 0.16 0.18 0.55 0.63 15.3
4007PL 37 48 0.21 0.27 0.75 0.96 15.3
4015PL 63 77 0.36 0.44 1.26 1.54 15.3
4022PL 78 97 0.44 0.55 1.57 1.94 17.1
Three-phase
VFMB1- 4037PL 125 154 0.71 0.87 2.50 3.07 17.1
500V class
4055PL 233 291 1.32 1.65 4.66 5.81 22
4075PL 263 352 1.49 2.00 5.26 7.05 22
4110PL 403 507 2.29 2.88 8.06 10.1 31
4150PL 480 611 2.72 3.47 9.59 12.2 31

Notes
1) Case of 100% Load Continuation operation. The heat loss for the optional external devices (input
reactor, DC reactor, radio noise reduction filters, etc.) is not included in the calorific values in the table
2) It is power consumption when power is on but output frequency is 0Hz, and cooling fan is activated.

A-25
E6581697

„ Panel designing taking into consideration the effects of noise


The inverter generates high frequency noise. When designing the control panel setup, consideration must be
given to that noise. Examples of measures are given below.
• Wire so that the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires are separated. Do not place them in the
same conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.
• Provide shielding and twisted wire for control circuit wiring.
• Separate the input (power) and output (motor) wires of the main circuit. Do not place them in the same
1 conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.
• Ground the inverter ground terminals ( ).
• Install surge suppressor on any magnetic contactor and relay coils used around the inverter.
• Install noise filters if necessary.
• To comply with the EMC directives, install the optional EMC plate and fix the shield to it.
• Install EMC plate and use shielded wires.

„ Installing more than one unit in a cabinet


When two or more inverters are installed in one cabinet, pay attention to the followings.

• Inverters may be installed side by side with each other with no space left between them.
• When installing inverters side by side, use them where the ambient temperature will not rise above 40°C.
• When using inverters where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, leave a space of 3 cm or
more between them, or operate each inverter at a current lower than the rated one.
• Ensure a space of at least 20 centimeters on the top and bottom of the inverters.
• Install an air deflecting plate so that the heat rising up from the inverter on the bottom does not affect the
inverter on the top.
Ventilation fan

Inverter

Air deflecting plate

Inverter

A-26
E6581697

2. Connection

Warning
• Never disassemble, modify or repair.
This can result in electric shock, fire and injury. For repairs, call your sales agency.
Disassembly
prohibited
• Don't stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring hole and cooling fan covers.
This can result in electric shock or other injury. 2
• Don't place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings, rods, wires). This can
result in electric shock or fire.
Prohibited
• Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter.
That may result in electric shock or fire.

Caution
• When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers.
The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.
Prohibited

2.1 Cautions on wiring

Warning
• Never remove the terminal cover when power is on or open door if enclosed in a cabinet.
The unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in electric shock.

Prohibited
• Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet.
If power is turned on without the terminal cover attached or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet. This
can result in electric shock or other injury.
• Electrical construction work must be done by a qualified expert.
Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly.
If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may result in injury.
• Wiring must be done after installation.
Mandatory If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock.
action • The following steps must be performed before wiring.
(1) Shut off all input power.
(2) Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.
(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (400VDC or 800VDC or more), and check to make sure
that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA-PC) is 45V or less.
If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.
• Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque.
If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.

B-1
E6581697

Warning
• Ground must be connected securely.
If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire.

Be Grounded

Caution
• Do not attach devices with built-in capacitors (such as noise filters or surge absorber) to the output
(motor side) terminal.
2 Prohibited
This could cause a fire.

■ Preventing radio noise


To prevent electrical interference such as radio noise, separately bundle wires to the main circuit's power
terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and wires to the motor terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).

■ Control and main power supply


The control power supply and the main circuit power supply for this inverter are the same.
If a malfunction or trip causes the main circuit to be shut off, control power will also be shut off. When
checking the cause of the malfunction or the trip, use the trip holding retention selection parameter.
In addition, please use an optional control power supply backup unit when only control power supply
operates, even if the main circuit is shut off due to trouble or tripping.

■ Wiring
• Because the space between the main circuit terminals is small, use sleeved pressure terminals for the
connections. Connect the terminals so that adjacent terminals do not touch each other.
• For ground terminal use wires of the size that is equivalent to or larger than those given in table 10.1
and always ground the inverter (240V voltage class: D type ground, 500V voltage class: C type ground).
Use as large and short a ground wire as possible and wire it as close as possible to the inverter.
• For the sizes of electric wires used in the main circuit, refer to the table in section 10.1.
• The length of the main circuit wire in table 10.1 should be no longer than 30 meters. If the wire is longer
than 30 meters, the wire size (diameter) must be increased.

B-2
E6581697

2.2 Standard connections

Warning
• Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
Connecting input power to the output could destroy the inverter or cause a fire.
• Do not insert a braking resistor between DC terminals (between PA/+ and PC/-).
It could cause a fire.
See 6.13.4 for the connection of a resistor.
Prohibited • First shut off input power and wait at least 15 minutes before touching wires on equipment (MCCB) that
is connected to inverter power side.
Touching the wires before that time could result in electric shock. 2
• Do not shut down the external power supply on ahead when VIA or VIB terminals are used as logic
input terminal by external power supply.
It could cause unexpected result as VIA or VIB terminals are ON status.
• Set a parameter f109 when VIA or VIB terminals are used as logic input terminal.
If it is not set, it could result in malfunction.

Mandatory
action
• Ground must be connected securely.
If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire when a malfunction or
current leak occurs.
Be Grounded

B-3
E6581697

2.2.1 Standard connection diagram 1


This diagram shows a standard wiring of the main circuit.

Standard connection diagram - SINK (Negative) (common:CC)

Braking resistor(Option)

2
PA/+ PC/- PBe PB
*2
Main circuit power supply
MCCB Motor
1ph-240V class: single-phase 200-240V R/L1 U/T1
-50/60Hz S/L2 Noise V/T2
3ph-500V class: three-phase 380-500V T/L3 filter
Power circuit
W/T3
M
-50/60Hz
STO
*6
Control power +SU
supply F Forward
Single MCCB(2P)
*5
phase R/L1 Control R Reverse
Power
supply S/L2/N VF-MB1 circuit
RES Reset

FLA S1 Preset-speed 1

S2 Preset-speed 2
Protective function FLB
activation output S3 Preset-speed 3
FLC
Operation panel CC Common
*1: Set the slide switch SW1 to sink side. SW1 *1
Refer to page B-9,10 for details.
P24 Speed reach
RY SOURCE
signal output
*2: The T/L3 terminal is not provided for Low-speed
PLC OUT Ry
single-phase models. RC SINK
signal output
Use the R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals as RS485 NO
input terminals. SW2(S3) *3
connector
LOGIC CC
*3: When using the OUT output terminal in
sink logic mode, short the NO and CC PTC
terminals.
*4 *4
*4: When VIA or VIB terminal is used as logic
FM CC VIC VIB VIA PP
input terminal, refer to section 7.2.1.
*5: To supply control power from an external Meter +
power supply for backing up the control Current signal: 4(0)-20mA
Frequency
power supplied from the inverter, an optional meter
control power backup device (CPS002Z) is (ammeter)
required. In such a case, the backup device - Voltage signal: 0-+10V
is used at the same time with the internal 7.5V-1mA (or -10-+10V)
power supply of the inverter.
(or 0-10V/0(4)-20mA)
The optional control power backup unit can
be used with both 240V and 500V models. External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC: 0-10V)
*6: When STO terminal is used as compliance with
safety standards, refer to section 9.3.

B-4
E6581697

2.2.2 Standard connection diagram 2

Standard connection diagram - SOURCE (Positive) (common:P24)

Braking resistor(Option)

Main circuit power supply


MCCB
*2
R/L1
PA/+ PC/- PB/e PB

U/T1
Motor 2
1ph-240V class: single-phase 200-240V
-50/60Hz S/L2 Noise V/T2
3ph-500V class: three-phase 380-500V T/L3 filter
Power circuit
W/T3
M
-50/60Hz
STO
*6

Control power +SU


Single MCCB(2P) supply CC
phase R/L1 F Forward
*5 Control
Power
supply
S/L2/N VF-MB1 circuit R Reverse

RES Reset
FLA
S1 Preset-speed 1
Protective function FLB
S2 Preset-speed 2
activation output
FLC S3 Preset-speed 3
*1: Set the slide switch SW1 to sink side. Operation panel
Refer to page B-9,10 for details. P24 Common
SW1 *1 *3
*2: The T/L3 terminal is not provided for
single-phase models. RY SOURCE OUT
Use the R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals as Low-speed PLC
NO Ry
input terminals. signal output RC SINK Speed reach
RS485 CC signal output
*3: When using the NO output terminal in SW2(S3)
source logic mode, short the P24 and connector
OUT terminals. LOGIC

*4: When VIA or VIB terminal is used as logic PTC


input terminal, refer to section 7.2.1.
*4 *4
*5: To supply control power from an external FM CC VIC VIB VIA PP
power supply for backing up the control
power supplied from the inverter, an optional Meter +
control power backup device (CPS002Z) is Frequency
Current signal: 4(0)-20mA
required. In such a case, the backup device meter
is used at the same time with the internal (ammeter)
power supply of the inverter. - Voltage signal: 0-+10V
The optional control power backup unit can (or -10-+10V)
7.5V-1mA
be used with both 200V and 400V models.
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
*6: When STO terminal is used as compliance with External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
safety standards, refer to section 9.3. (or voltage signal between VIA and CC: 0-10V)

B-5
E6581697

2.3 Description of terminals

2.3.1 Power circuit terminals


■ Connections with peripheral equipment

No-fuse Magnetic Input AC noise


braker connector reactor reduction filter
U/T1
Motor
R/L1 Inverter

2 Power
supply
S/L2 V/T2

W/T3
M
T/L3
Zero-phase
PBe PB reactor

Braking resistor

Note 1: The T/L3 terminal is not provided for any single-phase models. So if you are using single-phase
models, use the R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals to connect power cables.

■ Power circuit
Terminal symbol Terminal function
Grounding terminal for connecting inverter. There are 3 terminals in total.
Up to 4.0kW : 2 terminals on upper side, 1 terminal on down side.
5.5 to 15kW : 3 terminals on down side.
240V class: Single-phase 200 to 240V-50/60Hz
R/L1,S/L2,T/L3 500V class: Three-phase 380 to 500V-50/60Hz
* Single-phase inputs are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 Connect to three-phase motor.
Connect to braking resistors.
PBe, PB Change parameters , , ,  if necessary.
This is a positive potential terminal in the internal DC main circuit.
PA/+ DC common power can be input with PC/- terminal.
This is a negative potential terminal in the internal DC main circuit.
PC/- DC common power can be input with PA/+ terminal.
The arrangements of power circuit terminals are different from each range.
Refer to section 1.3.3.1) for details.

B-6
E6581697

2.3.2 Control circuit terminals


The control circuit terminal board is common to all equipment.
Regarding to the function and specification of each terminal, please refer to the following table.
Refer to section 1.3.3.3) about the arrangement of control circuit terminals.

■ Control circuit terminals


Terminal Input / Electrical
Function Inverter internal circuits
symbol output specifications
Shorting across F-CC or P24-F

F Input
causes forward rotation; open
causes deceleration stop.
2
(When Standby ST is always ON)
3 different functions can be No voltage +24V EXT
SINK
assigned. logic input SW1
Shorting across R-CC or P24-R 24Vdc-5mA or less
causes reverse rotation; open F SOURCE
causes deceleration stop. R
R Input RES
(When Standby ST is always ON) *Sink/Source and S1
Multifunction programmable logic input

2.2k
3 different functions can be PLC selectable
assigned. using slide switch 470

This inverter protective function is SW1 S2 2.2k

reset if RES-CC or P24-RES is S3


connected. Shorting RES-CC or SW2
+5V +5V

RES Input P24-RES has no effect when the Pulse train input 15k 1k
inverter is in a normal condition. (S2 terminal) +5V
27.4k
2 different functions can be Pulse frequency 27.4k

assigned. range: 27.4k 1k

Shorting across S1-CC or P24-S1 10pps~20kpps +5V

causes preset speed operation.


S1 Input 27.4k
2 different functions can be
1k
assigned. PTC input
Shorting across S2-CC or P24-S2 (S3 terminal)
causes preset speed operation. PTC type: PT100
S2 Input By changing parameter f146
setting, this terminal can also be
used as a pulse train input terminal.
Shorting across S3-CC or P24-S3
causes preset speed operation.
By changing slide switch SW2 and
S3 Input
parameter f147 setting, this
terminal can also be used as a PTC
input terminal.

B-7
E6581697

Terminal Input / Electrical


Function Inverter internal circuits
symbol output specifications

Common CC
Control circuit's equipotential terminal
CC to Input /
(3 terminals)
output
U

+24V
10Vdc Voltage
PP

2
PP Output Analog power supply output (permissible load Regulator
current: 10mA)

Multifunction programmable analog input.


Factory default setting: 0-10Vdc (1/1000 +5V
resolution) and 0-60Hz (0-50Hz) 10Vdc
frequency input. 16k 1k
VIA Input (internal impedance: VIA
By changing parameter f109 setting, 30kΩ)
15k
Note 1) this terminal can also be used as a
multifunction programmable logic input
terminal.
Multifunction programmable analog input.
Factory default setting: 0-10Vdc (1/1000
resolution) and 0-60Hz (0-50Hz)
frequency input. +5V
10Vdc
The function can be changed to -10-+10V 16k
VIB Input (internal impedance:
input by parameter  =1 setting. VIB
30kΩ)
Note 1) 15k
By changing parameter f109 setting,
this terminal can also be used as a
multifunction programmable logic input
terminal.
+5V

3.6k 1k
Multifunction programmable analog input. 4-20mA
VIC Input (internal VIC
0-20mA (4-20mA) input. 250
impedance: 250Ω)
100k

Note 1) When VIA and VIB terminals are used as logic input terminal, connect the pull-up or pull-down resistors.

B-8
E6581697

Terminal Input / Electrical


Function Inverter internal circuits
symbol output specifications
1mAdc full-scale
ammeter

Multifunction programmable analog 0-10V DC volt


output. Standard default setting: output meter 121
+
frequency. Permissible load +24V –
The function can be changed to ammeter, resistance: +24V
FM Output Voltage
0-10Vdc voltage or 0-20mAdc (4-20mA) 1kΩ or more FM
current output by parameter  Current
+
setting. 0-20mA (4-20mA) 68 –
Resolution Max. 1/1000. DC ammeter
Permissible load
resistance:
2
750Ω or less

Output 24Vdc power output 24Vdc-100mA EXT

P24 +24V
This terminal can be used as a common P24
Current
Input terminal when an external power supply - limiter
is used by changing SW1 to PLC side. SW1

DC power input terminal for operating the Voltage: 24Vdc±


control circuit. Connect a control power 10% +SU
Input
backup device (option) between +SU and Current: 1A or
+SU CC. more U
It is used with STO for safety function.
Output +SU and STO terminals are short- -
circuited by metal bar at factory setting.
When +SU and STO are short-circuited,
the inverter is put into a standby state. +5V

(Factory setting) And when the circuit Independently of


between them is opened, the motor is SW1 27.4k
STO CPU
coasting stop. These terminals can be ON: DC17V or
STO Input used for inter lock. more 10k
This terminal is not a multifunction OFF: Less than
Note 2) programmable input terminal. DC12V
It is a terminal with the safety function (OFF: Coast stop)
that complies with SIL II of the safety
standard IEC61508.
Note2) When STO terminal is used as the safety function, refer to section 9.3.

B-9
E6581697

Terminal Input / Electrical


Function Inverter internal circuits
symbol output specifications
Multifunction programmable open Open collector output
collector output. Standard default settings 24Vdc-100mA
detect and output speed reach signal.
Multifunction output terminals to which To output pulse OUT
two different functions can be assigned. 4.7 PTC
trains,
The NO terminal is an isoelectric output
OUT a current of 10mA
Output terminal. It is isolated from the CC
NO or more needs to 4.7
terminal. be passed. NO
By changing parameter f669 settings, Pulse frequency
2 these terminals can also be used as
multifunction programmable pulse train
output terminals.
range:
10~2kpps
Max. switching
capacity
250Vac-2A
Multifunction programmable relay logic (cosφ=1)
FLA
output. : at resistive load
Detects the operation of the inverter's
FLA +24V
protection function. (Standard default 30Vdc-1A FLB
FLB Output
setting) 250Vac-1A
FLC
Contact across FLA-FLC is closed and (cosφ=0.4)
FLB-FLC is opened during protection
Note 3) FLC
function operation. Min. permissible
load
5Vdc-100mA
24Vdc-5mA
Max. switching
capacity
250Vac-2A
(cosφ=1)
Multifunction programmable relay contact
: at resistive load
output. +24V
Standard default settings detect and RY
RY 30Vdc-1A
Output output low-speed signal output
RC 250Vac-1A
frequencies.
Multifunction output terminals to which (cosφ=0.4)
RC
Note 3)
two different functions can be assigned.
Min. permissible
load
5Vdc-100mA
24Vdc-5mA
Note3) A chattering (momentary ON/OFF of contact) is generated by external factors of the vibration and the impact, etc. In
particular, please set the filter of 10ms or more, or timer for measures when connecting it directly with input unit terminal
of programmable controller. Please use the OUT terminal as much as possible when the programmable controller is
connected.

B-10
E6581697

■ SINK (Negative) logic/SOURCE (Positive) logic (When the


inverter's internal power supply is used)
Current flowing out turns control input terminals on. These are called sink logic terminals.
The general used method in Europe is source logic in which current flowing into the input terminal turns it
on.
Sink logic is sometimes referred to as negative logic, and source logic is referred to as positive logic.
Each logic is supplied with electricity from either the inverter's internal power supply or an external power
supply, and its connections vary depending on the power supply used.
Sink/source logic can be switched by slide switch SW1.

2
<Examples of connections when the inverter's internal power supply is used>

Slide switch SW1 : Sink side Slide switch SW1 : Source side

Sink (Negative) logic Source (Positive) logic

24VDC 24VDC
Input Common P24 Input
Output F

Output F
Common CC

24VDC 24VDC
Output Output
Common P24 P24

Input OUT OUT

NO Input NO

CC Common CC

Programmable Inverter Programmable Inverter


controller controller

B-11
E6581697

■ SINK (Negative) logic (When an external power supply is used)


The P24 terminal is used to connect to an external power supply or to separate a terminal from other input
or output terminals.

<Examples of connections when an external power supply is used>

Slide switch SW1 : PLC side Sink (Negative) logic

24VDC 24VDC
Input
Common
P24
2 Output
SW1: PLC side
F

CC

24VDC
Output

Input OUT

Common NO

Programmable Inverter
controller
■ Switching of slide switch
Refer to section 1.3.3 3) about location of slide switch.

(1) Switching of sink/source logic: SW1


Setting of sink/source logic for F, R, RES, S1, S2, and S3 terminals are switched by slide switch SW1.
When an external power supply is used for sink logic, set the slide switch SW1 to PLC side.
Set the sink/source logic switching before power supply switches on.
After confirming the right for sink/source setting, power supply switches on.

(2) Switching of S3 terminal function: SW2


Setting of logic input/ PTC input for S3 terminal is switched by slide switch SW2 and parameter 47.
When using S3 terminal as a logic input terminal, set the slide switch SW2 to LOGIC side and set the
parameter =.
When using S3 terminal as a PTC input terminal, set the slide switch SW2 to PTC side and set the
parameter =.
Match the setting of slide switch SW2 and parameter  surely.
If it is not, this can result in malfunction.

B-12
E6581697

3. Operations
Caution
• Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is going to the inverter even if the motor is
stopped.
Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric shock.
• Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter with a damp cloth.
Such practices may result in electric shock.
Prohibited • Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.
The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.
Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents when the motor
unexpectedly restarts.
• Turn the input power on only after attaching the terminal block cover (i.e., after closing the cabinet
doors).
3
If the input power is turned on without the terminal block cover attached (i.e., without closing the
cabinet doors), this may result in electric shock.
• If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds, immediately turn power off.
If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire. Call your local sales
agency for repairs.
• Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time.
Mandatory • Turn the input power on only after attaching the terminal block cover.
action When enclosed inside a cabinet and used with the terminal block cover removed, always close the
cabinet doors first and then turn the power on. If the power is turned on with the terminal block cover or
the cabinet doors open, this may result in electric shock.
• Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after malfunction.
If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart suddenly causing
injury.

Caution
• Do not touch heat radiating fins or discharge resistors.
These devices are hot, and you'll get burned if you touch them.

Contact
prohibited
• Observe all permissible operating ranges of motors and mechanical equipment. (Refer to the motor's
instruction manual.)
Not observing these ranges may result in injury.
Prohibited

C-1
E6581697

3.1 How to Set the Setup Menu

Warning
• With incorrect setting, the drive will be damaged and have unexpected movement. Be sure to set the
setup parameter correctly.

Mandatory
action

Set the setup menu according to the base frequency and the base frequency voltage of the motor connected. (If you
are not sure which region code of setup menu should be selected and what values should be specified, consult your
distributer.)
3 Each setup menu automatically sets all parameters relating to the base frequency and the base frequency voltage of
the motor connected. (See the table on the following page.)

Follow these steps to change the setup menu [Example: Selecting a region code to ]
Panel operated LED display Operation

 set is blinking


eu jp
Turn the setting dial, and select region code ""
(Europe).
asia usa

Press the center of the setting dial to determine the


⇔  region.

 The operation frequency is displayed (Standby).

☆ If you want to change the selected region by the setup menu, the setup menu will appear by the following settings.
Please note, however, that all setting parameters return to status of default setting.
• Set parameter  to "".
• Set parameter  to "".
☆ The parameter settings in the table on the following page can be changed individually even after they are
selected in the setup menu.

C-2
E6581697

„ Values set by each setup parameter



  
(Mainly in Asia,
Title Function (Mainly in (Mainly in (Mainly in
Oceania)
Europe) North America) Japan)
Note 1)
/
/ Frequency settings 50.0(Hz) 60.0(Hz) 50.0(Hz) 60.0(Hz)

 /
 /
 /
Input point 2 frequency 50.0(Hz) 60.0(Hz) 50.0(Hz) 60.0(Hz)
 /
 / 3


Base 240V class 230(V) 230(V) 230(V) 200(V)


/
frequency

voltage 1, 2 500V class 400(V) 460(V) 400(V) 400(V)

 V/F control mode selection 0 0 0 2

Supply voltage correction


 2 2 2 3
(output voltage limitation)
-1 -1 -1
 Motor rated speed 1410(min ) 1710(min ) 1410(min ) 1710(min-1)
Note 1) Excludes Japan.

C-3
E6581697

3.2 Simplified Operation of the VF-MB1


The procedures for setting operation frequency and the methods of operation can be selected from the following.

: (1) Run and stop using the panel keypad


Run / Stop (2) Run and stop using external signals to terminal
board
: (1) Setting using setting dial
Setting the frequency (2) Setting using external signals to terminal board
(0-10Vdc, 4-20mAdc)

3
Use the basic parameters  (command mode selection) 
and (frequency setting mode selection) for selection.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Terminal board
1: Panel keypad (including remote
keypad)
 Command mode selection 1
2: RS485 communication
3: CANopen communication
4: Communication option
0: Setting dial 1(save even if power is off)
1: Terminal board VIA
2: Terminal board VIB
3: Setting dial 2(press in center to save)
4: RS485 communication
Frequency setting mode
 5: UP/DOWN from external logic input 0
selection
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
☆ fmod=0 (setting dial 1) is the mode that after the frequency is set by the setting dial, the frequency is saved
even if the power is turned off.
☆ Refer to section 5.6 for details about = to  and 11.

C-4
E6581697

3.2.1 How to run and stop


[Example of  setting procedure]
Panel operation LED display Operation
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection = [Operation frequency])

MODE  Displays the first basic parameter [History ()].

 Turn the setting dial, and select "".

Press the center of the setting dial to read the parameter value.

(Standard default: ).
3
 Turn the setting dial to change the parameter value to  (terminal block).

Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed parameter.
⇔
 and the parameter set value are displayed alternately.

(1) Run and stop using the panel keypad (=)


Use the RUN and STOP keys on the panel keypad to start and stop the motor.

RUN : Motor runs. STOP : Motor stops.

, The direction of rotation is determined by the setting of parameter  (forward run, reverse run
selection). (: forward run, : reverse run)

, To switch between forward run and reverse run from the remote keypad (option), the parameter 
(forward run, reverse run selection) needs to be set to  or . (Refer to section 5.8)

(2) RUN / STOP by means of an external signal to the terminal board (=):
Sink (Negative) logic

Use external signals to the inverter terminal board to start and stop the motor.

Slow down
Short F and CC terminals: run forward and stop
Frequency

ON
Open F and CC terminals: slow down and stop F-CC OFF

C-5
E6581697

(3) Coast stop


Coast stop
The standard default is deceleration stop. To make a
Motor
coast stop, assign "6 (ST)" to an idle terminal. speed
Set parameter =.
For coast stop, open the ST-CC when stopping the
motor in the state described at right. The monitor on ON
F-CC
the inverter at this time will display . OFF

A coast stop can also be made by assigning "


(FRR)" to an idle terminal. ON
ST-CC
OFF
When doing this, a coast stop is done by shorting
FRR and CC.

C-6
E6581697

3.2.2 How to set the frequency


[Example of  setting procedure]: Setting the frequency by the terminal VIA
Panel operation LED display Operation
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection = [Operation frequency])

MODE  Displays the first basic parameter [History ()].

 Turn the setting dial, and select "".

Press the center of the setting dial to read the parameter value.

(Standard default: ).


Turn the setting dial to change the parameter value to  (terminal block
VIA).
3
The parameter value is written. and the parameter value are
⇔
displayed alternately several times.

* Pressing the MODE key twice returns the display to standard monitor mode (displaying operation frequency).

(1) Setting using the keypad (= or )


: Moves the frequency up : Moves the frequency down

„ Example of operating from the panel (=: press in center to save)


Panel operation LED display Operation
Displays the operation frequency.

(When standard monitor display selection = [Operation frequency])
Set the operation frequency. (The frequency will not be saved if the

power is turned off in this state.)

Save the operation frequency.  and the frequency are displayed


⇔
alternately.

„ Example of operating from the panel (=: save even if power is off)
Panel operation LED display Operation
Display the operation frequency.
 (When standard monitor display selection is set as =
[operation frequency])

 Set the operation frequency.

The frequency will be saved even if the power is turned off in this
- 
state.

C-7
E6581697

(2) Setting of frequency using external signals to terminal block (=,or)

„ Frequency setting
1) Setting the frequency using external potentiometer

★Potentiometer
PP Setting frequency using the potentiometer (1k -10kΩ, 1/4W)
Refer to section 6.5.2 for detailed adjustment.

VIA : Setting frequency


using potentiometer 50 or 60Hz

Frequency
CC
0
MIN MAX
Note) Set parameter =,, or .

3 2) Setting the frequency using voltage input (0-10V)

★Voltage signal
Setting frequency using voltage signals (0-10V).
+ VIB
Refer to section 6.5.2 for detailed adjustment.
: Voltage signal 0-10Vdc
- CC 50 or 60Hz

Frequency

Note) Set parameter = , =.


0
0Vdc 10Vdc

3) Setting the frequency using current input (4-20mA)

★Current Signal
Current signal Setting frequency using current signals (4-20mA).
+ VIC Refer to section 6.5.2 for detailed adjustment.
: Current signal 4-20mAdc

- CC 50 or 60Hz

Frequency
* Setting of parameters also allow 0-20mAdc.
Note) Set parameter =. 0
4mAdc 20mAdc

4) Setting the frequency using voltage input (-10-+10V)

★Voltage signal
Set the frequency using voltage signals (-10-+10V).
+ V IB Refer to section 6.5.2 for detailed adjustment.
: Voltage signal -10-+10Vdc
50 or 60Hz
Forward run
- CC
-10Vdc
+10Vdc
Reverse run
Note) Set parameter f107=1, =. 50 or 60Hz

C-8
E6581697

3.3 How to operate the VF-MB1


Overview of how to operate the inverter with simple examples

Setting the frequency using the setting dial, and run/stop using the
Ex.1 panel keypad (1)

(1) Wiring

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB

MCCB Motor 3
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

*1 Operation panel

(2) Parameter setting (default setting)


Title Function Programmed value
 Command mode selection 1
 Frequency setting mode selection 0
(3) Operation
Run/stop: Press the RUN and STOP keys on the panel.

Frequency setting: Turn the setting dial to set the frequency. The frequency setting is saved just by
turning the setting dial.

*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N.

C-9
E6581697

Setting the frequency using the setting dial, and run/stop using the
Ex.2 panel keypad (2)

(1) Wiring

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB

MCCB Motor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

3 *1 Operation panel

(2) Parameter setting


Title Function Programmed value
 Command mode selection 1
 Frequency setting mode selection 3
(3) Operation
Run/stop: Press the RUN and STOP keys on the panel.

Frequency setting: Turn the setting dial to set the frequency.


To save the frequency setting, press the center of the setting dial.
and the set frequency will flash on and off alternately.

*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N.

C-10
E6581697

Setting the frequency using the setting dial, and run/stop using
Ex.3 external signals

(1) Wiring

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB

MCCB Motor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

*1
Operation panel
F Forward signal 3
R Reverse signal

CC Common

(2) Parameter setting


Title Function Programmed value
 Command mode selection 0
 Frequency setting mode selection 0 or 3
(3) Operation
Run/stop: ON/OFF input to F-CC, R-CC. (with sink logic)
Frequency setting: Turn the setting dial to set the frequency.

*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N.

C-11
E6581697

Setting the frequency using external signals, run/stop using external


Ex.4 signals.

(1) Wiring

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB

MCCB Motor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

3 *1
F

R
Forward signal

Reverse signal

CC Common

VIC Current signal:


CC VIA VIB PP 4∼20mA

Voltage signal: 0∼10V

External potentiometer
(Otherwise, input voltage signal between the terminals VIA-CC.)

(2) Parameter setting


Title Function Programmed value
 Command mode selection 0
 Frequency setting mode selection 1, 2 or 8
(3) Operation
Run/stop: ON/OFF input to F-CC, R-CC. (with sink logic)
Frequency setting: VIA: Input 0-10Vdc (external potentiometer), VIB: Input 0-10Vdc or
VIC: 4-20mAdc to set the frequency.
, Set the selection of VIA, VIB or VIC in parameter .
VIA : =
VIB : =
VIC : =

*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N.

C-12
E6581697

3.4 Meter setting and adjustment


 : Meter selection
 : Meter adjustment gain

• Function
Output of 0 - 1mAdc, 0 (4) - 20mAdc, 0 - 10vdc can be selected for the output signal from the FM
terminal, depending on the  setting. Adjust the scale at .
Use an ammeter with a full-scale 0 - 1mAdc meter.
The  (analog output bias) needs to be adjusted if output is 4 - 20mAdc.

[Parameter setting]
Supposition output at
3
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
fsl=17
0: Output frequency Maximum frequency ()
1: Output current -
2: Frequency reference Maximum frequency (fh)
3: Input voltage (DC detection) 1.5x rated voltage
4: Output voltage (command value) 1.5x rated voltage
5: Input power 1.85x rated power
6: Output power 1.85x rated power
7: Torque 2.5x rated torque
8: - -
9: Motor cumulative load factor Rated load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor Rated load factor
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative Rated load factor
load factor
12:Frequency setting value (after Maximum frequency (fh)
compensation)
Meter 13:VIA input value Maximum input value
 0
selection 14:VIB input value Maximum input value
15:Fixed output 1 -
(output current 100% equivalent)
16:Fixed output 2 -
(output current 50% equivalent)
17:Fixed output 3 -
(Other than the output current)
18:RS485 communication data Maximum value (100.0%)
19:For adjustments ( set value is -
displayed.)
20: VIC input value Maximum input value
21: Pulse train input value Maximum input value
22: - -
23: PID feedback value Maximum frequency (fh)
24: Integral input power 1000x f749
25: Integral output power 1000x f749
Meter
 adjustment - - -
gain

C-13
E6581697

„ Resolution
All FM terminals have a maximum of 1/1000.

„ Example of 4-20mA output adjustment (Refer to section 6.17.2 for details)

=1, =0 =1, =20

(mA) (mA)
20 20

Output Output
currrent currrent

3 0
0 100%
f692
4

0 100%

Internal calculated value Internal calculated value

Note 1) When using the FM terminal for current output, be sure that the external load resistance is less than 750Ω.
Use over 1kΩ external load resistance for voltage output.
Note 2)  =  is the motor drive frequency.

„ Adjustment scale with parameter  (Meter adjustment)


Connect meters as shown below.

<Displaying output frequency> <Displaying output current>

 =  =
FM + FM +

Inverter Inverter
- -
CC CC
The reading of the The reading of the
meter will fluctuate meter will
during scale fluctuate during
* Optional QS-60T frequency adjustment. *Meter with a maximum scale adjustment.
meter is available. scale of 1.5x the inverter's
rated output current is
recommended.

C-14
E6581697

[Example of how to adjust the FM terminal frequency meter]

* Use the meter's adjustment screw to pre-adjust zero-point.


Operation panel action LED display Operation
Displays the output frequency.
- . 
(When standard monitor display selection  is set to )

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

 Turn the setting dial to select .

Operation frequency can be read by pressing the center of the setting


. 
dial.
Turn the setting dial to adjust the meter.
Note that the meter's indicator changes at this time, but the inverter's
display (monitor) does not change.
3
. 

 ⇔ Press the center of the setting dial to save the meter's calibrations.
  and the frequency are displayed alternately.
The display returns to its original indications.
MODE + MODE  .  (When standard monitor display selection  is set to 
[Operation frequency])

„ Adjusting the meter in inverter stop state


• Adjustment of output current (=1)
If, when adjusting the meter for output current, there are large fluctuations in data during adjustment,
making adjustment difficult, the meter can be adjusted in inverter stop state.
When setting  to  for fixed output 1 (output current 100% equivalent), a signal of absolute
values will be output (inverter's rated current = 100%). In this state, adjust the meter with the  (Meter
adjustment) parameter.
Similarly, if you set  to  for fixed output 2 (output current 50% equivalent), a signal that is sent
out when half the inverter's rated current is flowing will be output through the FM terminal.
After meter adjustment is ended, set  to  (output current).

• Other adjustments ( = ,  to, , , ,  to )


 = : When fixed output 3 (other than the output current) is set, a signal of the value for other
monitors is fixed at the following values and output through the FM terminal.
100% standard value for each item is the following:
=0, 2, 12,  : Maximum frequency (h)
=3, 4 : 1.5 times of rated voltage
=7 : 2.5 times of rated torque
=9 to11 : Rated load factor
=13, , , : Maximum input value (10V, or 20mA)
=18 : Maximum value (100.0%)
=24, 25 : 1000x f749

C-15
E6581697

3.5 Setting the electronic thermal


: Overload characteristic selection
 
: Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1
 
: Electronic-thermal protection characteristic selection
 
3 : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 2
: Motor 150% overload detection time

: Inverter overload detection method

3 : Electronic-thermal memory

: Overload alarm level


• Function
This parameter allows selection of the appropriate electronic thermal protection characteristics according
to the particular rating and characteristics of the motor.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: -
Overload characteristic 1: Constant torque characteristic(150%-60s)
 0
selection
2: Variable torque characteristic(120%-60s)
Motor electronic-thermal
 10 – 100 (%) / (A) *1 100
protection level 1
Setting Overload Overload
value protection stall
0 valid invalid
1 Standard valid valid
Electronic-thermal motor
2 invalid invalid
 protection characteristic 0
3 invalid valid
selection
4 valid invalid
5 VF motor valid valid
6 (special invalid invalid
motor)
7 invalid valid
Motor electronic-thermal
f173 10 – 100 (%) / (A) *1 100
protection level 2

Motor 150% overload


f607 10 – 2400 (s) 300
detection time

Inverter overload detection 0: 150%-60s (120%-60s) 0


 1: Temperature estimation
method

C-16
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
 Electronic-thermal memory 1: Enabled *2 0

 Overload alarm level 10-100 50


*1: The inverter's rated current is 100%. When  (current and voltage unit selection) = 1 (A (amps)/V
(volts)) is selected, it can be set at A (amps).
*2: f632=1 : Electronic-thermal statuses (cumulative overload value) of motor and inverter are saved when
power supply is OFF. It is calculated from the saved value when power supply is ON again.

1) Setting the electronic thermal protection characteristics selection  and 3


motor electronic thermal protection level 1 , 2 

The electronic thermal protection characteristics selection  is used to enable or disable the motor
overload trip function () and the overload stall function.
While the inverter overload trip () will be in constantly detective operation, the motor overload trip
() can be selected using the parameter 

Explanation of terms
Overload stall: This is an optimum function for equipment such as fans, pumps and blowers with
variable torque characteristics that the load current decreases as the operating speed
decreases.
When the inverter detects an overload, this function automatically lowers the output
frequency before the motor overload trip  is activated. With this function,
operation can be continued, without tripping, by operating using a frequency balanced
by load current.
Note: Do not use the overload stall function with loads having constant torque characteristics (such as
conveyor belts in which load current is fixed with no relation to speed).

[Using standard motors (other than motors intended for use with inverters)]
When a motor is used in the lower frequency range than the rated frequency, that will decrease the cooling
effects for the motor. This speeds up the start of overload detection operations when a standard motor is
used in order to prevent overheating.

C-17
E6581697

„ Setting of electronic thermal protection characteristics selection 



Setting value Overload protection Overload stall
 valid invalid
 valid valid
 invalid invalid
 invalid valid

„ Setting of motor electronic thermal protection level 1  (Same as f173)


When the capacity of the motor in use is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated current of
the motor is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust thermal protection level 1  for the

3 motor in accordance with the motor's rated current.


* When displaying as a percentage, 100% = rated output current (A) of the inverter is displayed.
Output current reduction factor
[%]/[A]

×1.0

×0.6

0
30Hz Output frequency (Hz)

Note: The motor overload protection start level is fixed at 30Hz.

[Example of setting: When the VFMB1S-2007PL is running with a 0.4kW motor having 2A rated current]
Operation
LED display Operation
panel action
Displays the operation frequency. (Perform during operation
stopped.)

(When standard monitor display selection  is set to 0
[Operation frequency])

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

 Turn the setting dial to change the parameter to .

Parameter values can be read by pressing the center of the setting



dial (default setting is 100%).
Turn the setting dial to change the parameter to % (= motor

rated current/inverter output rated current ×100=2.0/4.2×100)
Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed parameter.
⇔
 and the parameter are displayed alternately.

Note: The rated output current of the inverter should be calculated from the rated current for frequencies
below 4kHz, regardless of the setting of the PWM carrier frequency parameter ().

C-18
E6581697

[Using a VF motor (motor for use with inverter)]


„ Setting of electronic thermal protection characteristics selection 
Setting value Overload protection Overload stall
 valid invalid
 valid valid
 invalid invalid
 invalid valid
VF motors (motors designed for use with inverters) can be used in frequency ranges lower than those
for standard motors, but their cooling efficiency decreases at frequencies below 6Hz.

„ Setting of motor electronic thermal protection level 1  (Same as f173) 3


If the capacity of the motor is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated current of the motor
is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust the electronic thermal protection level 1  so
that it fits the motor's rated current.
* If the indications are in percentages (%), then 100% equals the inverter's rated output current (A).
Output current reduction factor [%]/[A]

 ×1.0

 ×0.6

0
6Hz
Output frequency (Hz)
Note) The start level for motor overload reduction is fixed at 6 Hz.

2) Motor 150%-overload detection time f607


Parameter f607 is used to set the time elapsed before the motor trips under a load of 150% (overload trip
2) within a range of 10 to 2400 seconds.

3) Inverter overload characteristics f631


This function is set to protect the inverter unit. This function cannot be turned off by parameter setting.
The inverter has two overload detecting functions, which can be switched from one to another using
parameter  (Inverter overload detection method).

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: 150%-60s (120%-60s)
 Inverter overload detection method 0
1: Temperature estimation
If the inverter overload trip function () is activated frequently, this can be improved by adjusting the stall
operation level  downward or increasing the acceleration time  or deceleration time .

C-19
E6581697

■ = (150%-60s), = (Constant torque characteristic)


Protection is given uniformly regardless of ambient temperature, as shown by the 150%-60 sec overload curve
in the figure below.

Inverter overload
Current Inverter overload time [s]
time [s] [%] (Outline data)
111 2400
120 240
130 120
140 80

3
150 60
185 2
200 0.5

60

Monitored output current [%]


0
110% 150%
100%: Inverter rated output current

Inverter overload protection characteristics

■ = (Temperature estimation), = (Constant torque characteristic)


This parameter adjusts automatically overload protection, predicting the inverter internal temperature rise.
(diagonally shaded area in the figure below)

time [s]

60

Monitored output current [%]


0
110% 150%
100%: Inverter rated output current

Inverter overload protection characteristics

C-20
E6581697

Note 1: If the load applied to the inverter exceeds 150% of its rated load or the operation frequency is less than
0.1Hz, the inverter may trip ( or  to ) in a shorter time.
Note 2: The inverter is factory-set so that, if the inverter becomes overloaded, it will automatically reduce the
carrier frequency to avoid an overload trip ( or  to ). A reduction in carrier frequency
causes an increase in noise from the motor, but this does not affect the performance of the inverter.
If you do not want the inverter to reduce the carrier frequency automatically, set the parameter
=.
Note 3: Overload detection level is variable by condition of output frequency and carrier frequency.
Note 4: Regarding to characteristic for aul=2 setting, refer to section 3.5.5).

4) Electronic thermal memory f632


When the power is OFF, it is possible to reset or maintain the overload totaling level.
This parameter's settings are applied both to the motor's electronic thermal memory and the electronic
3
thermal memory for inverter protection.

[Parameters settings]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

Electronic thermal memory 0: Disabled


 
1: Enabled
, = is a function for complying with the U.S. NEC standards.

C-21
E6581697

5) Overload characteristic selection aul


Overload characteristic of inverter can be selected to 150%-60s or 120%-60s.

[Parameters settings]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: -
1: Constant torque
 Overload characteristic selection characteristic(150%-60s) 0
2: Variable torque
characteristic(120%-60s)

, Regarding to characteristic for =1 setting, refer to section 3.5.3).

3 Note 1) In case of =2 setting, be sure to install the input AC reactor (ACL) between power supply and inverter.

■ = (Variable torque characteristic), = (120%-60s)

Inverter overload
Current Inverter overload time [s]
time [s] [%] (Outline data)
106 900
110 180
115 90
120 60
140 2
165 0.5

60

Monitored output current [%]


0
105% 120%
100%: Inverter rated output current

Inverter overload protection characteristic

C-22
E6581697

■ =( Variable torque characteristic), = (Temperature estimation)


This parameter adjusts automatically overload protection, predicting the inverter internal temperature rise.
(diagonally shaded area in the figure below)

time [s]

3
60

Monitored output current [%]


0
105% 120%
100%: Inverter rated output current

Inverter overload protection characteristics

Note 1: The rated output current of inverter is changed by setting of aul=1 or 2.


Refer to page L-1 about each rated output current.
Note 2: Parameter aul is displayed as “0” during reading after this is set.
Note 3: Present setting of inverter overload characteristic can be confirmed by status monitor.
Refer to monitor “Overload and region setting” of section 8.2.1.

6) Overload alarm level f657


When the motor overload level reaches to  setting value (%) of overload trip (OL2) level, output
frequency monitor and “L” of left side digit are blinking on overload alarm status.
Overload alarm signal can be output.

[Parameters settings]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

 Overload alarm level 10-100 (%) 50

[Example of setting] : Assigning the overload alarm to the OUT terminal.


Title Function Adjustment range Setting

 Output terminal selection 2A (OUT) 0-255 16: POL

17 is reverse signal.

C-23
E6581697

3.6 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 15 steps)


 to  : Preset-speed frequency 1 to 7
 to  : Preset-speed frequency 8 to15

• Function
A maximum of 15 speed steps can be selected just by switching an external logic signal. Multi-speed
frequencies can be programmed anywhere from the lower limit frequency  to the upper limit frequency
.

3 [Setting method]
1) Run/stop
The starting and stopping control is done from the terminal board.
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
0: Terminal board
1: Panel keypad (including remote keypad)
 Command mode selection 2: RS485 communication 0
3: CANopen communication
4: Communication option
Note: When switching between preset-speed operation and other speed commands (analog signal, setting dial,
communication, etc.), select the frequency setting mode at . ⇒ Refer to section 3) or 5.5

2) Preset-speed frequency setting


Set the speed (frequency) of the number of steps necessary.

[Parameter setting]
Setting from speed 1 to speed 7
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
-  Preset-speed frequency 1-7 - (Hz) 0.0

Setting from speed 8 to speed 15


Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f287- f294 Preset-speed frequency 8-15 - (Hz) 0.0

C-24
E6581697

Preset-speed logic input signal example: Slide switch SW1 = SINK side
O: ON -: OFF (Speed commands other than preset-speed commands are valid when all are OFF)
CC Preset-speed
Terminal
S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

S2 S1-CC { - { - { - { - { - { - { - {
S2-CC - { { - - { { - - { { - - { {
S3
S3-CC - - - { { { { - - - - { { { {
RES
RES-CC - - - - - - - { { { { { { { {

, Terminal functions are as follows.


Terminal S1............. Input terminal function selection 4A (S1)
=10 (Preset-speed command 1: SS1)
Terminal S2............. Input terminal function selection 5 (S2) 3
=12 (Preset-speed command 2: SS2)
Terminal S3............. Input terminal function selection 6 (S3)
=14 (Preset-speed command 3: SS3)
Terminal RES Input terminal function selection 3A (RES)
=16 (preset-speed command 4: SS4)

, In the default settings, SS4 is not assigned. Assign SS4 to RES with input terminal function selection.

[ Example of a connection diagram ]


(with sink logic settings)

F (Forward run) Forward

CC Common

S1 Preset-speed 1 (SS1)

S2 Preset-speed 2 (SS2)

S3 Preset-speed 3 (SS3)

RES Preset-speed 4 (SS4)

C-25
E6581697

3) Using other speed commands with preset-speed command

1: Panel keypad (including remote keypad),


Command mode selection 2: RS485 communication
0: Terminal board
 3: CANopen communication
4: Communication option
1: Terminal 1: Terminal
board VIA board VIA
2: Terminal 2: Terminal
0:Setting dial 1 4: RS485 0:Setting dial 1 4: RS485
board VIB board VIB
(save even if communication (save even if communication
5: UP/DOWN 5: UP/DOWN
Frequency setting power is off) 6: CANopen power is off) 6: CANopen
from external from external
mode selection  3: Setting dial 2 communication 3: Setting dial 2 communication
logic input logic input
(press in center 7: Communication (press in center 7: Communication
8: Terminal 8: Terminal
to save) option to save) option
board VIC board VIC
11: Pulse train 11: Pulse train
input input

3 Preset-speed
command
Active

Inactive
Terminal
Preset-speed command valid Note)
Setting dial Communication
Terminal
command valid
Setting dial
command valid
Communication
command valid
(The inverter doesn't accept Preset-speed command.)
command valid command valid command valid

Note) The preset-speed command is always given priority when other speed commands are input at the same time.

An example of three-speed operation with the default settings is shown below. (Frequency settings are required for
 to )

Output frequency

[Hz]





Time
0 [s]

F-CC ON
OFF

S1(SS1)-CC ON
OFF

S2(SS2)-CC ON
OFF

Example of 3-speed operation

C-26
E6581697

4. Setting parameters
4.1 Setting and Display Modes
This inverter has the following three display modes.

Standard monitor mode The standard inverter mode. This mode is enabled when
inverter power goes on.

This mode is for monitoring the output frequency and setting the frequency reference value. If also
displays information about status alarms during running and trips.
・Display of output frequency, etc.
f710 Initial panel display selection
(f720 Initial remote keypad display selection)
f702 Free unit display scale
4
・Setting frequency reference values.
・Status alarm
If there is an error in the inverter, the alarm signal and the frequency will flash alternately in
the LED display.
: When a current flows at or higher than the overcurrent stall prevention level.
: When a voltage is generated at or higher than the over voltage stall prevention level.
: When the cumulative amount of overload reaches 50% or more of the overload trip
value, or when the main circuit element temperature reaches the overload alarm level
: When the overheat protection alarm level is reached

Setting monitor mode The mode for setting inverter parameters.


⇒ How to set parameters, refer to section 4. 2.

There are two parameter read modes. Refer to section 4. 2 for details about
selection and switching of modes.
Easy setting mode : Only the seven most frequently used parameters are
displayed.
Parameters can be registered as necessary.
(max. 32 parameters)
Standard setting mode : Both basic and extended all parameters are displayed.
☆ Each press of the EASY key switches between the Easy setting mode and the
Standard setting mode.

D-1
E6581697

Status monitor mode The mode for monitoring all inverter status.
Allows monitoring of set frequencies, output current/voltage and terminal
information.
⇒ Refer to chapter 8.

The inverter can be moved through each of the modes by pressing the MODE key.

PRG
0.1
Frequency setting method
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2

RUN
0.0
4 MODE MODE
y
Standard monitor mode
(At power source on)

MON fr-f PRG au


Status monitor mode Setting monitor mode

Monitoring of How to search and set


operation status MODE parameters
⇒ Refer to section 8.2 ⇒ Refer to section 4.2

f60.0 auf

D-2
E6581697

4.2 How to set parameters


There are two types of setting monitor modes: Easy mode and Standard setting mode. The mode active when power is
turned on can be selected at  (Registered parameter display selection), and the mode can be switched by the
EASY key. Note, however, that the switching method differs when only the Easy mode is selected. Refer to section 4.5 for
details.

Setting dial and panel key operations are as follows:


Pressing the center of the setting dial
Turning the setting dial
Used for executing operations and determining
Used to select items and incrementing/
values. Note)
decrementing values. Note)

Used to select the mode and return to Used to switch between the Easy and Standard
MODE EASY setting modes.
the previous menu
Each press alternately switches between the two
modes in the standard monitor mode. 4
Easy setting mode : The mode changes to the Easy setting mode when the EASY key is pressed
at the standard monitor mode and "a" is displayed. In the Easy setting
mode, the EASY lamp lights.
Only the most frequently used 7 basic parameters are displayed.
(standard default)

Easy setting mode


Title Function
 Command mode selection
f Frequency setting mode selection
a Acceleration time 1
 Deceleration time 1
r Motor overload protection level 1
f Meter adjustment
 Registered parameter display selection

☆ In the Easy setting mode, the EASY lamp lights.


☆ If the EASY key is pressed while the setting dial is being turned, values continue to be incremented or decremented
even if you release your finger from the setting dial. This feature is handy when setting large values.

Note) Of the available parameters, number value parameters (a etc.) are reflected in actual operation when the
setting dial is turned. Note, however, that the center of the setting dial must be pressed to save values even when
the power is turned off.
Note, also, that item selection parameters (f etc.) are not reflected in actual operation by just turning the
setting dial. To reflect these parameters, press the center of the setting dial.

D-3
E6581697

Standard setting mode : The mode changes to the Standard setting mode when
the EASY key is pressed and "" is displayed.
Both basic and extended all parameters are displayed.

Basic parameters : This parameter is a basic parameter for the


operation of the inverter.
⇒ Refer to chapter 5 for details.
⇒ Refer to chapter 11.2 for parameter tables.

Extended parameters : The parameters for detailed and special


setting.
⇒ Refer to chapter 6 for details.
⇒ Refer to chapter 11.3 for parameter tables.

4 For reasons of safety, the following parameters have been set up so that they cannot be reprogrammed while the
inverter is running.

[Basic parameters]
auf (Guidance function) f*1(Frequency setting mode selection)
au (Overload characteristic selection) f (Maximum frequency)
au1 (Automatic acceleration/deceleration)  (V/F control mode selection)
au (Torque boost setting macro function)  (Default setting)
 *1 (Command mode selection)  (Checking the region setting)

[Extended parameters]
f10 to f16 f0 to f1
f10 to f1 f1
f0 / f / f61 f , f
f01 , f0 f0 to f
f0 to f16 f1 / f60 / f60 / f60 / f61
f1 f66 to f61
f to f0 f6 / f66 / f61 / f0 / f
f0 , f1 f0 to f1
f6 f1 , f16
f , f f0
f60 / f6 a00 to a1
f to f a to a
f / f00 

*1:  and fcan be changed during operation by setting f6=0.


Note) Refer to “Communication manual” about parameter Cxxx.

D-4
E6581697

4.2.1 Settings in the Easy setting mode


The inverter enters this mode by pressing the MODE key when the Easy setting mode is selected

Easy setting mode (Default registered parameters)


When you are unsure of something Title Function
during operation:
You can return to the Standard monitor  Command mode selection
mode by pressing the MODE key f Frequency setting mode selection
several times. a Acceleration time 1
 Deceleration time 1
r Motor overload protection level 1
0.0 MODE Connection meter adjustment
f
Standard monitor mode
 Registered parameter display selection


4
(1) (2)

f 0
(Max. 32 parameters)
Registered parameters

MODE

(3) (4) *
a 1 1⇔f

 * Parameter title and the setting


value are displayed alternately

„ Setting parameters in the Easy setting mode


(1) Selects parameter to be changed. (Turn the setting dial.)
(2) Reads the programmed parameter setting. (Press the center of the setting dial.)
(3) Change the parameter value. (Turn the setting dial.)
(4) Press this key to save the change. (Press the center of the setting dial.)

, To switch to the Standard setting mode, press the EASY key in the Standard monitor mode. "" is displayed,
and the mode is switched.

D-5
E6581697

4.2.2 Settings in the Standard setting mode


The inverter enters this mode by pressing the MODE key when the Standard setting mode is selected.

„ How to set basic parameters


When you are unsure of something
during operation: (1) Selects parameter to be changed. (Turn the setting dial.)
You can return to the Standard monitor (2) Reads the programmed parameter setting. (Press the center of
mode by pressing the MODE key
the setting dial.)
several times.
(3) Change the parameter value. (Turn the setting dial.)
(4) Press this key to save the change. (Press the center of the
0.0 MODE setting dial.)
Standard monitor mode

au
4
(1)

auf

au
Standard parameters

(2)
Basic parameter

au1 0
MODE

(3) (4) *
au 1 1⇔au1

(5) (6)

f1-- f100
Extended parameter setting

MODE
* Parameter title and the setting
value are displayed alternately
(7) (8)
f-- f10 .
MODE

(9) (10) *
.0 .0⇔f101

, To switch to the Easy setting mode, press the EASY key in the Standard monitor mode. easy is displayed, and
the mode is switched.

D-6
E6581697

„ How to set extended parameters


Each extended parameter is composed of an "f, a or "suffixed with a 3-digit figure, so first select and read out the
heading of the parameter you want "f1--" to "f--", "a---", "---" ("f1--": Parameter starting point
is 100, "a---": Parameter starting point is A.)
(5) Select the title of the parameter you want to change. (Turn the setting dial.)
(6) Press the Enter key to activate the selected parameter. (Press the center of the setting dial.)
(7) Selects parameter to be changed. (Turn the setting dial.)
(8) Reads the programmed parameter setting. (Press the center of the setting dial.)
(9) Change the parameter value. (Turn the setting dial.)
(10) Press this key to save the change. (Press the center of the setting dial.)

■ Adjustment range and display of parameters


: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is higher than the programmable range. (Note that the setting of
the currently selected parameter may exceed the upper limit as a result of changing other parameters.) 4
: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is lower than the programmable range. (Note that the setting of
the currently selected parameter may fall below the lower limit as a result of changing other parameters.)
If the above alarm is flashing on and off, values that exceed  or are equal or lower than  cannot be set.

4.3 Functions useful in searching for a parameter or


changing a parameter setting
This section explains functions useful in searching for a parameter or changing a parameter setting. To use these
functions, a parameter needs to be selected or set in advance.

Changed parameters history search (History function) au

This function automatically searches for the last five parameters whose settings have been changed. To use this

function, select the au parameter. (Any changes are displayed regardless of whether or not they are the same as

standard defaults.)

⇒ Refer to section 5.1 for details.

Set parameters by purpose (Guidance function) auf

Only parameters required for a special purpose can be called up and set.

To use this function, select parameter auf

⇒ Refer to section 5.2 for details.

D-7
E6581697

Reset parameters to default settings 

Use the  parameter to reset all parameters back to their default settings. To use this function, set parameter

= or 1.

⇒ Refer to section 4.3.2 for details.

Call saved customer settings 

Customer settings can be batch-saved and batch-called.


These settings can be used as customer-exclusive default settings.

To use this function, set parameter = or .

4
⇒ Refer to section 4.3.2 for details.

Search changed parameters ru

Automatically searches for only those parameters that are programmed with values different from the standard

default setting. To use this function, select the ru parameter.

⇒ Refer to section 4.3.1 for details.

4.3.1 Searching for and resetting changed parameters


ru : Automatic edit function

• Function
Automatically searches for only those parameters that are programmed with values different from the standard
default setting and displays them in the ru. Parameter setting can also be changed within this group.

Note 1: If you reset a parameter to its factory default, the parameter will no longer appear in ru.
Note 2: It may take several seconds to display changed parameters because all data stored in the user parameter
group ru is checked against the factory default settings. To cancel a parameter search, press the MODE
key.
Note 3: Parameters which cannot be reset to the default setting after setting  to  are not displayed.
⇒ Refer to section 4.3.2 for details.

D-8
E6581697

„ How to search and reprogram parameters


Panel operation LED display Operation
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).
0.0 (When standard monitor display selection is set as f10=0
[operation frequency])

MODE au Displays the first basic parameter "History function (au)."

ru Turn the setting dial, and select ru.

Press the center of the setting dial to enter the user parameter setting
u---
change search mode.
Searches for and displays parameters different to the default settings.
Parameters are changed by either pressing the center of the setting
a
or dial or turning it to the right. (Turning the setting dial to the left
searches for parameter in the reverse direction.)
4
.0 Press the center of the setting dial to display set values.

.0 Turn the setting dial, and change set values.

Press the center of the setting dial to set values. The parameter name
.0⇔a
and set value light alternately and are written.
Use the same steps as those above and turn the setting dial to
u--f
display parameters to search for or whose settings must be changed,
(u--r)
and check or change the parameter settings.

ru When ru appears again, the search is ended.

Parameter display
MODE ↓ A search can be canceled by pressing the MODE key. Press the key
ru once while the search is underway to return to the display of
↓ parameter setting mode. Pressing it while searching returns to the
MODE fr-f
ru display.

After that you can press the MODE key to return to the status monitor
MODE 0.0
mode or the standard monitor mode (display of operation frequency).

D-9
E6581697

4.3.2 Return to default settings


 : Default setting

• Function
It is possible to return groups of parameters to their defaults, clear run times, and record/recall set
parameters.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: -
1: 50Hz default setting
2: 60Hz default setting
3: Default setting 1 (Initialization)
4: Trip record clear

4 5: Cumulative operation time clear


6: Initialization of type information
 Default setting 7: Save user setting parameters 0
8. Load user setting parameters
9. Cumulative fan operation time
record clears
10, 11: -
12: Number of starting clear
13: Default setting 2 (complete
initialization)
+ This function will be displayed as 0 during reading on the right. This previous setting is displayed.
Example:  0

+  cannot be set during the inverter operating. Always stop the inverter first and then program.

Programmed value

50 Hz default setting (=1)

Setting  to 1 sets the following parameters for base frequency 50 Hz use.
(The setting values of other parameters are not changed.)
• Max. frequency (f) :50Hz • Upper limit frequency (u) :50Hz
• Base frequency 1 () :50Hz • Base frequency 2 (f10) :50Hz
• VIA input point 2 frequency (f0) :50Hz • VIB input point 2 frequency (f1):50Hz
• VIC input point 2 frequency (f1) :50Hz • Automatic light-load high-speed operation
• Process upper limit (f6) :50Hz frequency (f0) :50Hz
-1
• Motor rated RPM (f1) :1410 min • Communication command point 2 frequency
(f1) :50Hz

D-10
E6581697

60 Hz default setting (=)

Setting  to  sets the following parameters for base frequency 60 Hz use.
(The setting values of other parameters are not changed.)
• Max. frequency (f) :60Hz • Upper limit frequency (u) :60Hz
• Base frequency 1 () :60Hz • Base frequency 2 (f10) :60Hz
• VIA input point 2 frequency (f0) :60Hz • VIB input point 2 frequency (f1):60Hz
• VIC input point 2 frequency (f1) :60Hz • Automatic light-load high-speed operation
• Process upper limit (f6) :60Hz frequency (f0) :60Hz
-1
• Motor rated RPM (f1) :1710 min • Communication command point 2 frequency
(f1) :60Hz

Default setting 1 ( = )

Setting  to  will return parameters to the standard values that were programmed at the factory.
, When  is set,  is displayed for a short time after the settings are configured, and then
disappears. Then the inverter is in standard motor mode. In this case, the trip history data is cleared. 4
Be aware that the following parameters do not return to the standard factory settings even if = is set
for maintainability. (To initialize all parameters, set =1.) 
・au:Overload characteristic selection ・f0~f:VIA/VIB/VIC input bias / gain
・f:Meter selection ・f66:Logic output/pulse train output selection
・f:Meter adjustment gain ・f61:Analog output signal selection
・:Checking the region setting ・f61:Inclination characteristic of analog output
・f10:Analog input terminal selection ・f6:Analog output bias
・f10:Analog/logic input selection ・f0:Free notes
* : Refer to “Communication manual” about parameter Cxxx.

Trip record clear ( = )

Setting  to  initializes the past eight sets of recorded error history data.
, The parameter does not change.

Cumulative operation time clear ( = )

Setting  to  resets the cumulative operation time to the initial value (zero).

Initialization of type information ( = 6)

Setting typ to 6 clears the trips when an  format error occurs. But if the  displayed, call us.

D-11
E6581697

Save user setting parameters ( = )

Setting  to  saves the current settings of all parameters. (Refer to section 4.2.7)

Load user setting parameters ( = )

Setting  to  loads parameter settings to (calls up) those saved by setting  to .
(Refer to section 4.2.7)
, By setting  to  or , you can use parameters as your own default parameters.

Cumulative fan operation time record clear ( = )

Setting  to  resets the cumulative operation time to the initial value (zero).
Set this parameter when replacing the cooling fan, and so on

4 Number of starting clear ( = 1)

Setting  to12 resets the number of starting to the initial value (zero).

Default setting 2 ( = 1)

Set  to 1 to return all parameters to their default settings.


When 1 is set,  is displayed for a short time after the settings are configured, and then
disappears. Then setup menu  is displayed. After reviewing the setup menu items, make a setup
menu selection. In this case, all parameters are returned to their defaults, and the trip history data is cleared.
(Refer to section 3.1.)

D-12
E6581697

4.4 Checking the region settings selection


 : Checking the region setting

• Function
The region selected on the setup menu can be checked.
Also, the setup menu can be started to change to a different region.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Start setup menu
1: Japan (read only)
 Checking the region setting 2: North America (read only) ∗
3: Asia (read only)
4: Europe (read only) 4
* Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. 1 to 4 are displayed.

„ Content of region settings


The number displayed when parameter  is read indicates which of the following regions was selected on
the setup menu.

: u (Europe) is selected on the setup menu.


: aa (Asia, Oceania) is selected on the setup menu.
: ua (North America) is selected on the setup menu.
1:  (Japan) is selected on the setup menu.

The setup menu is started by writing =0.


Refer to section 3.1 for details.

Note: 1 to  set to parameter  are read-only. Be aware that they cannot be written.

D-13
E6581697

4.5 EASY key function


 : Registered parameters display selection
f0 : EASY key function selection
f1 to f : Easy setting mode parameter 1 to 32

• Function
It is possible to switch between standard mode and easy setting mode using the EASY key.
Up to 32 arbitrary parameters can be registered to easy setting mode.
The following three functions can be assigned to the EASY key for easy operation by means of a single key.
• Setting monitor mode switching function
• Shortcut key function
• Operation panel/remote key function

4 [Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Standard setting mode at power on
Registered parameters
 1: Easy setting mode at power on 0
display selection 2: Easy setting mode only
0: Easy / standard setting mode switching function
1: Shortcut key
f0 EASY key function selection 0
2: Local / remote key
3: Monitor peak / minimum hold trigger

„ Easy / Standard setting mode switching function (f0=0)

It is possible to switch between standard mode and easy setting mode using the EASY key.
The way parameters are read out and displayed varies according to the mode selected.

Easy setting mode


Allows pre-registration (easy setting mode parameters) of frequently changed parameters and reading of only
registered parameters (maximum of 32 types).

Standard setting mode


Standard setting mode in which all parameters are read out.

[How to read out parameters]


Use the EASY key to change between Easy setting mode and Standard setting mode, and then press the MODE
key to enter the setting monitor mode.
Turn the setting dial to read the parameter.
The relation between the parameter and the mode selected is shown below.

 =0
* When the power is turned on, the inverter is in standard mode. Press the EASY key to switch to easy setting
mode.

D-14
E6581697

 =1
* When the power is turned on, the inverter is in easy setting mode. Press the EASY key to switch to standard
mode.

 =
* Always in easy setting mode.

D-15
E6581697

[How to select parameters]


Select the desired parameters as easy setting mode parameters 1 to 32 (f1 to f). Note that parameters
should be specified by communication number. For communication numbers, refer to Table of parameters.
In easy setting mode, only parameters registered to parameters 1 to 32 are displayed in order of registration.
The values of the default settings are shown in the table below.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f1 Easy setting mode parameter 1 0-2999 ()
f Easy setting mode parameter 2 0-2999 (f)
f Easy setting mode parameter 3 0-2999 (a)
f Easy setting mode parameter 4 0-2999 10()
f Easy setting mode parameter 5 0-2999 600(r)
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 6 0-2999 6(f)

4 f
f
Easy setting mode parameter 7
Easy setting mode parameter 8
f Easy setting mode parameter 9
f60 Easy setting mode parameter 10
f61 Easy setting mode parameter 11
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 12
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 13
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 14
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 15
f66 Easy setting mode parameter 16
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 17
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 18
0-2999 
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 19 (Set by communication number) (No function)
f0 Easy setting mode parameter 20
f1 Easy setting mode parameter 21
f Easy setting mode parameter 22
f Easy setting mode parameter 23
f Easy setting mode parameter 24
f Easy setting mode parameter 25
f6 Easy setting mode parameter 26
f Easy setting mode parameter 27
f Easy setting mode parameter 28
f Easy setting mode parameter 29
f0 Easy setting mode parameter 30
f1 Easy setting mode parameter 31
f Easy setting mode parameter 32 0-2999 0()
Note: If any number other than communication numbers is specified, it is regarded as  (no function assigned).

D-16
E6581697

■ Shortcut key function (f0=1)


This function allows you to register, in a shortcut list, parameters whose settings need to be changed frequently so
that you can read them out easily in a single operation.
The shortcut is usable in the frequency monitor mode only.

[Operation]
Set the parameter f0 to 1, read out the setting of the parameter you want to register, and press and hold
down the EASY key for 2 seconds or more. The registration of the parameter in a shortcut list has been completed.
To read out the parameter, just press the EASY key.

■ Operation panel/remote key function (f0=)


This function allows you to easily switch control devices (operation panel and terminal board) used to start and
stop operation and to set the frequency.
To switch between control device, set the parameter f0 to , and then select the desired control device,
using the EASY key.
4
[When using the terminal board]
If 0=0, no switching operation is required.

[When using the operation panel]


Turn on the EASY key.

■Peak hold function (f0=)


This function allows you to set peak hold and minimum hold triggers for parameters f0, f66, f6,
f0 and f, using the EASY key. The measurement of the minimum and maximum values set for
f0, f66, f6, f0 and f starts the instant when you press the EASY key after setting
parameter f0 to .
The peak hold and minimum hold values are displayed in absolute values.

D-17
E6581697

5. Main parameters
Before you operate the inverter, the parameters that you must first program are the basic parameters.

5.1 Searching for changes using the history function


()
 : History function

History function ():


Automatically searches for 5 latest parameters that are programmed with values different from the
standard default setting and displays them in the . Parameter setting can also be changed
within this group .

Notes on operation 5
• If no history information is stored, this parameter is skipped and the next parameter “” is
displayed.
•  and  are added respectively to the first and last parameters in a history of changes.

„ How to use the history function


Operation panel
LED display Operation
action
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).
 (When standard monitor display selection = [Operation
frequency])

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

 The parameter that was set or changed last is displayed.

 Press the center of the setting dial to display the set value.

 Turn the setting dial to change the set value.

Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed value. The
⇔ parameter name and the programmed value will flash on and off
alternately.
Turn the dial as described above to search for and display changed
****
parameters to check and change the settings.

 : First historic record


() : Last historic record

E-1
E6581697

Parameter
MODE display
Press the MODE key to return to the parameter setting mode

“.”

MODE After that you can press the MODE key to return to the status

monitor mode or the standard monitor mode (display of operation
 frequency).
MODE ↓

Note: The following parameters are not displayed in this auh, even if they are the most recent changes.
 (Operation frequency of operation panel),  (Guidance function),
 (Overload characteristic selection),  (Automatic acceleration/deceleration),
 (Torque boost setting macro function),  (Default setting),
 (Checking the region setting),  (Prohibition of change of parameter settings)
 (All key operation prohibition ) ,  (Password setting ()) ,
 (Password verification)

5.2 Setting a parameter using the guidance function


5 ()
 : Guidance function

Guidance function ():


The guidance function refers to the special function of calling up only functions necessary to set up the inverter in
response to the user’s needs. When a purpose-specific guidance is selected, a group of parameters needed for the
specified application (function) is formed and the inverter is switched automatically to the mode of setting the group
of parameters selected. You can set up the inverter easily by simply setting the parameters in the group one after
another. The guidance function () provides five purpose-specific guidance.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0:-
1: - Note 1
2: Preset speed guidance
 Guidance function 0
3: Analog signal operation guidance
4: Motor 1/2 switching operation guidance
5: Motor constant setting guidance
Note1) 1 is for manufacturer's settings. Do not change the settings.

E-2
E6581697

„ How to use the guidance function


Here are the steps to follow to set parameters, using the guidance function. (When the Preset speed guidance
auf = 2)
Operation panel
LED display Operation
action
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).
 (When standard monitor display selection = is set to 0
[operation frequency]).

MODE  The first basic parameter "History ()" is displayed.

 Turn the setting dial to select the guidance function ().

 Press the center of the setting dial to display .

Turn the setting dial to change to the purpose-specific guidance


 setting value "".


Press the center of the setting dial to display the purpose-specific
guidance parameter group (refer to following table).
5
After moving to the purpose-specific guidance parameter group, use
****
the setting dial to change the parameters.
 is displayed on completion of the setting of the guidance
 parameter group.
Display of parameter
MODE ↓

Press the MODE key to exit the guidance parameter group.
↓
MODE By pressing the MODE key, you can return to the default monitoring
 mode (display of operation frequency).
↓
MODE


If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the MODE key several times to start over
from the step of  display.
 or  is affixed respectively to the first or last parameter in each guidance wizard parameter group.

E-3
E6581697

Table of parameters that can be changed using the guidance function


Preset-speed setting Analog input operation Motor 2 switching Motor constant
guidance guidance operation guidance setting guidance
auf=2 auf=3 auf=4 auf=5
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 

5
 
 
 
 







5.3 Selecting inverter overload characteristic


 :Overload characteristic selection

Refer to section 3.5 for details.

E-4
E6581697

5.4 Setting acceleration/deceleration time


 :Automatic acceleration/deceleration
 :Acceleration time 1
 :Deceleration time 1

• Function
1) For acceleration time 1  programs the time that it takes for the inverter output frequency to go
from 0.0Hz to maximum frequency .
2) For deceleration time 1  programs the time that it takes for the inverter output frequency to go
from maximum frequency  to 0.0Hz.

5.4.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration


This automatically adjusts acceleration and deceleration time in line with load size.
 =
5
* Adjusts the acceleration/deceleration time automatically within the range of 1/8 to 8 times as long as the
time set with the  or , depending on the current rating of the inverter.
 =
* Automatically adjusts speed during acceleration only. During deceleration, speed is not adjusted
automatically but reduced at the rate set with .
Output Output
When load is small When load is large
frequency (Hz) frequency (Hz)
  

0 0
Time Time
[sec] [sec]
Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration
time time time time
Shorten acceleration/deceleration time Lengthen acceleration/deceleration time

Set  (automatic acceleration/deceleration) to  or .

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled (manual setting)
 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 1: Automatic 0
2: Automatic (only at acceleration)
, When automatically setting acceleration/deceleration time, always change the acceleration/deceleration
time so that it conforms to the load. The acceleration/deceleration time changes constantly with load
fluctuations. For inverters that require a fixed acceleration/deceleration time, use the manual settings
(, ).

E-5
E6581697

, Setting acceleration/deceleration time (,) in conformance with mean load allows optimum
setting that conforms to further changes in load.
, Use this parameter after actually connecting the motor.
, When the inverter is used with a load that fluctuates considerably, it may fail to adjust the acceleration or
deceleration time in time, and therefore may be tripped.
, Do not use  = when using a dynamic braking resistor (optional).

[Methods of setting automatic acceleration/deceleration]


Operation panel LED display Operation
action
Displays the operation frequency.
 (When standard monitor display selection  is set to 
[Operation frequency])

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

 Turn the setting dial to the right to change the parameter to .

Parameter values can be read by pressing the center of the setting


5 
dial.

 Turn the setting dial to the right to change the parameter to  or .

Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed parameter.
⇔
 and the parameter are displayed alternately.

, Assigning the forced deceleration command (function number 120 to 123) to any logic input terminal, it can
be changed automatic deceleration on a mandatory.

5.4.2 Manually setting acceleration/deceleration time


Set acceleration time from 0.0 (Hz) operation frequency to maximum frequency  and deceleration time as
the time when operation frequency goes from maximum frequency  to 0.0 (Hz).
Output frequency (Hz)

 = (Manual setting)

O
Time [sec]

 

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 Acceleration time 1 0.0-3600 (360.0) (s) 10.0
 Deceleration time 1 0.0-3600 (360.0) (s) 10.0
Note1): When the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 0.0 seconds, the inverter accelerates and
decelerates 0.05 seconds.

E-6
E6581697

Note2): Setting increment unit can be changed to 0.01 seconds by parameter f519.

, If the programmed value is shorter than the optimum acceleration/deceleration time determined by load
conditions, overcurrent stall or overvoltage stall function may make the acceleration/deceleration time longer
than the programmed time. If an even shorter acceleration/deceleration time is programmed, there may be an
overcurrent trip or overvoltage trip for inverter protection. (Refer to section 13.1 for details)

5.5 Increasing starting torque


 : Torque boost setting macro function

• Function
Simultaneously switches inverter output (V/F) control and programs motor constants automatically (On-
line automatic-tuning function) to improve torque generated by the motor. This parameter integrates the
setting of special V/F control selection such as vector control.

[Parameter setting] 5
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
Torque boost setting macro 1: Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning
 0
function 2: Vector control + auto-tuning
3: Energy saving + auto-tuning
Note1) Parameter displays on the right always return to after setting. The previous setting is displayed on the left.
Ex.  
Note2) Auto-tuning is performed at the start of the motor.

Caution:
When the torque boost setting macro function  is set, look at the motor's name plate and set the
following parameters.
 : Base frequency 1 (rated frequency)
vlv : Base frequency voltage 1 (rated voltage)
: Motor rated capacity
: Motor rated current
: Motor rated speed
Set the other motor constants as necessary.

1) Increasing torque automatically according to the load

 is set to  (Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning)

When torque boost setting macro function control  is set to 1 (automatic torque boost + auto-tuning),
the inverter keeps track of the load current in any speed range and automatically adjusts the output voltage to
ensure enough torque and stable operation.

E-7
E6581697

Note 1: The same characteristic can be obtained by setting the V/F control mode selection parameter  to
 (automatic torque boost control) and the auto-tuning parameter  to  (auto-tuning).
⇒ Refer to section 6.21
Note 2: Setting  to  automatically programs  to .

2) When using vector control (increasing starting torque and high-precision


operations)

 is set to  (Vector control + auto-tuning)

Setting torque boost setting macro function control  to  (vector control + auto-tuning) provides high
starting torque bringing out the maximum in motor characteristics from the low-speed range. This suppresses
changes in motor speed caused by fluctuations in load to provide high precision operation. This is an
optimum feature for elevators and other load transporting machinery.

Note 3: The same characteristic can be obtained by setting the V/F control mode selection parameter
 to  (vector control) and the auto-tuning parameter  to  (auto-tuning).

5 Note 4: Setting  to  automatically programs  to .


⇒ Refer to section 6.21

3) Energy-saving operation

 is set to  (Energy saving + auto-tuning)

When torque boost setting macro function control  is set to  (energy saving + auto-tuning), the
inverter always passes a current appropriate to the load for energy saving.

Note 5: The same characteristic can be obtained by setting the V/F control mode selection parameter
 to  (automatic energy saving) and the auto-tuning parameter  to  (auto-tuning).
⇒ Refer to section 6.21
Note 6: Setting  to  automatically programs  to .

[Example of parameter setting]


Operation panel
LED display Operation
action
Displays the operation frequency. (Perform during operation stopped.)
.  (When standard monitor display selection  is set to 
[Operation frequency])

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

Turn the setting dial to the right to change the parameter to 

(torque boost setting macro function).

Parameter values can be read by pressing the center of the setting


 
dial.
Turn the setting dial to the right to change the parameter to 
  (energy saving + auto-tuning). (Right side is the setting value, left
side is the history of the previous setting.)

E-8
E6581697

Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed parameter.
 ⇔ 
 and the parameter are displayed alternately.

If vector control cannot be programmed....


First read the precautions about vector control in section 5.12-9).
1) If the desired torque cannot be obtained ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 2
2) If auto-tuning error "" appears ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 4

„ (Torque boost setting macro function) and  (V/F control mode


selection)
Automatic torque boost is the parameter for setting V/F control mode selection () and auto-tuning
() together. That is why all parameters related to change automatically when  is changed.

Automatically programmed parameters



Displays  after resetting -

Check the programmed value of . -

5
Auto-tuning
Automatic torque boost +
  Automatic torque boost  executed
auto-tuning
(after execution: 0)
Auto-tuning
 Vector control + auto-tuning  Vector control  executed
(after execution: 0)
Auto-tuning
 Energy saving + auto-tuning  Energy saving  executed
(after execution: 0)

4) Increasing torque manually (V/F constant control)


This is the setting of constant torque characteristics that are suited for such things as conveyors. It can also
be used to manually increase starting torque.

If V/F constant control is programmed after changing ,


Set V/F control mode selection  =  (V/F constant).
⇒ Refer to section 5.12.1)
Note 7: To further increase torque, increase the torque boost value 1().
How to set the torque boost value 1() ⇒ Refer to section 5.13
Note 8: V/F control selection = 1 (variable torque) is an effective setting for load such as fans and
pumps. ⇒ Refer to section 5.12.2)

E-9
E6581697

5.6 Selection of operation mode


 : Command mode selection
 : Frequency setting mode selection

• Function
These parameters are used to specify which input device (panel keypad, terminal board, or
communication) takes priority in entering an operation stop command or frequency setting mode (terminal
board VIA/VIB/VIC, setting dial, communication, or UP/DOWN from external logic).

<Command mode selection>


[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Terminal board
1: Panel keypad (including remote keypad)
 Command mode selection 2: RS485 communication 1
5 3: CANopen communication
4: Communication option

[Programmed value]

Terminal board
: operation
ON and OFF of an external signal run and stop operation.

Panel keypad Press the RUN and STOP keys on the panel keypad to run and stop.
: operation
Operation can also be done from the extension panel.

RS485 Run/stop operations by RS485 communication from an external device.


: communication ⇒ Refer to section 6.33.

CANopen Run/stop operations by CANopen communication from an external device.


3: communication ⇒ Refer to section 6.33.

Communication Run/stop operations by commands from a communication option.


4: option ⇒ Refer to section 6.33.

* There are two types of function: the function that conforms to commands selected by , and the function
that conforms only to commands from the terminal board. (function number 108, 109) See the table of input
terminal function selection in section 11.6.
* When priority is given to commands from a linked computer or terminal board, they have priority over the
setting of .

E-10
E6581697

<Frequency setting mode selection>


[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Setting dial 1(save even if power is off)
1: Terminal board VIA
2: Terminal board VIB
3: Setting dial 2(press in center to save)
4: RS485 communication
 Frequency setting mode selection 1 5: UP/DOWN from external logic input 0
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input

[Programmed value]

 Frequencies are set by rotating the setting dial on the inverter. Like the position
: of notches in a volume knob, the frequency setting value at the position of the
Setting dial 1
notch is saved.
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2
5

A frequency command is set by means of external analog signals.
: Terminal board VIA (VIA terminal: 0 – 10Vdc)
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2 and 7.3

 A frequency command is set by means of external analog signals.


: Terminal board VIB (VIB terminal: 0 - +10Vdc or -10 - +10Vdc)
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2 and 7.3

 Frequencies are set by rotating the setting dial on the inverter. Press the center
: Setting dial 2 of the setting dial to save the frequency setting value.
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2

RS485 Frequencies are set by RS485 communication from an external device.


: communication ⇒ Refer to section 6.33

Frequencies are set by up/down commands from a terminal.


: UP/DOWN frequency
⇒ Refer to section 6.6.3

CANopen Frequencies are set by CANopen communication from an external device.


: communication ⇒ Refer to section 6.33

Communication Frequencies are set by commands from a communication option.


: option ⇒ Refer to section 6.33

E-11
E6581697

A frequency command is set by means of external analog signals.


: Terminal board VIC (VIC terminal: 0 (4) - 20mAdc)
⇒ Refer to section 3.2.2 and 7.3

A frequency command is set by means of external pulse train signals.


: Pulse train input (S2 terminal: 10pps - 20kpps)
⇒ Refer to section 6.6.5

, No matter what value the command mode selection  and the frequency setting mode selection 1
 are set to the control input terminal functions described below are always in operative state.
• Reset terminal (valid only for tripping if set for programmable input terminal function)
• Standby terminal (when programmed by programmable input terminal functions).
• External input tripping stop terminal command (when so set using the programmable input terminal
function)
• Coast stop command terminal (if set for programmable input terminal function)
, To make changes in the command mode selection  and the frequency setting mode selection 1
5 , first stop the inverter temporarily.
(Can be changed while in operation when  is set to .)
, Priority commands from communications or terminal boards are given priority over .

„ Preset-speed operation
: Set to  (Terminal board operation)
: Valid in all setting values.

„ Input terminal settings


Assign the following functions to the input terminal to allow switching of the frequency command by turning
the terminal ON/OFF.
Input terminal function ON OFF
Enabled during communication
48 Forced local from communication Communication
Local (Setting of , )
Frequency setting mode terminal
106 Terminal board (VIA) enabled setting of 
board
Each of the following numbers (49, 107) are reverse signals.

E-12
E6581697

„ Example of run and frequency command switching

Command mode and frequency setting mode switching

Command
mode selection
Terminal block RS485 communication With remote keypad
 (option) RKP007Z
active (CMTB) priority clear
Input terminal (SCLC)
function Input terminal function
Terminal board :108/109 :48/49 LOC Key
/ REM
Panel keypad (valid when
RS485 communications f732=0)

CANopen communication
Internal
Communication option
RS485 operation
communications command
Terminal
board 5
Panel keypad
(RUN/STOP key)
Frequency
setting mode Frequency
selection 1 reference
 command
forced Terminal block
switching active (FMTB)
Setting dial 1 FCHG Input terminal
: 104/105 function
Terminal board VIA
: 106/107
Terminal board VIB
Setting dial 2
RS485 communications
UP/DOWN from external logic input
CANopen communication Internal
Communication option frequency
command
Terminal board VIC Terminal
Pulse train input board VIA RS485
communications Setting dial 2
(Up/down key)

Same as


Frequency
setting mode
selection 2


E-13
E6581697

5.7 Meter setting and adjustment


 : Meter selection
 : Meter adjustment gain

Refer to section 3.4 for details.

5.8 Forward/reverse run selection (Panel keypad)


 : Forward/reverse run selection (Panel keypad)

• Function
Program the direction of rotation of the motor when the running and stopping are made using the RUN

5 key and STOP key on the operation panel.


Valid when  (command mode) is set to  (operation panel).

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Forward run
1: Reverse run
Forward/reverse run selection 2: Forward run (F/R switching on
 remote keypad) 0
(Panel keypad)
3: Reverse run (F/R switching on
remote keypad)
+ Using remote keypad RKP007Z (option) : When  is set to  and the standard monitor is displayed,
pressing the FWD/REV key changes the direction of rotation from forward to reverse after displaying the
message .
Pressing the FWD/REV key again changes the direction of rotation from reverse to forward after
displaying the message .
+ Using remote keypad RKP002Z (option) : When  is set to  and the standard monitor is displayed,
pressing the DOWN key while pressing the ENT key changes the direction of rotation from forward to
reverse after displaying the message .
Pressing the UP key while pressing the ENT key again changes the direction of rotation from reverse to
forward after displaying the message .
+ Check the direction of rotation on the status monitor. Refer to section 8.1 for details about monitor.
: Forward run
: Reverse run
+ When the F and R terminals are used for switching between forward and reverse rotation from the
terminal board, the  forward/reverse run selection parameter is rendered invalid.
Short across the F-CC (Sink logic) or P24-F (Source logic) terminals: forward rotation
Short across the R-CC (Sink logic) or P24-R (Source logic) terminals: reverse rotation

E-14
E6581697

+ The inverter was factory-configured by default so that if both forward and reverse run signals from
terminal board are ON simultaneously, the motor will decelerate to stop.
However, you can use the parameter  to select deceleration stop or reverse run.

5.9 Maximum frequency


: Maximum frequency

• Function
1) Programs the range of frequencies output by the inverter (maximum output values).
2) This frequency is used as the reference for acceleration/deceleration time.

Output frequency
(Hz) When =80Hz ・This function determines the value
80Hz in line with the ratings of the motor
and load.
60Hz When =60Hz
・Maximum frequency cannot be
adjusted during operation.To
adjust, first stop the inverter.
5

0 100% Frequency setting signal (%)

+ If  is increased, adjust the upper limit frequency  as necessary.


[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 Maximum frequency 30.0-500.0 (Hz) 80.0

E-15
E6581697

5.10 Upper limit and lower limit frequencies


: Upper limit frequency
: Lower limit frequency

• Function
Programs the lower limit frequency that determines the lower limit of the output frequency and the upper
limit frequency that determines the upper limit of that frequency.

Upper limit Lower limit


Command frequency (Hz) frequency Command frequency (Hz) frequency
 





5 0
Frequency setting signal
100% 0
Frequency setting signal
100%

* Frequencies that go * Command frequency


higher than  will not cannot be set lower than
be output. .

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 Upper limit frequency 0.5 -  (Hz) ∗
 Lower limit frequency 0.0 -  (Hz) 0.0
* Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

Note1) Do not set a value 10 times larger than  (base frequency 1) and  (base frequency 2) for .
If a large number is set, the output frequency can only be output at 10 times of minimum value  and
 and a-05 alarm is displayed.
Note2) Output frequency lower than parameter f240 (Starting frequency setting) is not output. Parameter
f240 setting is needed.

E-16
E6581697

5.11 Base frequency


 : Base frequency 1

 : Base frequency voltage 1

• Function
Set the base frequency and the base frequency voltage in conformance with load specifications or the
base frequency.

Note: This is an important parameter that determines the constant torque control area.

Base frequency voltage



Output voltage [V]

5
0
 Output frequency (Hz)

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 Base frequency 1 20.0-500.0 (Hz) ∗
50-330 (240V class)
 Base frequency voltage1 ∗
50-660 (500V class)
* Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

E-17
E6581697

5.12 Selecting control mode


 : V/F control mode selection

• Function
The V/F controls shown below can be selected.
{ V/F constant
{ Variable torque
{ Automatic torque boost control (*1)
{ Vector control (*1)
{ Energy saving (*1)
{ Dynamic energy-saving (For fan and pump)
{ PM motor control
{ V/F 5-point setting
(*1) Parameter setting macro torque boost:  parameter can automatically set this parameter and
auto-tuning at a time.
5 [Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: V/F constant
1: Variable torque
2: Automatic torque boost control
3: Vector control
4: Energy-saving
 V/F control mode selection (*2)
5: Dynamic energy-saving
(For fan and pump)
6: PM motor control
7: V/F 5-point setting
8: - (*3)
(*2): Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
(*3): 8 is manufacturer setting parameter. Do not change the value of this parameter.

Note:  (V/F control mode selection) is valid only for the first motor.
Changes to "V/F constant control" when switching to the second motor, regardless of the  setting.
Steps in setting are as follows
(In this example, the V/F control mode selection parameter  is set to  (Vector control).

E-18
E6581697

[Setting V/F control mode selection to 3 (sensorless vector control)]


Operation panel
LED display Operation
action
Displays the operation frequency. (Perform during operation stopped.)
. (When standard monitor display selection  is set to 
[Operation frequency])

MODE  The first basic parameter “” (history function) is displayed.

Rotate the setting dial to the right, and change the parameter to 

(control selection).
Parameter values can be read by pressing the center of the setting

dial (In case of ).
Rotate the setting dial to the right, and change the parameter to 

(vector control).
Press the center of the setting dial to save the changed parameter.
⇔ 
 and parameter set value “” are displayed alternately.

Caution:
5
When the V/F control mode selection  is set to : Automatic torque boost control, : Vector control,
: Energy-saving, : Dynamic energy-saving, or : PM motor control, be sure to set the following
parameters according to the motor's name plate.
 : Base frequency 1 (rated frequency)
 : Base frequency voltage 1 (rated voltage) 
 : Motor rated capacity 
 : Motor rated current
 : Motor rated speed
Set the other motor constants as necessary

1) Constant torque characteristics


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (V/F constant)
This is applied to loads with equipment like conveyors and cranes that require the same torque at low
speeds as at rated speeds.

Base frequency voltage



Output voltage(%)



0
Base frequency  Output frequency (Hz)

E-19
E6581697

* To increase the torque further, increase the setting value of the manual torque boost value 1 ().
⇒ Refer to section 5.12 for details.

2) Setting for fans and pumps


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (variable torque)
This is appropriate for load characteristics of such things as fans, pumps and blowers in which the torque is
proportional to the square of load rotation speed.
in relation to is.

Base frequency voltage



Output voltage(%)


5 0
Output frequency (Hz)
Base frequency 

3) Increasing starting torque


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (automatic torque boost control)
Detects load current in all speed ranges and automatically adjusts voltage output (torque boost) from inverter.
This gives steady torque for stable runs.

Base frequency voltage


Output voltage(%)



:Automatically
adjusts the
amountof torque 0
boost.
Base frequency  Output frequency (Hz)

Note: This control system can oscillate and destabilize runs depending on the load. In this case, set
V/F mode selection = (V/F constant) and increase manual torque boost .

E-20
E6581697

+ Motor constant must be set


If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,
there is basically no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, set the following parameters
according to the motor's name plate.
 (Base frequency 1),  (Base frequency voltage 1),  (Motor rated capacity),  (Motor
rated current),  (Motor rated speed)
There are three procedures for setting the other motor constants.
1) Auto torque boost and motor constants (auto-tuning) can be set at once.
To do so, set the basic parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 5.5 for details.
2) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning).
Set the extended parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 2 for details.
3) Each motor constant can be set individually. ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 4 for details.

4) Vector control - increasing starting torque and achieving high-precision operation.


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to 3 (Vector control)
Using sensorless vector control will provide the highest torque at the low speed ranges. 5
(1) Provides large starting torque.
(2) Effective when stable operation is required to move smoothly up from the low speeds.
(3) Effective in elimination of load fluctuations caused by motor slippage.

+ Motor constant must be set


If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,
there is basically no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, set the following parameters
according to the motor's name plate.
 (Base frequency 1),  (Base frequency voltage 1),  (Motor rated capacity),  (Motor
rated current),  (Motor rated speed) 
There are three procedures for setting the other motor constants.
1) The sensorless vector control and motor constants (auto-tuning) can be set at a time.
Set the basic parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 5.5 for details.
2) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning).
Set the extended parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 2 for details.
3) Each motor constant can be set individually. ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 4 for details.

5) Energy-saving
Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (Energy-saving)
Energy can be saved in all speed areas by detecting load current and flowing the optimum current that fits
the load.

E-21
E6581697

+ Motor constant must be set


If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,
there is no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, set the following parameters according to the
motor’s name plate.
 (Base frequency 1),  (Base frequency voltage 1),  (Motor rated capacity),  (Motor
rated current),  (Motor rated speed)
There are three procedures for setting the other motor constants.
1) Automatic energy-saving operation and a motor constant can be set at once.
Set the basic parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 5.5 for details.
2) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning).
Set the extended parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 2 for details.
3) Each motor constant can be set individually. ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 4 for details.

6) Achieving further energy savings


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (Dynamic energy-saving)
5 More substantial energy savings than those provided by setting  to  can be achieved in any speed
range by keeping track of the load current and passing a current appropriate to the load. The inverter cannot
respond to rapid load fluctuations, so that this feature should be used only for loads, such as fans and pumps,
that are free of violent load fluctuations.

+ Motor constant must be set


If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,
there is no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, set the following parameters according to the
motor’s name plate.
 (Base frequency 1),  (Base frequency voltage 1),  (Motor rated capacity),  (Motor
rated current),  (Motor rated speed)
There are two procedures for setting the other motor constants.
1) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning).
Set the extended parameter  to . ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 2 for details.
2) Each motor constant can be set individually. ⇒ Refer to section 6.21 selection 4 for details.

7) Operating a permanent magnet motor


Setting of V/F control mode selection  to  (PM motor control)
Permanent magnet motors (PM motors) that are light, small in size and highly efficient, as compared to
induction motors, can be operated in sensor-less operation mode.
Note that this feature can be used only for specific motors. For more information, contact your Toshiba dealer.

E-22
E6581697

8) Setting of V/f characteristic arbitrarily


Setting of V/f control mode selection pt to 7 (V/f 5-point setting)
In this mode, the base frequency and the base frequency voltage for the V/f control need to be set to operate
the motor while switching a maximum of 5 different V/f characteristics.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 V/f 5-point setting VF1 frequency ~ Hz 
 V/f 5-point setting VF1 voltage ~ % * 
 V/f 5-point setting VF2 frequency ~ Hz 
 V/f 5-point setting VF2 voltage ~ % * 
 V/f 5-point setting VF3 frequency ~ Hz 
 V/f 5-point setting VF3 voltage ~ % * 
 V/f 5-point setting VF4 frequency ~ Hz 
 V/f 5-point setting VF4 voltage ~ % * 
 V/f 5-point setting VF5 frequency ~ Hz 
 V/f 5-point setting VF5 voltage
* 100% adjustment value (200V class: 200V, 400V class: 400V)
~ % * 
5

Base frequency V/f 5-point setting


voltage 1 
VF5

Output voltage
Output voltage

VF4

VF3

VF1
 VF2

[V]/[%]

0 Output frequency [Hz]
     
Base frequency 1

Note 1: Restrict the value of torque to boost (vb) to 3% or so. Boosting the torque too much may impair the
linearity between points.
Note 2: If the V/f 5-point is set within the diagonally shaded area in the figure below, the V/f 5-point is placed
automatically on the boundary line (heavy line in the figure).

E-23
E6581697

Voltage
100%

: Area in which the


V/f 5-point cannot
be set

0
1Hz  Frequency

9) Cautions for vector control


1) When performing vector control, look at the motor's name plate and set the following parameters.

5  (Base frequency 1),  (Base frequency voltage 1),  (Motor rated capacity), 
(Motor rated current),  (Motor rated speed)
2) The sensorless vector control exerts its characteristics effectively in frequency areas below the base
frequency (). The same characteristics will not be obtained in areas above the base frequency.
3) Set the base frequency to anywhere from 40 to 120Hz during vector control (=).
4) Use a general purpose squirrel-cage motor with a capacity that is the same as the inverter's rated capacity or
one rank below. The minimum applicable motor capacity is 0.1kW.
5) Use a motor that has 2-8 P.
6) Always operate the motor in single operation (one inverter to one motor). Sensorless vector control
cannot be used when one inverter is operated with more than one motor.
When using a combination of several motors, set the V/F constant (=).
7) The maximum length of wires between the inverter and motor is 30 meters. If the wires are longer than 30
meters, set standard auto-tuning with the wires connected to improve low-speed torque during sensorless
vector control.
However the effects of voltage drop cause motor-generated torque in the vicinity of rated frequency to be
somewhat lower.
8) When a reactor is connected between the inverter and a motor, the motor's generated torque may fall.
Setting auto-tuning may also cause a trip () rendering sensorless vector control unusable.

E-24
E6581697

5.13 Manual torque boost - increasing torque boost at low


speeds
 : Torque boost value 1

• Function
If torque is inadequate at low speeds, increase torque by raising the torque boost rate with this
parameter.

Base frequency voltage



Output voltage
[V]/(%)


5
Base frequency  Output frequency (Hz)

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

 Torque boost value 1 0.0 - 30.0 (%) According to model


(Refer to section 11.4)
+ Valid when  is set to 0, 1, or 7.
Note 1: The optimum value is programmed for each inverter capacity. Be careful not to increase the torque boost
rate too much because it could cause an overcurrent trip at startup.

5.14 Setting the electronic thermal


t : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1
o : Electronic thermal protection characteristic selection

Refer to section 3.5 for details

5.15 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 15 steps)


s to  ,  to  : Preset-speed frequency 1 to 15
Refer to section 3.6 for details.

E-25
E6581697

5.16 Process input value of PID control


fpid : Process input value of PID control

Refer to section 6.20 for details.

5.17 Standard default setting


t : Default setting

Refer to section 4.3.2 for details.

5 5.18 Checking the region setting selection


 : Checking the region setting

Refer to section 4.4 for details.

5.19 Registered parameters display selection


 : Registered parameters display selection

Refer to section 4.5 for details.

5.20 Searching for and resetting changed parameters


 : Automatic edit function

Refer to section 4.3.1 for details.

E-26
E6581697

6. Other parameters
Extended parameters are provided for sophisticated operation, fine adjustment and other special purposes. Modify
parameter settings as required. Refer to section 11 tables of extended parameters.

6.1 Input/output parameters

6.1.1 Low-speed signal


f100 : Low-speed signal output frequency

• Function
When the output frequency exceeds the setting of f100 an ON signal will be generated. This signal
can be used as an electromagnetic brake excitation/release signal.
This signal can also be used as an operation signal when f100 is set to 0.0Hz, because an ON
signal is put out if the output frequency exceeds 0.0Hz.
+ Output from the open collector output terminal RY-RC. (Default)
Output FLA-FLB-FLC and OUT are possible depending on the parameter settings. 6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f100 Low-speed signal output frequency 0.0 - fh (Hz) 0.0

Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency


0
Time [s]

Low-speed signal output ON


Between RY-RC terminals OFF
ON
Low-speed signal output: OFF
Inverted

F-1
E6581697

An example of the connection of An example of the connection of


the open collector OUT (sink logic) the relay output terminals

+24V
+24V
P24

Ry
OUT
Ry RY

NO
RC
CC

• Output terminal setting


Default outputs low-speed signal (ON signal) to RY-RC terminal. This setting must be changed to invert
the polarity of the signal.
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

6
4: LOW (Low-
f130 Output terminal selection 1A (RY-RC) 0-255 speed detection
(Refer to section 11.7) signal)
Setting value 5 is reverse signal.
Note) Set f132 to output to FLA-FLC-FLB terminals and f131 to OUT terminal.

6.1.2 Output of designated frequency reach signal


f102 : Speed reach detection band

• Function
When the output frequency becomes equal to the setting by designated frequency ± f102, an ON
or OFF signal is generated.

[Parameter setting]
■Parameter setting of designated frequency and detection band
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f102 Speed reach detection band 0.0-fh (Hz) 2.5

■Parameter setting of output terminal selection


Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Output terminal 0-255 6: RCH (Output frequency attainment signal
f131
selection 2A (OUT) (Refer to section 11.7.) (acceleration/deceleration completed))
Setting value 7 is reverse signal.
Note: Set f132 to output to FLA-FLC-FLB terminals and f130 to RY-RC terminal.

F-2
E6581697

Output frequency [Hz]

Designated frequency + 


Designated frequency
Designated frequency − 

0
Time [s]
Set frequency speed reach signal
Between OUT-NO terminals
ON
OFF
Set frequency speed reach signal: ON
Inverted OFF

6.1.3 Output of set frequency speed reach signal


f101 : Speed reach setting frequency
f102 : Speed reach detection band
6
• Function
When the output frequency becomes equal to the frequency set by f101±f102, an ON or OFF
signal is generated.

[Parameter setting]
■Parameter setting of frequency and detection band
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f101 Speed reach setting frequency 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f102 Speed reach detection band 0.0-fh (Hz) 2.5

■Parameter setting of output terminal selection


Title Function Adjustment range Setting
Output terminal 0-255 8: RCHF (Set frequency attainment
f131
selection 2A (OUT) (Refer to section 11.7.) signal)
Setting value 9 is reverse signal.
Note: Set f132 to output to FLA-FLC-FLB terminals and f130 to RY-RC terminal.

F-3
E6581697

If the detection band value + the set frequency is less than the designated frequency

Output frequency [Hz]

 + 

 - 
Set frquency speed reach signal 0 Time [s]
OUT-NO terminals
ON
OFF
Set frequency speed reach signal:
ON
Inverted
OFF

6.2 Input signal selection

6.2.1 Priority selection (Both F and R are ON)


6 f105 : Priority selection (Both F and R are ON)

• Function
This parameter allows you to select the direction in which the motor runs when a forward run (F)
command and a reverse run (R) command are entered simultaneously.
1) Reverse
2) Deceleration stop

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Priority selection (Both F and R are 0: Reverse
f105 1
ON) 1: Deceleration stop

F-4
E6581697

(1) [f105 = 0 (Reverse)]: If an F command and an R command are entered simultaneously,


the motor will run in the reverse direction.
Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency
Forward run

0 Time [s]
Reverse run
Set frequency

Forward signal ON
OFF

Reverse signal ON
OFF

(2) [f105 = 1 (Stop)]: If an F command and an R command are entered simultaneously,


the motor will deceleration stop.
6
Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency
Forward run

0 Time[s]
Reverse run

ON
Forward signal
OFF

ON
Reverse signal OFF

F-5
E6581697

6.2.2 Changing the voltage range of VIB terminal


f107 : Analog input terminal selection (VIB)

• Function
This parameter allows you to choose the voltage signal input for the VIB terminal.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Analog input terminal 0: 0-+10V
f107 0
selection (VIB) 1: -10-+10V
, f107=0 : Input 0 to +10Vdc to VIB-CC terminals.
Resolution is maximum 1/1000 between 0 to +10Vdc.
, f107=1 : Input -10 to +10Vdc to VIB-CC terminals.
Resolution is maximum 1/1000 between -10 to +10Vdc.

6.2.3 Changing the functions of VIA and VIB terminals


6 f109 : Analog/logic input selection (VIA/VIB)

• Function
This parameter allows you to choose between analog signal input and contact signal input for the VIA
and VIB terminals.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Analog input for communications
VIB - analog input
1: VIA - analog input
VIB - contact input (Sink)
Analog/logic input
2: VIA - analog input
f109 selection 0
(VIA/VIB) VIB - contact input (Source)
3: VIA - contact input (Sink)
VIB - contact input (Sink)
4: VIA - contact input (Source)
VIB - contact input (Source)
Note) When using VIA and VIB terminals as contact input terminals, be sure to insert a resistor between P24
terminal and VIA/VIB terminals in sink logic connection, and insert a resistor between VIA/VIB terminals
and CC terminal in source logic connection. (Recommended resistance: 4.7kΩ-1/2W)

F-6
E6581697

6.3 Terminal function selection

6.3.1 Keeping an input terminal function always active (ON)


f104 : Always active function selection 1
f108 : Always active function selection 2
f110 : Always active function selection 3

• Function
This parameter specifies an input terminal function that is always to be kept active (ON).

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f104 Always active function selection 1 0-153 (Refer to section 11.6.) 0 (No function)
f108 Always active function selection 2 0-153 (Refer to section 11.6.) 0 (No function)
f110 Always active function selection 3 0-153 (Refer to section 11.6.) 6 (ST)

6
+ Explanation of the coast stop function Coast stop
When ST (Standby) is OFF, coast stops. Motor
The default setting for ST (Standby) is ON, change the speed
following settings.
x = (no function) ON
F-CC OFF
x Assign open input terminal 6: ST (Standby).
Coast stops if terminal set for ST (Standby) is set to ON
ST-CC OFF
OFF. The monitor on the inverter at this time displays


F-7
E6581697

6.3.2 Modifying input terminal functions


f111 : Input terminal selection 1A (F) f151 : Input terminal selection 1B (F)

f112 : Input terminal selection 2A (R) f152 : Input terminal selection 2B (R)
f113 : Input terminal selection 3A (RES) f153 : Input terminal selection 3B (RES)

f114 : Input terminal selection 4A (S1) f154 : Input terminal selection 4B (S1)

f115 : Input terminal selection 5 (S2) f155 : Input terminal selection 1C (F)

f116 : Input terminal selection 6 (S3) f156 : Input terminal selection 2C (R)

f109 : Analog/logic input selection (VIA/VIB)



f117 : Input terminal selection 7 (VIB)
f118 : Input terminal selection 8 (VIA)

6 ⇒ Refer to section 7.2.1 for details about input terminal functions.

6.3.3 Modifying output terminal functions


f130 : Output terminal selection 1A (RY-RC)
f131 : Output terminal selection 2A (OUT)
f132 : Output terminal selection 3 (FL)
f137 : Output terminal selection 1B (RY-RC)
f138 : Output terminal selection 2B (OUT)
f139 : Output terminal logic selection (RY-RC, OUT)
⇒ Refer to section 7.2.2 for details about output terminal functions.

F-8
E6581697

6.3.4 Comparing the frequency command values


f167 : Frequency command agreement detection range
fmod : Frequency setting mode selection 1
f207 : Frequency setting mode selection 2

• Function
If the frequency command value specified using fmod (or f207) almost agrees with the
frequency command value from the VIA terminal with an accuracy of ± the setting of f167, an ON
or OFF signal will be sent out.

■ Frequency command value and agreement detection range parameter setting


Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Frequency command agreement
f167 0.0 ∼ fh (Hz) 2.5
detection range
0: Setting dial 1(save even if
power is off)
1: Terminal board VIA
fmod Frequency setting mode selection 1 2: Terminal board VIB 0
3: Setting dial 2(press in center
to save)
4: RS485 communication
6
5: UP/DOWN from external
logic input
6: CANopen communication
f207 Frequency setting mode selection 2 7: Communication option 1
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
Note: To put out signals to RY-RC, OUT or FLA-FLB-FLC, set f130, f131, or f132 respectively to
144 or 145
Frequency command value
VIA
+ 
 or 
- 

ON
Frequency command agreement signal OFF
Frequency command ON
agreement signal : Inverted OFF

Note: This function can be used, for example, to send out a signal indicating whether the amount of
processing and the amount of feedback agree with each other when the PID function is in use.
For an explanation of the PID function, see section 6.20.

F-9
E6581697

6.4 Basic parameters 2

6.4.1 Switching motor characteristics via terminal input


f170 : Base frequency 2
f171 : Base frequency voltage 2
f172 : Torque boost value 2
f173 : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 2
f185 : Stall prevention level 2

• Function
Use the above parameters to switch the operation of two motors with a single inverter and to select
motor V/F characteristics (two types) according to the particular needs or operation mode.

Note: The pt (V/F control mode selection) parameter is enabled only for motor1.

6 If motor 2 is selected, V/F control will be given constant torque characteristics.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f170 Base frequency 2 20.0-500.0 *1
50-330 (V) (240V class)
f171 Base frequency voltage 2 *1
50-660 (V) (500V class)
Depending on model
f172 Torque boost value 2 0.0-30.0 (%)
(Refer to section 11.4)
Motor electronic-thermal
f173 10-100 (%) / (A) *2 100
protection level 2
10-199 (%) / (A),
f185 Stall prevention level 2 150
200 : Disabled *2
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*2: The inverter's rated current is 100%. When f701 (current and voltage unit selection)
= 1 (A (amps)/V (volts)) is set, it can be set at A (amps).

F-10
E6581697

■ Setting of switching terminals


To switch to motor 2, assign the following functions to a terminal not being used. It is also possible to switch
to acceleration/deceleration 2 (AD2). Refer to section 6.15.1 for details.
It is possible to set 3 functions for terminal F and R, and 2 functions for terminal S1 and S2.

Input terminal function number


Parameters changed from applicable parameters and
24 26 28 32 default standards
AD2 AD3 VF2 OCS2
Default setting :
pt, vl, vlv, vb, thr, acc,
OFF OFF OFF OFF
dec, fs02, f601
ON OFF OFF OFF acc ¤ fs00、dec ¤ f501、f502 ¤ fs03

OFF ON OFF OFF acc ¤ fs10、dec ¤ f511、f502 ¤ fs12

During stop : pt ¤ V/F constant , vl ¤ f170,


vlv ¤ f171, vb ¤ f172, thr ¤ f173
OFF OFF ON OFF
During run : vl ¤ f170, vlv ¤ f171,
vb ¤ f172, thr ¤ f173
OFF OFF OFF ON f601 ¤ f185

Note 1: Each of the following numbers (25, 27, 29, 33) are reverse signals.
Note 2: Switching pt and "V/F constant" cannot be done while running. Stop the motor before changing.
6
vl and f170, vlv and f171, vb and f172, thr and f173 can be switched while
running.
Note 3: Integral value of motor electronic thermal is kept, after the motor switching.

■ Example of setting a terminal for switching : Sink logic

F (F: Forward run) Forward run command

CC
S1(AD2) 2nd acceleration/deceleration switch

S2(VF2) 2nd V/F setting switch

R(OCS2) 2nd stall prevention operation switch

F-11
E6581697

6.5 V/f 5-point setting


f190 : V/f5-point setting VF1 frequency f196 : V/f 5-point setting VF4 frequency
f191 : V/f 5-point setting VF1 voltage f197 : V/f 5-point setting VF4 voltage
f192 : V/f 5-point setting VF2 frequency f198 : V/f 5-point setting VF5 frequency
f193 : V/f 5-point setting VF2 voltage f199 : V/f 5-point setting VF5 voltage
f194 : V/f 5-point setting VF3 frequency
f195 : V/f 5-point setting VF3 voltage
⇒ For details, refer to 8) of section 5.12.

6.6 Frequency priority selection

6.6.1 Using a frequency command according to the particular


situation
6
fmod : Frequency setting mode selection 1
f200 : Frequency priority selection
f207 : Frequency setting mode selection 2

• Function
These parameters are used to switch between two types of frequency command signals.
• Setting by parameters
• Switching by frequency
• Switching via terminal board input

F-12
E6581697

■ Parameter setting
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Setting dial 1(save even if
power is off)
1: Terminal board VIA
fmod Frequency setting mode selection 1 2: Terminal board VIB 0
3: Setting dial 2(press in center to
save)
4: RS485 communication
5: UP/DOWN from external logic
input
6: CANopen communication
f207 Frequency setting mode selection 2 7: Communication option 1
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
0: fmod(Switchable to f207
by the input terminal)
f200 Frequency priority selection 1: fmod (f207 for output 0
frequencies equal to or lower
than 1.0 Hz)

1) External switching (Input terminal function 104/105 : FCHG)


Frequency priority selection parameter f200 = 0 6
Switching between the command specified with fmod and f207 can be made by entering a command
from a terminal board.
To do so, however, the frequency command forced switching function (input terminal function selection: 104)
needs to be set beforehand to an input terminal board.
If an OFF command is entered to the input terminal board: The command specified with fmod will be
selected.
If an ON command is entered to the input terminal board: The command specified with f207 will be
selected.

Note) Input terminal function 105 is inverse.

2) Automatic switching by frequency command


Frequency priority selection parameter f200 = 1
The switching between the command specified with fmod and f207 is done automatically according to
the frequency command entered.
If the frequency set with fmod is above 1Hz: The command specified with fmod will be selected.
If the frequency set with fmod is 1Hz or less: The command specified with f207 will be selected.

, Refer to the figure of “Example of run and frequency command switching” in section 5.6

F-13
E6581697

6.6.2 Setting frequency command characteristics



f107 : Analog input terminal selection(VIB)
f109 : Analog/logic input selection (VIA/VIB)
f201 : VIA input point 1 setting
f202 : VIA Input point 1 frequency
f203 : VIA Input point 2 setting
f204 : VIA Input point 2 frequency
f209 : Analog input filter
f210 : VIB input point 1 setting
f211 : VIB input point 1 frequency
f212 : VIB input point 2 setting
f213 : VIB input point 2 frequency
f216 : VIC input point 1 setting
6 f217 : VIC input point 1 frequency
f218 : VIC input point 2 setting
f219 : VIC input point 2 frequency
f810 : Communication command point selection
f811 : Communication command point 1 setting
f812 : Communication command point 1 frequency
f813 : Communication command point 2 setting
f814 : Communication command point 2 frequency

• Function
Output frequency is adjusted in relation to frequency command according to external analog signals.
VIA and VIB terminals are set to analog input.
f209 analog input filter is effective for eliminating noise from frequency setting circuit. Increase if
operation cannot be done because noise effects stability.

, To fine adjust the frequency command characteristics for analog input, use the parameters f470 to
f475. (Refer to section 6.6.4)

F-14
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Analog input terminal 0: 0-+10V
f107 0
selection (VIB) 1: -10-+10V
Analog/logic input 0: Analog input for communications
selection (VIA/VIB) VIB - analog input
1: VIA - analog input
VIB - contact input (Sink)
2: VIA - analog input
f109 0
VIB - contact input (Source)
3: VIA - contact input (Sink)
VIB - contact input (Sink)
4: VIA - contact input (Source)
VIB - contact input (Source)
f201 VIA input point 1 setting 0-100 (%) 0
f202 VIA input point 1 frequency 0.0-500.0 (Hz) 0.0
f203 VIA input point 2 setting 0-100 (%) 100
f204 VIA input point 2 frequency 0.0-500.0 (Hz) *1
f209 Analog input filter 2-1000 (ms) 64
f210 VIB input point 1 setting -100-+100 (%) 0
f211 VIB input point 1 frequency
f212 VIB input point 2 setting
0.0-500.0 (Hz)
-100-+100 (%)
0.0
100
6
f213 VIB input point 2 frequency 0.0-500.0 (Hz) *1
f216 VIC input point 1 setting 0-100 (%) 0
f217 VIC input point 1 frequency 0.0-500.0 (Hz) 0
f218 VIC input point 2 setting 0-100 (%) 100
f219 VIC input point 2 frequency 0.0-500.0 (Hz) *1
Communication command 0: Disabled
f810 0
point selection 1: Enabled
Communication command
f811 0-100 (%) 0
point 1 setting
Communication command
f812 0.0-fh (Hz) 0
point 1 frequency
Communication command
f813 0-100 (%) 100
point 2 setting
Communication command
f814 0.0-fh (Hz) *1
point 2 frequency
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
Note 1: Do not set point 1 and 2 to the same value. If they are set to the same value, err1 is displayed.

F-15
E6581697

1) 0-10Vdc voltage input adjustment (VIA, VIB terminals)

/ x Point settings adjust the


50/60 (Hz) frequency command for the
voltage input.
x Gradient and bias can be set
easily.

/ =
0 ( Hz)
=
/
/
0 (%)
0 100 (%)
10V voltage signal
Frequency commnd

2) 4-20mAdc current input adjustment (VIC terminal)


 x Point settings adjust the frequency
50/60 (Hz) command for the current input.
x Ramp and bias can be easily set.
x With a current input of 0 to 20 mA,

6
set  to .


0 ( Hz)


20 (%) 
4mA 100 (%)
20mA current signal
Frequency commnd

3) -10-+10 Vdc voltage input adjustment (VIB terminal)


Forward run
x Point settings adjust the
f213 frequency command for
the voltage input.
x Ramp and bias can be
easily set.





=
=



Reverse run

F-16
E6581697

6.6.3 Setting of frequency with the input from an external logic


 : External logic input - UP response time
 : External logic input - UP frequency steps
 : External logic input - DOWN response time
 : External logic input - DOWN frequency steps
 : Initial value of UP/DOWN frequency
 : Change of the initial value of UP/DOWN frequency

• Function
These parameters are used to set an output frequency by means of a signal from an external device.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
External logic input - UP response
f264 0.0 - 10.0 (s) 0.1

f265
time
External logic input - UP frequency
0.0 - fh (Hz) 0.1
6
steps
External logic input - DOWN response
f266 0.0 - 10.0 (s) 0.1
time
External logic input - DOWN frequency
f267 0.0 - fh (Hz) 0.1
steps
f268 Initial value of UP/DOWN frequency  -  (Hz) 0.0
0: Not changed
Change of the initial value of
f269 1: Setting of  changed 1
UP/DOWN frequency
when power is turned off

, This function is valid when the parameter fmod (Frequency setting mode selection 1) = 5 is set.

■ Input terminal settings


Assign the following functions to the input terminal, you can change (up/down) or clear the output frequency
by using the terminal's ON/OFF.
Input terminal function ON OFF
88 Frequency UP Frequency setting increase Clear
90 Frequency DOWN Frequency setting decrease Clear
OFF ¤ ON: External logic up/down
92 Clear frequency UP/DOWN f268 settings
frequency clear settings
Each of the following numbers (89, 91, 93) are reverse signals.

F-17
E6581697

■ Adjustment with continuous signals (Operation example 1)


Set parameters as follows to adjust the output frequency up or down in proportion to the frequency
adjustment signal input time:
Panel frequency incremental gradient = f265/f264 setting time
Panel frequency decremental gradient = f267/f266 setting time
Set parameters as follows to adjust the output frequency up or down almost in synchronization with the
adjustment by the panel frequency command:
f264 = f266 = 1
(fh/acc) ≥ (f265/f264 setting time)
(fh/dec) ≥ (f267/f266 setting time)

<<Sample sequence diagram 1: Adjustment with continuous signals>>

Forward / reverse command

UP signal

DOWN signal

Set frequency clearing signal

6 Upper limit frequency


Gradient f267/f266
Gradient f265/f264

Lower limit frequency

Frequency 0 Hz
The dotted line denotes the output frequency obtained by combining the slowdown speed and the
panel frequency adjustment speed.

Note: If the operation frequency is set to the lower limit frequency, it will increase from 0Hz when power is
turned on for the first time after the setting, and therefore the output frequency will not rise until the
operation frequency reaches the lower limit frequency. (Operation at the lower limit frequency)
In this case, the time required for the operation frequency to reach the lower limit frequency can be
shortened by setting fc to the lower limit frequency.

■ Adjustment with pulse signals (Operation example 2)


Set parameters as follows to adjust the frequency in steps of one pulse:
f264, f266 ≤ Pulse On time
f265, f267 = Frequency obtained with each pulse
* The inverter does not respond to any pulses with an ON time shorter than that set with f264 or
f266. 12ms or more of clearing signal is allowed.

F-18
E6581697

<<Sample sequence diagram 2: Adjustment with pulse signals>>

Forward / reverse
command

UP signal

DOWN signal

Set frequency
clearing signal
Upper limit frequency

Command frequency(Hz)

(The dotted lines represent


effective output frequencies)

OHz

■ If two signals are impressed simultaneously


• If a clear single and an up or down signal are impressed simultaneously, priority will be given to the
clear signal.
6
• If up and down signals are impressed simultaneously, The frequency will change at the specified up
or down rate.

■ About the setting of the initial up/down frequency


To adjust the frequency starting at a specified frequency other than 0.0 Hz (default initial frequency)
after turning on the inverter, specify the desired frequency using f268 (initial up/down frequency).

■ About the change of the initial up/down frequency


To make the inverter automatically save the frequency immediately before it is turned off and start
operation at that frequency next time power is turned on, set f269 (change of initial up/down
frequency) to 1 (which changes the setting of f268 when power is turned off).
Keep in mind that the setting of f268 is changed each time power is turned off.

■ Frequency adjustment range


The frequency can be set from 0.0Hz to fh (Maximum frequency). The lower-limit frequency will be
set as soon as the set frequency clearing function (function number 92, 93) is entered from the input
terminal.

■ Minimum unit of frequency adjustment


If f702 (Frequency free unit magnification) is set to 1.00, the output frequency can be adjusted in
steps of 0.01Hz.

F-19
E6581697

6.6.4 Fine adjustment of frequency setting signal


f470 : VIA input bias f473 : VIB input gain
f471 : VIA input gain f474 : VIC input bias
f472 : VIB input bias f475 : VIC input gain

• Function
These parameters are used to fine adjust the relation between the frequency setting signal input
through the analog input terminal VIA, VIB, VIC and the output frequency.
Use these parameters to make fine adjustments after making rough adjustments using the
parameters f201 to f204, f210 to f213, f216 to f219

The figure below shows the characteristic of the frequency setting signal input through the VI terminal and
that of the output frequency.

Large
Output frequency (Hz)


Maximum frequency f473
6 Large
Small f475


Default setting
f472
f474

Small
0
0% 100%
0V 10Vdc
4mA 20mAdc

Frequency setting signal( VI inputinput


(Analog value)
value)

* Bias adjustment of analog input terminal (f470, f472, f474)


To give leeway, the inverter is factory-adjusted by default so that it will not produce an output until a
certain amount of voltage is applied to the analog input terminal. If you want to reduce the leeway, set this
value to a larger value. Note that specifying a too large value may cause an output frequency to be output,
even though the operation frequency is 0 (zero) Hz.

* Gain adjustment of analog input terminal (f471, f473, f475)


The inverter is factory-adjusted by default so that the operation frequency can reach the maximum
frequency, even though the voltage and current to the analog input terminal are below the maximum
levels. If you want to adjust the inverter so that it will output the maximum frequency at the maximum
voltage and current, set this value to a smaller value. Note that specifying a too small value may cause
the operation frequency not to reach the maximum frequency, even though the maximum voltage and
current are applied.

F-20
E6581697

6.6.5 Setting of frequency with the pulse train input


146 : Logic input / pulse train input selection (S2)
378 : Number of pulse train input
679 : Pulse train input filter

• Function
These parameters are used to set an output frequency by means of pulse train input signal of S2
terminal.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Logic input / pulse train input selection 0: Logic input
f146 0
(S2) 1: Pulse train input
f378 Number of pulse train input 100-5000 (pps) 250
f679 Pulse train input filter 2-1000 (ms) 2

, This function is valid when the parameter fmod =11 (Pulse train input) and f146 =1 (Pulse train
input) are set.
6
, Number of pulses per 1Hz is set by parameter f378.
, Example of setting
f378 = 250 (pps) : Input signal = 250 (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 1.0 (Hz)
Input signal = 1k (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 4.0 (Hz)
Input signal = 20k (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 80.0 (Hz)
f378 = 500 (pps) : Input signal = 500 (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 1.0 (Hz)
Input signal = 1k (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 2.0 (Hz)
Input signal = 20k (pps) ⇒ Output frequency = 40.0 (Hz)

Note) Minimum number of pulses to inputting S2 terminal is 10 pps, and Maximum is 20 kpps.

F-21
E6581697

6.7 Operation frequency


6.7.1 Starting frequency
f240 : Starting frequency setting

• Function
The frequency set with  is put out as soon as operation is started.
Use the  parameter when a delay in response of starting torque according to the
acceleration/deceleration time is probably affecting operation. Setting the starting frequency to a
value from 0.5 to 3.0Hz is recommended. The occurrence of an overcurrent can be suppressed by
setting this frequency below the rated slippage of the motor.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f240 Starting frequency setting 0.1-10.0 (Hz) 0.5

Output frequency (Hz)

6 Starting frequency 


Time
0
ON
Operation signal (F-CC)
OFF

F-22
E6581697

6.7.2 Run/stop control with frequency setting signals


f241 : Operation starting frequency
f242 : Operation starting frequency hysteresis

• Function
The Run/stop of operation can be controlled simply with frequency setting signals.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f241 Operation starting frequency 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f242 Operation starting frequency hysteresis 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0

Output frequency [Hz]

 When the frequency command signal


reaches the B point, the inverter
operates.
 +  When decelerating, operation stops
when the frequency setting signal is less
than point A.

 - 

0 A B 100% Frequency command value 6

F-23
E6581697

6.8 DC braking

6.8.1 DC braking
f249 : PWM carrier frequency during DC braking
f250 : DC braking starting frequency
f251 : DC braking current
f252 : DC braking time

• Function
A large braking torque can be obtained by applying a direct current to the motor. These parameters
set the direct current to be applied to the motor, the application time and the starting frequency.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f249 PWM carrier frequency during DC braking 2.0-16.0 (kHz) 4.0
f250 DC braking starting frequency 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
6 f251
f252
DC braking current
DC braking time
0.0-100 (%) / (A)
0.0- 25.5 (s)
50
1.0
Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency

DC braking

DC braking starting frequency



0
Time [s]
Output current [A]

DC braking current

0

DC braking time 

Operation signal (F-CC) ON


OFF

Note1: During DC braking, the overload protection sensitivity of the inverter increases. The DC braking
current may be adjusted automatically to prevent tripping.
Note 2: During DC braking, the carrier frequency becomes the setting of parameter f249 (PWM carrier
frequency during DC braking).
Note 3: DC breaking can be done by using terminal input. Input terminal 22: Assign DC braking command
(23 is reverse). DC braking is applied while the terminal is ON, regardless of the f250, f252
settings. Even if the terminal is OFF, DC braking is applied only for the f252 time.
The amount of DC braking depends on the f251 settings.

F-24
E6581697

6.8.2 Motor shaft fixing control


f254 : Motor shaft fixing control

• Function
This function is used to prevent the motor from running unexpectedly because its shaft is not restrained
or to preheat the motor.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f254 Motor shaft fixing control 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0

If the motor shaft fixing control f254 is set to 1, half the braking force set with f251 (DC braking rate)
will be applied to the motor to continue DC braking even after the completion of ordinary DC braking. To stop
motor shaft fixing control, turn off the standby command (ST signal).

Output frequency [Hz] LED display


 “” is displayed.
Set frequency “” is displayed.

DC injection braking start frequency 


6
0
Time [s]
Output current [A]


0 2

Operation signal (F-CC) ON


OFF

Operation standby signal (ST-CC) ON


OFF

Note1: About the same motor shaft fixing control can be exercised by entering a DC braking command from external
contacts.
Note2: If a power failure occurs during motor shaft fixing control and the motor starts to coast, motor shaft
fixing control will be canceled.
Also, if the inverter trips during motor shaft fixing control and is restored to working order by the retry
function, motor shaft fixing control will be canceled.
Note 3: During shaft fixing control, the carrier frequency is the setting of parameter f249.

F-25
E6581697

6.9 Time limit for lower-limit frequency operation

6.9.1 Time limit for lower-limit frequency operation


f256 : Time limit for lower-limit frequency operation
f391 : Hysteresis for lower-limit frequency operation

• Function
If operation is carried out continuously at a frequency below the lower-limit frequency () for the period
of time set with , the inverter will automatically deceleration the motor to a stop. At that time,
“” is displayed (alternately) on the operation panel.
This function will be canceled if a frequency command above the lower-limit frequency (ll) +f391
(Hz).

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Time limit for lower-limit frequency 0.0: Disabled
f256 0.0
6 f391
operation
Hysteresis for lower-limit frequency
0.1 - 600.0 (s)
0.0-ul (Hz) 0.2
operation

Output frequency [Hz]

+


Time [s]

  

ON
Foward / reverse OFF

Note: This function is valid when doing forward/reverse switching.


When starting operation, does not operate until operation frequency reaches LL.

F-26
E6581697

6.10 Jog run mode


f260 : Jog run frequency
f261 : Jog run stopping pattern
f262 : Panel jog run mode

• Function
Use the jog run parameters to operate the motor in jog mode. Input of a jog run signal generates a jog
run frequency output at once, irrespective of the designated acceleration time.
Also, you can choose an operation panel start/stop mode between the ordinary start/stop mode and the
jog run start/stop mode.

The jog run function needs to be assigned to an input terminal. When assigning it to the RES terminal, set
f113 to 18.
The motor can be operated in jog mode while the jog run setting terminals are connected (RES-CC ON).

[Parameter setting]
Title
f260
Function
Jog run frequency
Adjustment range
f240-20.0 (Hz)
Default setting
5.0
6
0: Deceleration stop
Jog run stopping
f261 1: Coast stop 0
pattern
2: DC braking
0: Invalid
f262 Panel jug run mode 0
1: Valid

[Setting of jog run setting terminal (RES-CC)]


Assign control terminal RES as the jog run setting terminal.
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
18
f113 Input terminal selection (RES) 0-203
(Jog run mode)
Note 1: During the jog run mode, there is LOW (low speed detection signal) output but no RCH (designated
frequency reach signal) output, and PID control does not work.
Note 2: When the operation panel only is used for operation in jog run mode, the jog run function does not need to
be assigned to any input terminal.

<Examples of jog run>


RES-CC (JOG) ON + F-CC ON: Forward jog run

RES-CC (JOG) ON + R-CC ON: Reverse jog run

( Normal operation frequency signal input + F-CC ON: Forward run


Normal operation frequency signal input + R-CC ON: Reverse run )

F-27
E6581697

Set frequency
Forward
Forward Forward
Reverse
0

ST-CC
F-CC

R-CC

RES-
(=18)
Normal operation frequency
setting signal input

• The jog run setting terminal (RES-CC) is enabled when the operation frequency is below the jog run
frequency.
This connection does not function at an operation frequency exceeding the jog run frequency.
• The motor can be operated in jog mode while the jog run setting terminals are connnected (RES-CC).
• Jog run has priority, even when a new operation command is given during operation.
• Even for f261 = 0 or 1, an emergency DC braking becomes enabled when setting f603 = 2.

6 • No limits are imposed to the jog run frequency by the upper-limit frequency (parameter ul).

■ Panel jog mode (if f262 is set to 1)


• When the inverter is in panel jog mode, turning the setting dial right displays fjog, turning
the setting dial left displays rjog.
• When fjog is displayed, the inverter will be placed in forward jog run mode as long as the
key is held down.
• When rjog is displayed, the inverter will be placed in reverse jog run mode as long as the
key is held down.
• During jog run, the direction of rotation can be changed using the setting dial
• If you press and hold down the key for 20 seconds or more, the key failure alarm “e-17” will
be displayed.

Here is the sequence in which modes change each time you press the MODE key.

Standard monitor
mode MODE
MODE

Status monitor Setting monitor


mode mode

MODE Panel jog mode MODE

Note: When the inverter is in operation (RUN lamp is blinking) or when an operation command is issued
(RUN lamp is lighting), the inverter cannot be switched to panel jog mode.

F-28
E6581697

6.11 Jump frequency - avoiding resonant frequencies


f270 : Jump frequency 1
f271 : Jumping width 1
f272 : Jump frequency 2
f273 : Jumping width 2
f274 : Jump frequency 3
f275 : Jumping width 3

• Function
Resonance due to the natural frequency of the mechanical system can be avoided by jumping the
resonant frequency during operation. During jumping, hysteresis characteristics with respect to the jump
frequency are given to the motor.

Output command frequency

6
(Hz)

Jump frequency 3 () Jumping width 3 ()

Jump frequency 2 () Jumping width 2 ()

Jump frequency 1 () Jumping width 1 ()

0
Frequency setting signal

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f270 Jump frequency 1 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f271 Jumping width 1 0.0-30.0 (Hz) 0.0
f272 Jump frequency 2 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f273 Jumping width 2 0.0-30.0 (Hz) 0.0
f274 Jump frequency 3 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f275 Jumping width 3 0.0-30.0 (Hz) 0.0
Note 1: Do not set the jump parameters, if multiple jump frequency setting width overlap.
Note 2: During acceleration or deceleration, the jumping function is disabled for the operation frequency.

F-29
E6581697

6.12 Preset-speed frequencies


f287 to f294 : Preset-speed frequency 8 to 15

Refer to section 3.6 for details.

6.13 Bumpless operation


f295 : Bumpless operation selection
f732 : Local/remote key prohibition of remote keypad

• Function
When switching from Remote mode to Local mode, the status of start and stop, and operating
frequency at Remote mode are moved to Local mode.
By contraries, when switching from Local mode to Remote mode, they are not moved to Remote
mode.

6 [Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
f295 Bumpless operation selection 1
1: Enabled
Local/remote key prohibition of remote 0: Permitted
f732 1
keypad 1: Prohibited

, EASY key is assigned to Local/remote function.


Set parameter f750 (EASY key function selection) = 2 (Local / remote key).
EASY lamp is lighting, during selecting local mode.
, LOC/REM key of remote keypad option (RKP007Z) can be used.
In case, set parameter f732 (Local/remote key prohibition of remote keypad) = 0 (Permitted).

F-30
E6581697

Operation example : Remote mode ( cmod=0 : (Terminal board))

Remote mode Local mode

ON
EASY Key OFF
Setting frequency and start/stop
status are moved to Local mode
Output
frequency when switching from Remote
mode to Local mode.
F-CC ON Motor runs continuously like an
OFF example.
Internal ON
operation OFF
command

ON
Local mode Remote mode
6
EASY Key OFF
When switching from Local
Output Set frequency at mode to Remote mode, setting
frequency Remote mode frequency and start/stop status
are determined by Remote
F-CC ON
OFF mode status.
The example shows the motor
Internal ON
operation OFF runs continuously because the
command Remote mode is “run” status.

, To prevent from moving the setting frequency and start/stop status of Remote mode to Local
mode, the  is set to “”(Disabled). In this case, EASY key is effective only while stopping.

F-31
E6581697

6.14 PWM carrier frequency


f300 : PWM carrier frequency
f312 : Random mode
f316 : Carrier frequency control mode selection

• Function
1) The  parameter allows the tone of the magnetic noise from the motor to be changed by
switching the PWM carrier frequency. This parameter is also effective in preventing the motor from
resonating with its load machine or its fan cover.
2) In addition, the  parameter reduces the electromagnetic noise generated by the inverter.
Reduce the carrier frequency to reduce electromagnetic noise. Note: Although the electromagnetic
noise level is reduced, the acoustic noise of the motor is increased.
3) The random mode improves hearing impression by changing the pattern of the low carrier frequency.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

6 f300 PWM carrier frequency 2.0-16.0 (kHz)


0: Disabled
4.0

1: Random mode 1
f312 Random mode 2: Random mode 2 0
3: Random mode 3
0: Carrier frequency without reduction
1: Carrier frequency with automatic
reduction
Carrier frequency control mode 2: Carrier frequency not reduced
f316 automatically 1
selection
Support for 500V models
3: Carrier frequency reduced automatically
Support for 500V models
Note 1: Some models need reduced current ratings, depending on the PWM carrier frequency f300 settings
and ambient temperature. Refer to the table on the following pages.
Note 2: When the PWM carrier frequency is set high, selecting “Carrier frequency not reduced automatically”
causes the inverter to be tripped more easily than selecting “Carrier frequency reduced automatically.”

F-32
E6581697

■ De-rating of rated current.

[Single phase 240V class]


, Regardless of parameter aul (Overload characteristic selection) setting, the de-rating of rated currents are
as following values.
Ambient PWM carrier frequency
VFMB1S- temperature 2.0k - 4.0 kHz 4.1k - 12.0 kHz 12.1k - 16.0 kHz
40°C or less 1.5 A 1.5 A 1.5 A
2002PL 40 ∼ 50°C 1.5 A 1.4 A 1.3 A
50 ∼ 60°C 1.2 A 1.1 A 1.0 A
40°C or less 3.3 A 3.3 A 3.3 A
2004PL 40 ∼ 50°C 3.3 A 3.0 A 2.8 A
50 ∼ 60°C 2.6 A 2.3 A 2.2 A
40°C or less 4.8 A 4.8 A 4.8 A
2007PL 40 ∼ 50°C 4.8 A 4.3 A 4.1 A
50 ∼ 60°C 3.8 A 3.4 A 3.1 A
40°C or less 8.0 A 8.0 A 8.0 A
2015PL 40 ∼ 50°C 8.0 A 7.2 A 6.8 A
50 ∼ 60°C 6.4 A 5.6 A 5.2 A
40°C or less 11.0 A 11.0 A 11.0 A
2022PL 40 ∼ 50°C 11.0 A 9.9 A 9.4 A
50 ∼ 60°C 8.8 A 7.7 A 7.2 A
6
[Three phase 500 V class] (VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL)
, Regardless of parameter aul (Overload characteristic selection) setting, the de-rating of rated currents are
as following values.
Ambient PWM carrier frequency
VFMB1- temperature 2.0k - 4.0 kHz 4.1k - 12.0 kHz 12.1k - 16.0 kHz
40°C or less 1.5 A 1.5 A 1.2 A
4004PL 40 ∼ 50°C 1.5 A 1.4 A 1.1 A
50 ∼ 60°C 1.2 A 1.1 A 0.8 A
40°C or less 2.3 A 2.3 A 1.8 A
4007PL 40 ∼ 50°C 2.3 A 2.1 A 1.6 A
50 ∼ 60°C 1.8 A 1.6 A 1.2 A
40°C or less 4.1 A 4.1 A 3.3 A
4015PL 40 ∼ 50°C 4.1 A 3.7 A 2.9 A
50 ∼ 60°C 3.3 A 2.9 A 2.1 A
40°C or less 5.5 A 5.5 A 4.4 A
4022PL 40 ∼ 50°C 5.5 A 5.0 A 3.9 A
50 ∼ 60°C 4.4 A 3.9 A 2.8 A
40°C or less 9.5 A 9.5 A 7.6 A
4037PL 40 ∼ 50°C 9.5 A 8.6 A 6.7 A
50 ∼ 60°C 7.6 A 6.7 A 4.8 A

F-33
E6581697

[Three phase 500 V class] (VFMB1-4055 to 4150PL)


, In case of parameter aul (Overload characteristic selection) = 1 (Constant torque characteristic) setting
Ambient PWM carrier frequency
VFMB1- temperature 2.0k - 4.0 kHz 4.1k - 12.0 kHz 12.1k - 16.0 kHz

4055PL 50°C or less 14.3 A 13.0 A 11.5 A


50 ∼ 60°C 11.4 A 11.4 A 9.2 A
50°C or less 17.0 A 17.0 A 14.0 A
4075PL
50 ∼ 60°C 13.6 A 13.6 A 10.9 A
50°C or less 27.7 A 25.0 A 20.0 A
4110PL
50 ∼ 60°C 22.2 A 19.4 A 15.2 A
50°C or less 33.0 A 30.0 A 26.0 A
4150L
50 ∼ 60°C 26.4 A 23.0 A 18.0 A

, In case of parameter aul (Overload characteristic selection) = 2 (Variable torque characteristic) setting
Ambient PWM carrier frequency
VFMB1- temperature 2.0k - 4.0 kHz 4.1k - 12.0 kHz 12.1k - 16.0 kHz
40°C or less 17.0 A 13.0 A 11.5 A
4055PL 40 ∼ 50°C 15.3 A 13.0 A 11.5 A
50 ∼ 60°C 13.6 A 11.4 A 9.2 A
40°C or less 23.0 A 17.0 A 14.0 A
4075PL 40 ∼ 50°C 20.7 A 17.0 A 14.0 A
6 50 ∼ 60°C
40°C or less
18.4 A
33.0 A
13.6 A
25.0 A
10.9 A
20.0 A
4110PL 40 ∼ 50°C 29.7 A 25.0 A 20.0 A
50 ∼ 60°C 26.4 A 19.4 A 15.2 A
40°C or less 40.0 A 30.0 A 26.0 A
4150PL 40 ∼ 50°C 36.0 A 30.0 A 26.0 A
50 ∼ 60°C 36.0 A 23.0 A 18.0 A

* If ambient temperature exceeds 40°C (or 50°C), reduce current according to table above.
* The table above is the value when the inverter is installed in general described in section 1.4.4.
In case of the other Installation, refer to added instruction manual “Explanation of load reduction”.
* If parameter f316=0 or 2, and current is increased to the automatic reduction level, the ol alarm occurs,
if current is increased further ol3 trips.
In this case, to avoid such trips, reduce the stall prevention level (f601) properly.
* Random mode is exercised when the motor is operated in a low-frequency range where it produces annoying
acoustic noise.
As the three kinds of timbre mode (f312=1, 2, 3) are prepared, the proper mode can be selected to fit the
load condition.
If the carrier frequency (f300) is set above 8.0 kHz, the random mode function will not be performed,
because the level of motor magnetic noise is low at high carrier frequencies.
* If parameter f316 (Carrier frequency control mode selection) = 2 or 3, set parameter f300 (PWM
carrier frequency) below 4.0kHz. Output voltage may reduce.
* PWM carrier frequency is increased at high output frequency area to be stable the operation, even if f300
is set to low PWM carrier frequency.
* In case of =2 setting, be sure to install the input AC reactor (ACL) between power supply and inverter.

F-34
E6581697

6.15 Trip-less intensification

6.15.1 Auto-restart (Restart of coasting motor)


f301 : Auto-restart control selection

Caution
• Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment
If the motor stops due to a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly when power is
restored.
Mandatory This could result in unexpected injury.
action • Attach warnings about sudden restart after a momentary power failure on inverters, motors and
equipment for prevention of accidents in advance.

• Function
The f301 parameter detects the rotating speed and rotational direction of the motor during
coasting at the event of momentary power failure, and then after power has been restored, restarts
the motor smoothly (motor speed search function). This parameter also allows commercial power
operation to be switched to inverter operation without stopping the motor.
During operation, "rtry" is displayed. 6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
1: At auto-restart after momentary stop
Auto-restart control
f301 2: At ST terminal off and on 0
selection
3: 1 + 2
4: At start-up
* If the motor is restarted in retry mode, this function will operate, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

1) Auto-restart after momentary power failure (Auto-restart function)


Input voltage

Motor speed

ON
Forward / reverse OFF

+ Setting f301 to 1 or 3: This function operates after power has been restored following detection of an
undervoltage by the main circuits and control power.

F-35
E6581697

2) Restarting motor during coasting (Motor speed search function)


Motor speed

ON
Forward / reverse
OFF

ON
ST-CC OFF

+ Setting f301 to 2or 3: This function operates after the ST-CC terminal connection has been opened
first and then connected again.
Note: The terminal function ST needs to be assigned to an input terminal, using the parameters  to
.

3) Motor speed search at starting


When f301 is set to 4, a motor speed search is performed each time operation is started.
This function is useful especially when the motor is not operated by the inverter but it is running because of
external force.

6 Warning!!
• At restart, it takes about 1 second for the inverter to check to see the number of revolutions of the
motor.
For this reason, the start-up takes more time than usual.
• Use this function when operating a system with one motor connected to one inverter.
This function may not operate properly in a system configuration with multiple motors connected to
one inverter.
• In case of using this function, do not set the output phase failure detection selection (f605).

Application to a crane or hoist


The crane or hoist may have its load moved downward during the above waiting time
from input of the operation starting command to the restart of the motor. To apply the
inverter to such machines, therefore, set the auto-restart control mode selection
parameter to "=" (Disabled), Do not use the retry function, either.

F-36
E6581697

6.15.2 Regenerative power ride-through control/Deceleration stop


during power failure/Synchronized acceleration/deceleration
f302 : Regenerative power ride-through control
f317 : Synchronized deceleration time
f318 : Synchronized acceleration time

• Function
1) Regenerative power ride-through control: When momentary power failure occurs during operation, this
function makes operation continue using the regeneration
energy from a motor.
2) Deceleration stop during power failure: When momentary power failure occurs during operation, this
function stops the motor quickly compulsorily. A forcible stop is
carried out using the regeneration energy from the motor.
(Deceleration time varies with control.) When operation is
stopped, the message “” is displayed (alternately) on the
operation panel.
After the forced stop, the inverter remains static until you put off
the operation command momentarily.
3) Synchronized acceleration/deceleration: When the inverter is used with textile machines, this function
stops more than one textile machine simultaneously in the event
of a momentary power failure and it prevents the breakage of 6
yarns around bobbins at the recovery from the power failure

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
1: Regenerative power ride-through control
2: Deceleration stop during power failure
Regenerative power ride-through
f302 3: Synchronized acceleration / deceleration 0
control (Deceleration stop)
(signal)
4: Synchronized acceleration / deceleration
(signal + failure)
Synchronized deceleration time
f317 (time elapsed between start of 0.0-3600 (360.0) (s) 2.0
deceleration to stop)
Synchronized acceleration time
(time elapsed between start of
f318 0.0-3600 (360.0) (s) 2.0
acceleration to achievement of
specified speed)
Note 1: The deceleration time and the acceleration time when f302=3 or 4 depend on the setting of f317
and that of f318, respectively.
Note 2: Even if these functions are used, a motor may coast according to load conditions.
In this case, use the auto-restart function (f301) along with this parameter function.
Note 3: Jog run function doesn't operate at synchronized acceleration/deceleration.

F-37
E6581697

■ An example of setting when f302=1


[When power is interrupted]

Input voltage
+The time for which the operation of the motor
can be continued depends on the machine
inertia and load conditions. Before using this
function, therefore, perform verification tests.
Internal DC +Use with the retry function allows the motor to
voltage level be restarted automatically without being
brought to an abnormal stop.

Regenerative power
ride-through control selection

Motor speed Coasting stop

6 About 100ms~10s
Note 4: If power is interrupted during deceleration stop, power ride-through
control will not be performed.

[If momentary power failure occurs]

Input voltage

Internal DC
voltage level

Motor speed
Normal acceleration

Note 5: If power is interrupted during deceleration stop, power ride-


through control will not be performed.

F-38
E6581697

■ An example of setting when f302=2

Input voltage

Motor speed

Time
Deceleration stop

• Even after the recovery from an input power failure, the motor continues deceleration stop. If the voltage in the
inverter main circuit falls below a certain level, however, control will be stopped and the motor will coast.
• If the voltage in main circuit moff at Non-stop control during power failure, the motor will coast and inverter
display is shown "stop⇔0.0 (displayed alternately)". And then, If recovery from the input power failure, the
motor continues coasting.

■ An example of setting when f302=3 (when the function of receiving power failure synchronized signal is
assigned to the input terminal S1)
f114 (Input terminal function selection 4A (S1)) =62 (Power failure synchronized signal)

Power failure
synchronized
ON
6
signal Inverter 1
(S1 terminal)

Motor speed


Time
Inverter 2 

• If the parameters f317, f318 are set for same acceleration and deceleration time and if power failure
synchronized signal set using the input terminal functions (62, 63) are used, multiple motors can be stopped at
about the same time or speed commands can be issued to them at about the same time.
• If a power failure synchronized signal is impressed, the synchronized deceleration function decreases the output
frequency to 0Hz to decelerate the motor linearly within the time specified with f317. (The S-pattern operation
function or the braking sequence cannot be used along with this function.)
When the motor comes to a full stop, the message “stop” appears on the display panel.
• If the power failure synchronized signal is canceled during synchronized deceleration, the synchronized
acceleration function increases the output frequency to the frequency at the start of synchronized deceleration or to
the command frequency, whichever is lower, to accelerate the motor linearly within the time specified with f318.
(The S-pattern operation function, the braking sequence or the auto-tuning function cannot be used along with this
function.)
When acceleration is started, the message “stop” on the display panel disappears.
• If a forward/reverse switching command or a stop command is issued during synchronized acceleration or
deceleration, synchronized acceleration or deceleration will be canceled.

F-39
E6581697

• When the motor is started again after the synchronized deceleration function stop, turn off the power failure
synchronized signal.
• In case of using the synchronized deceleration function, confirm not to work overvoltage stall prevention function
during deceleration.

■ An example of setting when f302=4


Synchronized deceleration if a power failure synchronized signal is impressed or if a power failure occurs, or
synchronized acceleration if the power failure synchronized signal is canceled.
*1
ON
Input voltage
OFF
Power failure
Synchronized ON
synchronized
acceleration/dece
signal
leration signal
(S1 terminal) Inverter 1

Motor speed

 
Time

6 Inverter 2  

F-40
E6581697

6.15.3 Retry function


f303 : Retry selection (number of times)

Caution
• Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.
The motor may suddenly restart, which could result in injury.
Mandatory • Take measures for safety, e.g. attach a cover to the motor, to prevent accidents if the motor suddenly
action restarts.

• Function
This parameter resets the inverter automatically when the inverter gives an alarm. During the retry
mode, the motor speed search function operated automatically as required and thus allows smooth
motor restarting.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f303 Retry selection (number of times) 0: Disabled, 1-10 (Times) 0

The likely causes of tripping and the corresponding retry processes are listed below.
Cause of tripping Retry process Canceling conditions
6
Momentary power Up to 10 times in succession The retry function will be canceled at once if
failure 1st retry: About 1 sec after tripping tripping is caused by an unusual event other
Overcurrent 2nd retry: About 2 sec after tripping than: momentary power failure, overcurrent,
Overvoltage 3rd retry: About 3 sec after tripping overvoltage or overload.
Overload This function will also be canceled if retrying

Overheating 10th retry: About 10 sec after tripping is not successful within the specified number
of times.
+ Retry is only done when the following trips occur.
oc1, oc2, oc3, op1, op2, op3, ol1, ol2, ol3, oh, sout
+ Protective operation detection relay signals (FLA, FLB, FLC terminal signals) are not sent during use of
the retry function. (Default setting)
+ To allow a signal to be sent to the protective action detection relay (FLA, B and C terminals) even during
the retry process, assign function numbers 146 or 147 to f132.
+ A virtual cooling time is provided for overload tripping (ol1,ol2).
In this case, the retry function operates after the virtual cooling time and retry time.
+ In the event of tripping caused by an overvoltage ( to ), the retry function will not be activated
until the voltage in the DC section comes down to a normal level.
+ In the event of tripping caused by overheating (), the retry function will not be activated until the
temperature in the inverter comes down low enough for it to restart operation.
+ During retrying, the blinking display will alternate between rtry and the monitor display specified by
status monitor display mode selection parameter f710.
+ The number of retries will be cleared if the inverter is not tripped for the specified period of time after a
successful retry.
"A successful retry" means that the inverter output frequency reaches the command frequency without
causing the inverter to re-trip.

F-41
E6581697

6.15.4 Dynamic (regenerative) braking - For abrupt motor stop


f304 : Dynamic braking selection

f308 : Dynamic braking resistance

f309 : Allowable continuous braking resistance

f626 : Over-voltage stall protection level

• Function
The inverter does not contain a braking resistor. Connect an external braking resistor in the following
cases to enable dynamic braking function:
1) when decelerating the motor abruptly or if overvoltage tripping (op) occurs during deceleration
stop
2) when a continuous regenerative status occurs during downward movement of a lift or the winding-
out operation of a tension control machine
3) when the load fluctuates and a continuous regenerative status results even during constant speed
operation of a machine such as a press
6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, Resistor overload
protection enabled
2: Enabled
f304 Dynamic braking selection 0
3: Enabled, Resistor overload
protection enabled
(At ST terminal on)
4: Enabled (At ST terminal on)
f308 Dynamic braking resistance 1.0-1000 (Ω) Depending on
Allowable continuous braking models
f309 0.01-30.00 (kW) (See Section 11.4)
resistance
Over-voltage stall protection 136 (240V class)
f626 100-150 (%)
level 141 (500V class)
+ Assigning the braking resistor overload pre-alarm (function number : 30,31) to any logic output terminal,
overload status of braking resistor can be output.
Note 1) The operation level of dynamic braking is defined by parameter f626.
Note 2) If parameter f304=1 to 4, the inverter will be set automatically so as to deal with the regenerative
energy from the motor by means of a resistor, without taking any action to limit overvoltage. (The
same function as f305=1)

F-42
E6581697

1) Connecting an external braking resistor (optional)

Separate-optional resistor (with thermal fuse)

Braking resistor (optional)


PBR

MCCB PBe PB
R/L1 U/T1 Motor
Three-phase main circuits
S/L2 V/T2 IM
Power supply
T/L3 W/T3

Inverter

Connecting thermal relays and an external braking resistor

TH-R Braking resistor (optional)

6
PBR

MCCB MC
PBe PB
R/L1 U/T1 Motor
Three-phase main circuits S/L2 V/T2 IM
Power supply
T/L3 W/T3
Step-down
transformer Inverter
2:1 F Forward
MC FLB R Reverse
Fuse Surge
suppressor
FLC CC
TC
Power supply
FLA

Note 1: A TC (Trip coil) is connected, as shown in this figure, when an MCCB with a trip coil is used instead
of an MC. A step-down transformer is needed for every 500V-class inverter, but not for any 240V-
class inverter.
Note 2: As a last resort to prevent fire, be sure to connect a thermal relay (THR). Although the inverter has a
means of preventing overload and overcurrent to protect the braking resistor, the thermal relay is
activated in case the protection function fails to work. Select and connect a thermal relay (THR)
appropriate to the capacity (wattage) of the braking resistor.

F-43
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Setting
f304 Dynamic braking selection 1
f305 Overvoltage limit operation 1
f308 Dynamic braking resistance Proper value
f309 Dynamic braking resistor capacity Proper value
136 (%) (240V class)
f626 Over-voltage stall protection level
141 (%) (500V class)

, To use this inverter in applications that create a continuously regenerative status (such as downward
movement of a lift, a press or a tension control machine), or in applications that require deceleration
stopping of a machine with a significant load inertial moment, increase the dynamic braking resistor
capacity according to the operation rate required.
, To connect an external dynamic braking resistor, select one with a resultant resistance value greater than
the minimum allowable resistance value. Be sure to set the appropriate operation rate in f308 and
f309 to ensure overload protection.
, When using a braking resistor with no thermal fuse, connect and use a thermal relay as a control circuit for
cutting power off.

F-44
E6581697

2) Optional dynamic braking resistors


Optional dynamic braking resistors are listed below. All these resistors are 3%ED in operation rate
Braking resistor
Inverter type Continuous
Type-form Rating regenerative braking
allowable capacity
VFMB1S-2002 to 2007PL PBR-2007 120W-200Ω 90W
VFMB1S-2015, 2022PL PBR-2022 120W-75Ω 90W
VFMB1-4004 to 4022PL PBR-2007 120W-200Ω 90W
VFMB1-4037PL PBR-4037 120W-160Ω 90W
VFMB1-4055PL PBR3-4055 240W-80Ω 96W
VFMB1-4075PL PBR3-4075 440W-60Ω 130W
VFMB1-4110PL PBR3-4110 660W-40Ω 190W
VFMB1-4150PL PBR3-4150 880W-30Ω 270W
Note 1: The data in Rating above refer to the resultant resistance capacities (watts) and resultant resistance
values (Ω).
Note 2: Braking resistors for frequent regenerative braking are optionally available. For more information,
contact your nearest inverter distributor.
Note 3: Type-form of “PBR-” indicate “with thermal fuse” type.

3) Minimum resistances of connectable braking resistors 6


The minimum allowable resistance values of the externally connectable braking resistors are listed in the
table below.
Do not connect braking resistors with smaller resultant resistances than the listed minimum allowable
resistance values.
240V Class 500V Class
Inverter rated
output capacity Resistance Minimum Resistance Minimum
(kW) of standard allowable of standard allowable
option resistance option resistance
0.2 200Ω 91Ω - -
0.4 200Ω 91Ω 200Ω 114Ω
0.75 200Ω 91Ω 200Ω 114Ω
1.5 75Ω 44Ω 200Ω 67Ω
2.2 75Ω 33Ω 200Ω 67Ω
4.0 - - 160Ω 54Ω
5.5 - - 80Ω 43Ω
7.5 - - 60Ω 28Ω
11 - - 40Ω 16Ω
15 - - 30Ω 16Ω
Note: Be sure to set f308 (Dynamic braking resistance) at the resistance of the dynamic braking resistor
connected.

F-45
E6581697

6.15.5 Avoiding overvoltage tripping


f305 : Overvoltage limit operation
f319 : Regenerative over-excitation upper limit
f626 : Overvoltage stall protection level

• Function
These parameters are used to keep the output frequency constant or increase it to prevent
overvoltage tripping in case the voltage in the DC section rises during deceleration or varying speed
operation. The deceleration time during overvoltage limit operation may increase above the
designated time.

Overvoltage limit operation level

Output
Frequency

DC Voltage  : Over-voltage stall protection level

6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Enabled
Overvoltage limit operation 1: Disabled
f305 (Deceleration stop mode 2: Enabled (Quick deceleration control) 2
selection) 3: Enabled (Dynamic quick deceleration
control)
Regenerative
f319 100-160 (%) 120
over-excitation upper limit
Overvoltage stall protection 136 (240V class)
f626 100-150 (%) *1
level 141 (500V class)
*1: 100% corresponds to an input voltage of 200V for 240V models or to in an input voltage of 400V for 500V
models.
, If f305 is set to 2 (quick deceleration control), the inverter will increase the voltage to the motor (over-
excitation control) to increase the amount of energy consumed by the motor when the voltage reaches the
overvoltage protection level, and therefore the motor can be decelerated more quickly than normal
deceleration.
, If f305 is set to 3 (dynamic quick deceleration control), the inverter will increase the voltage to the
motor (over-excitation control) to increase the amount of energy consumed by the motor as soon as the
motor begins to deceleration, and therefore the motor can be decelerated still more quickly than quick
deceleration.
, During overvoltage limit operation, the overvoltage pre-alarm (p blinks) is displayed.
, The parameter f319 is used to adjust the maximum energy that the motor consumes during
deceleration, and if the inverter is tripped during deceleration because of an overvoltage, specify a larger
value. When f305 is set 2 or 3,this function works.
, Parameter f626 serves also as a parameter for setting the regenerative braking level.

F-46
E6581697

6.15.6 Output voltage adjustment/Supply voltage correction


vlv : Base frequency voltage 1
f307 : Supply voltage correction (output voltage limitation)

• Function
Base frequency voltage1
The  parameter adjusts the voltage corresponding to the base frequency 1 vl so that no
voltage exceeding the vlv set value is put out. (This function is enabled only when f307 is set
to either "0" or "1".)
Supply voltage correction
The  parameter maintains a constant V/F ratio, even when the input voltage decreases. The
torque during low-speed operation is prevented from decreasing.

Supply voltage correction: Maintains a constant V/F ratio, even when the input voltage fluctuates.
Output voltage limitation: Limits the voltage at frequencies exceeding the base frequency. Applied when
operating a special motor with low induced voltage.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
vlv Base frequency voltage1
50-330 (240V class)
50-660 (500V class)
*1 6
0: Supply voltage uncorrected,
output voltage limited
1: Supply voltage corrected,
Supply voltage correction output voltage limited
f307 *1
(output voltage limitation) 2: Supply voltage uncorrected,
output voltage unlimited
3: Supply voltage corrected,
output voltage unlimited
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
, If f307 is set to "0" or "2", the output voltage will change in proportion to the input voltage.
, Even if the base frequency voltage (vlv parameter ) is set above the input voltage, the output voltage
will not exceed the input voltage.
, The rate of voltage to frequency can be adjusted according to the rated motor capacity. For example,
setting f307 to "0" or "1" prevents the output voltage from increasing, even if the input voltage
changes when operation frequency exceeds the base frequency.
, When the V/F control mode selection parameter () is set to any number between 2 to 6, the supply
voltage is corrected regardless of the setting of f307.

F-47
E6581697

[f307=0: No voltage compensation/output voltage limited] [f307=1: Voltage compensation/output voltage limited]
 Input voltage
High Input voltage
Input voltage
 High
Low
Low

Output voltage
Output voltage

[V]
[V]

0
Output frequency  0
Output frequency 
* The above applies when V/F control mode selection
parameter  is set to "0" or "1".
 
>1 the output voltage can be prevented
Rated voltage from exceeding the input voltage.

[f307=2: No voltage compensation/no output voltage limit] [f307=3: Voltage compensation/no output voltage control]
Input voltage
Input voltage
High High
Input voltage

Low
6
Output voltage

Low
Output voltage

[V]
[V]

0 0
   
Output Output
frequency frequency
* The above applies when V/F control mode selection * Note that even if the input voltage is set less than
parameter  is set to "" or "". , for a base frequency of  or higher output
frequency, then an output voltage over 
 
>1 the output voltage can be prevented occurs.
Rated voltage
from exceeding the input voltage.

Note: Rated voltage is fixed at 200V for 240V class and 400V for 500V class.

F-48
E6581697

6.15.7 Reverse-run prohibition


f311 : Reverse-run prohibition

• Function
This function prevents the motor from running in the forward or reverse direction when it receives the
wrong operation signal.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Forward/reverse run permitted
f311 Reverse-run prohibition 1: Reverse run prohibited 0
2: Forward run prohibited

6.16 Droop control


f320 : Droop gain

f323 : Droop insensitive torque band 6


f324 : Droop output filter

• Function
Droop control has the function of preventing loads from concentrating at a specific motor because of
a load imbalance when multiple inverters are used to operate one machine.
These parameters are used to allow the motor to “slip” according to the load torque current. Using
these parameters, the insensitive torque band and the gain can be adjusted.
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f320 Droop gain 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0
f323 Droop insensitive torque band 0-100 (%) 10
f324 Droop output filter 0.1-200.0 100.0

F-49
E6581697

Power running

, The droop control function refers to the function of operating the power-running motor at operating
frequency f1 (Hz) that is lower than command frequency f0 (Hz) by droop frequency Δf (Hz) when the
torque current is T1 (%). (See the above figure.)

• The droop frequency Δf can be calculated, using the following expression.


Droop frequency Δf (Hz)=base frequency vl × f320× (Torque current T1 - f323)
• When the torque current is above the specified droop insensitive torque band (f323), the frequency is
reduced during power running or increased during regenerative braking. The above figure shows an
6 example of the operating frequency during power running. During regenerative braking, control is
performed in such a way as to increase the frequency.
• The droop function is activated above the torque current set with f323.
• The amount of droop frequency Δf varies depending on the amount of torque current T1.

Note: If the base frequency vl exceeds 100Hz, count it as 100Hz.


Control is exercised between the starting frequency (f240) and the maximum frequency (fh).

[An example of calculation]


Parameter setting:Base frequency vl=60 (Hz), droop gain f320=10 (%)
Droop insensitive torque band f323=30 (%)
Droop frequency Δf (Hz) and operating frequency f1 when command frequency f0 is 50 (Hz) and torque
current T1 is 100 (%) are as follows.
Droop frequency Δf (Hz)=vl × f320 × (T1 - f323)
=60 (Hz) × 10 (%) × (100 (%) - 30 (%))
=4.2 (Hz)
Operation frequency f1 (Hz) = f0 - Δf = 50 (Hz) - 4.2 (Hz)=45.8 (Hz)

F-50
E6581697

6.17 Light-load high-speed operation function


f328 : Light-load high-speed operation f335 : Switching load torque during
selection power running
f329 : Light-load high-speed learning f336 : Heavy-load torque during power
function running
f330 : Automatic light-load high-speed f337 : Heavy-load torque during
operation frequency constant-speed power running
f331 : Light-load high-speed operation f338 : Switching load torque during
switching lower limit frequency regenerative braking
f332 : Light-load high-speed operation
load waiting time
f333 : Light-load high-speed operation
load detection time
f334 : Light-load high-speed operation
heavy load detection time
⇒ Refer to additional Instruction manual for details. 6

6. 18 Braking function

6.18.1 Brake sequence control


f340 : Creeping time 1 f344 : Lowering torque bias multiplier
f341 : Braking mode selection f345 : Brake release time
f342 : Load portion torque input f346 : Creeping frequency
selection f347 : Creeping time 2
f343 : Hoisting torque bias input f348 : Braking time learning function

• Function
These parameters can be used as brake sequences for lifts and similar equipment.
To ensure smooth operation, the motor produces enough torque before the brake is released.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


f340 Creeping time 1 0.00-10.00 (s) 0.00
0: Disabled
1: Forward winding up 0
f341 Braking mode selection
2: Reverse winding up
3: Horizontal operation

F-51
E6581697

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


0: Disabled, 1: VIA, 2: VIB 0
f342 Load portion torque input selection
3: VIC, 4: f343
Hoisting torque bias input (valid
f343 only when f342=4) -250- +250 (%) 100
f344 Lowering torque bias multiplier 0-100 (%) 100
f345 Brake release time 0.00-10.00 (s) 0.05
f346 Creeping frequency f240 -20.0 (Hz) 3.0
f347 Creeping time 2 0.00-10.00 (s) 0.10
0:Disabled
f348 Braking time learning function 0
1: Learning (0 after adjustment)

■ Starting procedure
At the run command, the inverter makes the motor produce the torque specified with parameter f343. As soon
as a torque output command is issued, a brake release request signal is put out through the brake output terminal.
Upon expiration of the brake release time set with f345, the motor starts to accelerate.

■ Stopping procedure
At the stop command, the operation frequency is decreased to the creep frequency set with parameter f346,

6
and put out the braking request after the creep time 1 set with f340. And then, the creep frequency is
maintained for the creep time set with f347. While the creep frequency is maintained, the brake release signal
is put out through the braking signal output terminal to apply the brake.

Creepinjg frequency
Output frequency Torque control Speed control 
[Hz]

Starting frequency Time [s]




Torque 

Issue of torque command

Braking request
Braking signal
Brake release request

Braking operation

RUN command

 

Note 1) Do not change the RUN/STOP and the forward/reverse signal during creep operation.
Set the interlock circuit not to change the above switching.

F-52
E6581697

Ex.) When using the RY-RC terminal as the brake signal output terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Example of setting
f130 Output terminal function selection 1A (RY-RC) 0-255 68 (Brake release)

■ Learning function [f348]


Using this function, rough settings can be made automatically and also parameters f345, f346and f347
can be set automatically.
After the learning function is set, f342 will be set automatically to 4 and f343 to 100. If necessary, fine
adjust the parameter setting manually.

[Learning operation]
Set parameter f348 to 1 and enter an operation command to start learning. (The frequency and “tun” are
displayed alternately.)
Parameter f343 (torque) is set, the brake release timing is calculated, and parameter f345 (release time) is
set based on the calculation result. f346 is set automatically according to the motor constant calculated. At the
stop of operation, f347 (creep time) are set.
Note 2: Learning should be performed under light-load conditions.
Note 3: If a counterweight is provided, a learning error may occur. If so, make an adjustment manually.
Note 4: Brake learning (f348=1) should be carried out for normal rotation if f341 is set to 1 (forward
winding), or for reverse rotation if f341 is set to 2 (reverse winding).
6
[Notabilia for braking function]
Note 5: For the braking functions, the pre-excitation time is automatically determined by the inverter from motor-
related constants.
When the VFMB1S-2022PL is used in combination with a Toshiba 4P-2.2kW-60Hz-200V standard motor,
the pre-excitation time is approximately 0.1 to 0.2 seconds.
Depending on the motor used, the pre-excitation time may be prolonged.
Note 6: When using braking functions, set parameter au2 (automatic torque boost) to 2 (vector control + auto-
tuning) or set motor-related parameters f401 to f413.
Note 7: When the inverter is confirmed operation by braking functions, connect and run the combinated motor.
As this function calculate the timing of brake by detecting output current, calculating error is occurred
without connecting the motor.
Reverse run
■ Torque bias function
Using this function, the load can be started smoothly, Forward run
by the motor produces enough torque for load portion
before the brake is released,

[Selection of external signals] Tension torque bias


as additional torque

VIA-CC – 0~10V (0~250%) 1
Voltage signals Additional torque
VIB-CC – 0~±10V (-250~250%) 2
(fixed direction)
Current signals VIC-CC – 4(0)~20mA (0~250%) 

F-53
E6581697

6.18.2 Hit and stop control


382 : Hit and stop control
383 : Hit and stop control frequency

• Function
These parameters are can be used as hit and stop control for material handling smooth deceleration
and stopping is ensured by limit switch.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 Hit and stop control 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled, 2: - 0
 Hit and stop control frequency 0.1-30.0 (Hz) 5.0
, This function is valid when the parameter f382 = 1 is set.

■ Input terminal settings


Assign the following functions to the input terminal, you can operate the hit and stop control by using the

6 terminal's ON/OFF.
Input terminal function ON OFF
140 Forward deceleration Forward operation toward f383 setting Clear
142 Forward stop Forward stop Clear
144 Reverse deceleration Reverse operation toward f383 setting Clear
146 Reverse stop Reverse stop Clear
Each of the following numbers (141, 143, 145, 147) are reverse signals.

<Sample sequence diagram>

Forward

f383
0
f383

Reverse

Forward

Reverse

F - slow down
F - stop

R - slow down
R - stop

F-54
E6581697

6.19 Acceleration/deceleration suspend function


f349 : Acceleration/deceleration f352 : Deceleration suspend
suspend function frequency
f350 : Acceleration suspend frequency f353 : Deceleration suspend time
f351 : Acceleration suspend time

• Function
Using these parameters, acceleration or deceleration can be suspended to let the motor run at a constant
speed. There are two ways to suspend acceleration or deceleration: suspending it automatically by setting
the suspend frequency and time using parameters, and suspending it by means of a signal from an
external control device.
These parameters are useful in starting and stopping transfer equipment, textile machines (winders), and
so on.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Setting value

f349 Acceleration/deceleration suspend function


0:Disabled
1:Parameter setting
2:Terminal input
0 6
f350 Acceleration suspend frequency 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f351 Acceleration suspend time 0.0-10.0 (s) 0.0
f352 Deceleration suspend frequency 0.0-fh (Hz) 0.0
f353 Deceleration suspend time 0.0-10.0 (s) 0.0
Note1: The acceleration suspend frequency (f350) should not be set below the starting frequency (f240).
Note2: The deceleration suspend frequency (f352) should not be set below the stop frequency (f243).
Note3: If the output frequency is lowered by a stall prevention function, the acceleration suspend function may be
activated.

1) To suspend acceleration or deceleration automatically


Set the desired frequency with f350 or f352 and the desired time with f351 or f353, and then set
f349 to 1.
When the frequency set is reached, the motor stops accelerating or decelerating to rotate at a constant speed.

Output frequency [Hz]




Time [s]
 

F-55
E6581697

2) To suspend acceleration or deceleration by means of a signal from an external control device


Set 60 for the any terminal signal input terminal. As long as ON signals are inputted, the motor continues to
rotate at a constant speed.

Output frequency [Hz]

Time [s]
Terminal board input

Ex.) When using the S3 terminal as the acceleration/deceleration suspend terminal


Title Function Adjustment range Example of setting
60 (Acceleration/
f116 Input terminal selection 6 (S3) 0-203 deceleration
suspend signal)

6 ■ If the stall control function is activated during constant-speed rotation


The frequency drops momentarily as a result of stall control, but the time for which the frequency drops is included
in the suspend time.

Output frequency [Hz]


t1 ts t2




Time [s]
Stall 

f351 (Momentary acceleration (deceleration) suspend time) = (t1 + t2 + ts)

„ Stall control
Refers to the inverter’s function of automatically changing the operation frequency when it detects an
overcurrent, overload or overvoltage. Using the following parameters, you can specify the way, the stall
control is performed for each kind of stall.
Overcurrent stall :  (Stall prevention level 1)
Overload stall :  (Electronic thermal protection characteristic selection)
Overvoltage stall :  (Overvoltage limit operation)

Note: Setting the frequency command at the same frequency as the acceleration suspend frequency (f350)
disables the acceleration suspend function.
Similarly, setting the frequency command at the same frequency as the deceleration suspend frequency
(f352) disables the deceleration suspend function.

F-56
E6581697

6.20 PID control


fpid : Process input value of PID f369 : PID control feedback signal
control selection
f359 : PID control waiting time f372 : Process increasing rate
f360 : PID control (speed type PID control)
f361 : Delay filter f373 : Process decreasing rate
f362 : Proportional gain f380 : PID forward/reverse
f363 : Integral gain characteristics selection
f366 : Differential gain f389 : PID control reference signal
f367 : Process upper limit selection
f368 : Process lower limit

• Function 6
Using feedback signals (4 to 20mA, 0 to 10V) from a detector, process control can be exercised, for
example, to keep the airflow, amount of flow or pressure constant.
Or, it is also possible to always set 0 for integral and differential at terminal input.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
fpid Process input value of PID control f368 -  (Hz) 0.0
f359 PID control waiting time 0-2400 (s) 0
0: Disabled
f360 PID control 1: Process type PID control 0
2: Speed type PID control
f361 Delay filter 0.0-25.0 (s) 0.1
f362 Proportional gain 0.01-100.0 0.30
f363 Integral gain 0.01-100.0 0.20
f366 Differential gain 0.00-2.55 0.00
f367 Process upper limit 0.0-fh (Hz) *1
f368 Process lower limit 0.0- (Hz) 0.0
0: Disabled, 1: VIA, 2: VIB, 3: VIC
f369 PID control feedback signal selection 0
4 to 6: -
Process increasing rate (speed type
f372 0.1-600.0 (s) 10.0
PID control)
f373 Process decreasing rate 0.1-600.0 (s) 10.0

F-57
E6581697

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


PID forward/reverse characteristics 0: Forward
f380 0
selection 1: Reverse
0: fmod/f207 selected
1: Terminal board VIA
2: Terminal board VIB
3: fpid
4: RS485 communication
5: UP/DOWN from external logic
f389 PID control reference signal selection 0
input
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

1) External connection

6 R/L1 U/T1

S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3 Pressure
transmitter

(1) Process P
value
DC: 0 to 10V
VIA
CC

VIC

CC

(2)Feedback signals DC : 4~20mA

F-58
E6581697

2) Types of PID control interface


Process value (frequency) and feedback value can be combined as follows for the PID control.

(1) Process value (2) Feedback value


PID control reference signal selection f389 PID control feedback signal selection 
0: fmod/f207 selected 0: Disabled
1: Terminal board VIA 1: VIA
2: Terminal board VIB 2: VIB
3: fpid 3: VIC
4: RS485 communication 4 to 6: -
5: UP/DOWN from external logic input
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input

Note 1: About the setting of f389 : Do not select the same terminal that is used feedback terminal.
Note 2: When f389 is selected to 3, process value is set to fpid.
Be careful it is not value of fc setting. In case value that is set by setting dial is saved on fpid.
Note 3: To make the inverter send out a signal that indicates whether the value of feedback agree with (or reaches)
the value of processing, assign the output terminal function 144 or 145 to an unassigned output terminal.
6
You can also specify a frequency agreement detection range (f167). (Refer to 6.3.4)

3) Setting PID control


Set "" (Process type PID control operation) in the parameter f360 (PID control).
(1) Set parameters acc(acceleration time), and dec (deceleration time) to the system fitting values.
(2) Please set the following parameters to place limits to the setting value and the control value.

Placing a limit to the process value : The parameter f367(Process upper limit), f368 (Process lower limit)
Placing a limit to the output frequency : The parameter ul(Upper limit frequency ), ll (Lower limit frequency )

Note 4: Assigning the PID control prohibition (input terminal function number: 36,37) to any logic input terminal, PID
control function is stopped during the terminal ON.

F-59
E6581697

4) Adjusting the PID control gain level


Adjust the PID control gain level according to the process quantities, the feedback signals and the object to
be controlled.
The following parameters are provided for gain adjustment:
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f362 Proportional gain (P) 0.01 ∼ 100.0 0.30
f363 Integral gain (I) 0.01 ∼ 100.0 0.20
f366 Derivative gain (D) 0.00 ∼ 2.55 0.00

f362 (P-gain adjustment parameter)


This parameter adjusts the proportional gain level during PID control. A correction value proportional to
the particular deviation (the difference between the process value and the feedback value) is obtained
by multiplying this deviation by the parameter setting.
A larger P-gain adjustment value gives faster response. Too large an adjustment value, however,
results in an unstable event such as hunting.
Feedback value

Process value

6 Fast response
( = Large gain)

Slow response ( = Small gain)

Time

f363 (I-gain adjustment parameter)


This parameter adjusts the integral gain level during PID control. Any remaining deviations (residual
deviation offset) during proportional action are cleared to zero.
A larger I-gain adjustment value reduces residual deviations. Too large an adjustment value, however,
results in an unstable event such as hunting.

( = Small gain)


Feedback value

Process value

Residual deviation
( = Large gain)

Time

, Assign an input terminal function 52 (PID integral/derivative) to an input terminal, when that input
terminal is ON, it is possible to calculate integral/derivative amounts always as 0 (zero).

F-60
E6581697

f366 (D-gain adjustment parameter)


This parameter adjusts the differential gain level during PID control. This gain increases the speed of
response to a rapid change in deviation (difference between the process value and the feedback value).
Note that setting the gain more than necessary may cause great fluctuations in output frequency, and
thus operation to become unstable.

(Previous deviation)-(current deviation)

Feedback value

Low differential gain


Time

, Assign an input terminal function 52 (PID integral/derivative) to an input terminal, when that input
terminal is ON, it is possible to calculate integral/derivative amounts always as 0 (zero).

5) Adjusting feedback input


To use external feedback input (VIA, VIB, VIC), perform voltage/current-scaling adjustments (input point
6
setting) as required. Refer to section 6.6.2 for details.
If the feedback input data is too small, voltage-scaling adjustment data can also be used for gain adjustment.

Example of 0 - 10 Vdc voltage input Example of 0 - 10 Vdc voltage input Example of 4 - 20 mAdc voltage input
setting setting setting

19
 13
(60Hz)
(60Hz) (60Hz)
Output frequency
Output frequency

Output frequency

 11
(0Hz) (0Hz) 17
0V 10V 0V 5V (0Hz) 4mA 20mA
  10 12 16 18
0% 100% 0% 100% 20% 100%
VIA input value VIB input value VIC input value

F-61
E6581697

6) Setting the time elapsed before PID control starts


You can specify a waiting time for PID control to prevent the inverter from starting PID control before the
control system becomes stable, for example, after start-up.
The inverter ignores feedback input signals, carries out operation at the frequency determined by the amount
of processing for the period of time specified with f359 and enters the PID control mode after a lapse of
the specified time.

7) PID control forward/reverse characteristic switch


PID input characteristics can be reversed.

Opposite characteristic

×(-1)
Process quantity Output
PID

Original characteristic

6 Feedback amount
Characteristic selection (parameter or terminal input)

x When characteristic is reversed according to parameters


When PID calculation reverse selection parameter f380 is 1: Set reverse characteristics.
x When characteristic is reversed using logic input terminal
Input terminal function 54/55: Assign to switch PID characteristics.
(Caution) If reverse characteristics is selected for parameter f380 and terminal input at the same time,
they become forward characteristic.

F-62
E6581697

6.21 Setting motor constants

6.21.1 Setting motor constants for induction motors


f400 : Auto-tuning f415 : Motor rated current
f401 : Slip frequency gain f416 : Motor no-load current
f402 : Automatic torque boost value f417 : Motor rated speed
f405 : Motor rated capacity f459 : Load inertia moment ratio

To use vector control, automatic torque boost and automatic energy saving, motor constant setting (motor tuning)
is required. The following three methods are available to set motor constants.
1) Using the torque boost setting macro function (au2) for setting the V/F control mode selection (pt) and
auto-tuning (f400) at the same time
2) Setting V/F control mode selection (pt) and auto-tuning (f400) independently
3) Combining the V/F control mode selection (pt) and manual tuning

Caution:
6
If the settings for V/F control mode selections pt are 2: automatic torque boost control, 3: vector control,
4: energy-saving, 5: Dynamic energy-saving.
Look at the motor's name plate and set the following parameters.
vl: Base frequency 1 (rated frequency)
vlv: Base frequency voltage 1 (rated voltage)
f405: Motor rated capacity
f415: Motor rated current
f417: Motor rated speed
Set the other motor constants as necessary.

[Selection 1: Setting by parameter setting macro torque boost]


This is the easiest of the available methods. It conducts vector control and auto-tuning at the same time.
Be sure to set the motor for vl, vlv, f405, f415, f417 .

Set au2 to 1 (Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning)

Set au2 to 2 (Vector control + auto-tuning).

Set au2 to 3 (Energy-saving + auto-tuning)


Refer to section 5.5 for details of the setting method.

F-63
E6581697

[Selection 2: Setting vector control and auto-tuning independently]


Set vector control, automatic torque boost, and energy saving and auto-tuning individually.
After setting pt (V/F control mode selection), auto-tuning occurs.
Set the auto-tuning parameter f400 to 2 (Auto-tuning enabled)

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Auto-tuning disabled
1: Initialization of f402 (after execution : 0)
2: Auto-tuning executed
(after execution: 0)
f400 Auto-tuning 0
3: -
4: Motor constant auto calculation
(after execution: 0)
5: 4+2 (after execution: 0)

Set f400 to 2 to before the start of operation. Tuning is performed at the start of the motor.
, Precautions on auto-tuning
(1) Conduct auto-tuning only after the motor has been connected and operation completely stopped.
If auto-tuning is conducted immediately after operation stops, the presence of a residual voltage
6 may result in abnormal tuning.
(2) Voltage is applied to the motor during tuning even though it barely rotates. During tuning,
“” is displayed on the operation panel.
(3) Tuning is performed when the motor starts for the first time after f400 is set to 2.
Tuning is usually completed within three seconds. If it is aborted, the motor will trip with the
display of etn1 and no constants will be set for that motor.
(4) High-speed motors, high-slip motors or other special motors cannot be auto-tuned. For these
motors, perform manual tuning using Selection 3 described below.
(5) Provide cranes and hoists with sufficient circuit protection such as mechanical braking. Without
sufficient circuit protection, the resulting insufficient motor torque during tuning could create a risk
of machine stalling/falling.
(6) If auto-tuning is impossible or an "etn1" auto-tuning error is displayed, perform manual tuning
with selection 4.

[Selection 3: Setting vector control and motor constant automatically]


After setting parameter vl, vlv, f405, f415 and f417, parameter f402 and f416 are
calculated automatically by calculating motor constants.
Set the motor constant parameter f400 to 4 (auto calculation)
Set f400=5, when auto-tuning is executed after setting motor constants automatically .

[Selection 4: Setting vector control and manual tuning independently]


If an "etn1" tuning error is displayed during auto-tuning or when vector control characteristics are to be
improved, set independent motor constants.

F-64
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f401 Slip frequency gain 0-150 (%) 50
f402 Automatic torque boost value 0.1-30.0 (%)
Depends on
f405 Motor rated capacity 0.01-22.00 (kW) the capacity
f415 Motor rated current 0.1-100.0 (A) (Refer to
section 11.4)
f416 Motor no-load current 10-90 (%)
f417 Motor rated speed 100-64000 (min-1) *1
f459 Load inertia moment ratio 0.1-100.0 (times) 1.0
Motor electronic thermal
thr 10-100 (%) / (A) 100
protection level 1
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

Setting procedure Adjust the following parameters:

f401: Set the compensation gain for the slipping of the motor. A higher slip frequency reduces motor
slipping correspondingly. After setting f417, set f401 to adjust in detail. Be careful as
inputting a value larger than necessary causes hunting and other unstable operation.
f402: Adjust the primary resistive component of the motor. Decreases in torque due to a possible voltage
drop during low-speed operation can be suppressed by setting a large value in this parameter. Be 6
careful as setting a value larger than necessary may lead to an increased current causing a trip at
low speeds. (Perform adjustments according to the actual operation.)
f405: Set the motor's rated capacity according to the motor's name plate or test report.
f415: Set the rated current of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test report.
f416: Set the ratio of the no-load current of the motor to the rated current. Enter the value in % that is
obtained by dividing the no-load current specified in the motor's test report by the rated current.
Increasing this value increases the excitation current.
f417: Set the rated rotational speed of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test
report.

+ Adjustment method for the moment of inertia of the load

f459: Adjusts the excess response speed. A larger value gives a smaller overshoot at the
acceleration/deceleration completion point. In the default settings, the moment of inertia of the load
(including the motor shaft) value is optimally set considering a motor shaft of 1x. When the
moment of inertia of the load is not 1x, set a value that matches that actual moment of inertia of
the load.
thr : If the rated capacity of the motor is one size smaller than that of the inverter, lower the thermal
protective level according to the rated c urrent of the motor.
* Sensorless vector control may not operate properly if the motor capacity differs from the
applicable rated capacity of the inverter by more than two grades.

Caution:
If a combination of the inverter rating and the motor capacity is different for more than 2 classes,
vector control may not operate correctly.

F-65
E6581697

6.21.2 Setting motor constants for PM motors


f400 : Auto-tuning f459 : Load inertia moment ratio
f402 : Automatic torque boost value f912 : q-axis inductance
f405 : Motor rated capacity f913 : d-axis inductance
f415 : Motor rated current f915 : PM control mode selection
f417 : Motor rated speed

To use vector control for PM motor is required. Setting V/F control mode selection (pt) should be set as 6.

Caution:
If the settings for V/F control mode selections pt is 6: vector control for PM motor
Look at the motor's name plate and set the following parameters.
vl: Base frequency 1 (rated frequency) that is calculated from Back EMF
vlv: Base frequency voltage 1 (rated voltage) that is calculated from Back EMF

6 f405: Motor rated capacity


f415: Motor rated current
f417: Motor rated speed
f912: Q axis inductance per phase
f913: D axis inductance per phase

[Selection 1: Setting PM motor control and auto-tuning ]


After setting pt =6 , auto-tuning occurs.
Set the auto-tuning parameter f400 to 2 (Auto-tuning enabled)

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Auto-tuning disabled
1: Initialization of f402,f912,f913
(after execution : 0)
2: Auto-tuning executed
f400 Auto-tuning 0
(after execution: 0)
3: -
4: -
5: -
Note1) When parameter pt= 6 is selected, f400=3 to 5 do not work.

F-66
E6581697

Set f400 to 2 to before the start of operation. Tuning is performed at the start of the motor.
, Precautions on auto-tuning
(1) Conduct auto-tuning only after the motor has been connected and operation completely stopped.
If auto-tuning is conducted immediately after operation stops, the presence of a residual voltage
may result in abnormal tuning.
(2) Voltage is applied to the motor during tuning even though it barely rotates. During tuning, “”
is displayed on the operation panel.
(3) Tuning is performed when the motor starts for the first time after f400 is set to 2.
Tuning is usually completed within three seconds. If it is aborted, the motor will trip with the
display of etn1 and no constants will be set for that motor.
(4) High-speed motors or other special motors cannot be auto-tuned. For these motors, perform
manual tuning using Selection 2 described below.
(5) Provide cranes and hoists with sufficient circuit protection such as mechanical braking. Without
sufficient circuit protection, the resulting insufficient motor torque during tuning could create a risk
of machine stalling/falling.
(6) If auto-tuning is impossible or an "etn1" auto-tuning error is displayed, perform manual tuning
with Selection 2.

[Selection 2: Setting PM motor control and manual tuning]


If an "etn1" tuning error is displayed during auto-tuning or when vector control characteristics are to be
6
improved, set motor constants manually.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f402 Automatic torque boost value 0.1-30.0 (%) Depends on
the capacity
f405 Motor rated capacity 0.01-22.00 (kW) (Refer to
f415 Motor rated current 0.1-100.0 (A) section 11.4)
f417 Motor rated speed 100-64000 (min-1) *1
f459 Load inertia moment ratio 0.1-100.0 (times) 1.0
f912 Q axis inductance per phase 0.01-650.0 (mH) 10.00
f913 D axis inductance per phase 0.01-650.0 (mH) 10.00
Motor electronic thermal
thr 10-100 (%) / (A) 100
protection level 1
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting.

Setting procedure Adjust the following parameters:

f402: Adjust the primary resistive component of the motor. Decreases in torque due to a possible voltage
drop during low-speed operation can be suppressed by setting a large value in this parameter. Be
careful as setting a value larger than necessary may lead to an increased current causing a trip at
low speeds. (Perform adjustments according to the actual operation.) If the test report exists, see
the stator resistance value per phase.
f402 = 3 X Rs X f415 / Vtype X 100 [%]
Rs is Stator resistance per phase [ohm]) Vtype is 200 or 400 [V] (depend on voltage class)

F-67
E6581697

f405: Set the motor's rated capacity according to the motor's name plate or test report.
f415: Set the rated current of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test report.
f417: Set the rated rotational speed of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test
report.

+ Adjustment method for the moment of inertia of the load

f459: Adjusts the excess response speed. A larger value gives a smaller overshoot at the
acceleration/deceleration completion point. In the default settings, the moment of inertia of the load
(including the motor shaft) value is optimally set considering a motor shaft of 1x. When the
moment of inertia of the load is not 1x, set a value that matches that actual moment of inertia of
the load.
thr : If the rated capacity of the motor is one size smaller than that of the inverter, lower the thermal
protective level according to the rated current of the motor.
* Sensorless vector control may not operate properly if the motor capacity differs from the
applicable rated capacity of the inverter by more than two grades.

Caution:
If a combination of the inverter rating and the motor capacity is different for more than 2 items, vector
control may not operate correctly.

6 [Selection 3: Setting PM motor control and optimization of starting torque]


Even if auto-tuning is done, motor cannot start due to heavy load, set the f915 to 4 to activate the
optimization of starting torque.

[Parameter setting]

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


0: Mode 0
1: Mode 1
f915 PM control type 2: Mode 2 3
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4

+: f915= 0 (Mode 0) : Without initial position detection (Rotor may rotate opposite direction at starting)
1 (Mode 1) : Initial position detection for high saliency motor
2 (Mode 2) : Initial position detection for high saliency motor Optimization for starting torque
3 (Mode 3) : Initial position detection for weak saliency motor
4 (Mode 4) : Initial position detection for weak saliency motor Optimization for starting torque

Note2) f412, f458, f460 to f467, f480 to f499 (Motor specific coefficient 1 to 11) are
manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

F-68
E6581697

6.22 Torque limit

6.22.1 Torque limit switching


f441 : Power running torque limit 1 f445 : Regenerative braking torque
level limit 2 level
f443 : Regenerative braking torque f454 : Constant output zone torque
limit 1 level limit selection
f444 : Power running torque limit 2
level

• Function
This function is to decrease or increase the output frequency according to the loading condition when the
motor torque reaches the limit level. Setting a torque limit parameter at 250% means “Invalid.”
With this function, you can also select from between limiting the constant output or limiting the constant
torque in the constant output zone.
This function is not operate when the parameter =,,7setting.

■ Setting methods
6
When setting limits to torque, use internal parameters (Torque limits can also be set with an external control device.)
Positive torque

+250% torque

 : =
Power : =
Regenerative running

Reverse run Forward run


Power Regenerative
running


-250% torque
Negative torque

With the parameter f454, you can select the item that is limited in the constant output zone (somewhat weak
magnetic field) from between constant output (f454=0: default setting) and constant torque (f454=1).
When you select the constant torque limit option, you should preferably select the output voltage limit option
(f307=1) with the parameter f307 (base frequency voltage selection).

F-69
E6581697

Torque limits can be set with the parameters f441 and f443.
[Setting of power running torque]
f441 (Power running torque limit 1) : Set a desirable torque limit level.
[Setting of regenerative torque]
f443 (Regenerative braking torque limit 1) : Set a desirable torque limit level.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0.0-249.9 (%),
f441 Power running torque limit 1 level 250.0
250.0: Disabled
0.0-249.9 (%),
f443 Regenerative braking torque limit 1 level 250.0
250.0: Disabled
Constant output zone torque limit 0: Constant output limit
f454 0
selection 1: Constant torque limit

Using parameters, two different torque limits can be set for each operating status: power running and
regenerative braking. Refer to Section 7.2.1 for the setting for switching from the terminal board.
Power running torque limit 1 :  Regenerative braking torque limit 1 : 
Power running torque limit 2 :  Regenerative braking torque limit 2 : 

6 Note: If the value set with f601 (stall prevention level) is smaller than the torque limit, then the value set with
f601 acts as the torque limit.

6.22.2 Torque limit mode selection at acceleration/deceleration


f451: Acceleration/deceleration operation after torque limit

• Function
Using this function in combination with the mechanical brake of the lifting gear (such as a crane or hoist)
makes it possible to minimize the delay before the brake starts working, and thus prevents the load from
falling because of a decrease in torque.
Moreover, it improves the motor’s response during inching operation and keeps the load from sliding down.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: In sync with acceleration /
Acceleration/deceleration operation after
f451 deceleration 0
torque limit 1: In sync with min. time

(1) f451=0 (In sync with acceleration/deceleration)


The increase in operation frequency is inhibited by the activation of the torque limit function. In this control mode,
therefore, the actual speed is always kept in sync with the operation frequency. The operation frequency restarts
to increase when torque decreases as a result of the release of the mechanical brake, so the time required for
the specified speed to be reached is the sum of the delay in operation of the mechanical brake and the
acceleration time.

F-70
E6581697

Operation frequency
Frequency [Hz]
If the torque limit function
is not activated

Actual speed

Time [s]

Torque [N·m]
Torque limit level

ON Time [s]
OFF
Mechanical brake
(released)

Time [s]

(2) f451=1(In sync with min. time)


The operation frequency keeps increasing, even if the torque limit function is activated.
6
In this control mode, the actual speed is kept in sync with the operation frequency, while torque is held at a limit
level when it decreases as a result of the release of the mechanical brake. The use of this function prevents the
load from failing and improves the motor’s response during inching operation.

Frequency [Hz]
Operation frequency
Actual speed
(Acceleration rates vary depending
on the torque limit level.)

Time [s]

Torque [N·m]
Torque is held at a limit level even
Torque limit level after the mechanical brake is released.

Time [s]
ON OFF
Mechanical brake
(released)
Time [s]

F-71
E6581697

6.22.3 Power running stall continuous trip detection time


f452 : Power running stall continuous trip detection time

• Function
A function for preventing lifting gear from failing accidentally. If the stall prevention function is activated in
succession, the inverter judges that the motor has stalled and trips.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f452 Power running stall continuous trip detection time 0.00-10.00 (s) 0.00

Output frequency [Hz]

“” trip

6
Time [s]
Output current [%]



Time [s]
less than 


F-72
E6581697

6.23 Acceleration/deceleration time 2 and 3


6.23.1 Selecting acceleration/deceleration patterns
f502 : Acceleration/deceleration 1 pattern
f506 : S-pattern lower-limit adjustment amount
f507 : S-pattern upper-limit adjustment amount

• Function
These parameters allow you to select an acceleration/deceleration pattern that suits the intended use.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


f502 Acceleration/ deceleration 1 pattern 0: Linear, 1: S-pattern 1, 2: S-pattern 2 0
S-pattern lower-limit adjustment
f506 0-50 (%) 10
amount
S-pattern upper-limit adjustment
f507 0-50 (%) 10
amount

1) Linear acceleration/deceleration
A general acceleration/ Output frequency
6
deceleration pattern. [Hz]
This pattern can usually be Maximum frequency

used.

0
Time [s]
 

2) S-pattern 1 acceleration/deceleration
Select this pattern to accelerate/decelerate the motor rapidly to a high-speed region with an output
frequency of 60Hz or more or to minimize the shocks applied during acceleration/deceleration. This
pattern is suitable for pneumatic transport machines.
Output frequency [Hz] Output frequency [Hz]
Maximum frequency Maximum frequency
 
Set frequency Set frequency

0 0
 Time [s]  Time [s]
Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time
 ×  %  ×  %  ×  %  ×  %

F-73
E6581697

3) S-pattern 2 acceleration/deceleration
Select this pattern to obtain slow acceleration in a demagnetizing region with a small motor
acceleration torque. This pattern is suitable for high-speed spindle operation.
Output frequency [Hz] Output frequency [Hz]

Maximum frequency Maximum frequency


 

Set frequency Set frequency


Base frequency Base frequency

0 0
 Time [s]  Time [s]

Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time

6.23.2 Switching of an acceleration/deceleration time 1, 2, 3

6 f500 : Acceleration time 2


f501 : Deceleration time 2
f503 : Acceleration/deceleration 2 pattern
f504 : Selecting an acceleration/deceleration pattern
f505 : Acceleration/deceleration 1 and 2 switching frequency
f510 : Acceleration time 3
f511 : Deceleration time 3
f512 : Acceleration/deceleration 3 pattern
f513 : Acceleration/deceleration 2 and 3 switching frequency
f519 : Setting of acceleration/deceleration time unit

• Function
Three acceleration times and three deceleration times can be specified individually. A method of
selection or switching can be selected from among the following:
1) Selection by means of parameters
2) Switching by changing frequencies
3) Switching by means of terminals

F-74
E6581697

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


f500 Acceleration time 2 0.0-3600 (0.00-360.0) [sec] 10.0
f501 Deceleration time 2 0.0-3600 (0.00-360.0) [sec] 10.0
1: Acceleration/deceleration 1
Selecting an acceleration/deceleration
f504 2: Acceleration/deceleration 2 1
pattern
3: Acceleration/deceleration 3
f510 Acceleration time 3 0.0-3600 (0.00-360.0) [sec] 10.0
f511 Deceleration time 3 0.0-3600 (0.00-360.0) [sec] 10.0
0: -
Setting of acceleration/deceleration
f519 1: 0.01s unit (after execution: 0) 0
time unit
2: 0.1s unit (after execution: 0)
, Default setting is 0.1s unit. Acceleration/deceleration time unit can be changed to 0.01s unit by f519=1
setting. The value of f519 return to 0 after setting.

1) Selection using parameters

Output frequency [Hz]



0
  Time [s]
=
 
=

 
=

Acceleration/deceleration time 1 is initially set as the default. Acceleration/deceleration time 2 and 3 can
be selected by changing the setting of the f504.
Enabled if cmod= (panel input enabled)

2) Switching by frequencies - Switching the acceleration/deceleration time automatically at the frequency


setting of f505.
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Acceleration/deceleration 1 and 2 0.0 (disabled)
f505 0.0
switching frequency 0.1-(Hz)
Acceleration/deceleration 2 and 3 0.0 (disabled)
f513 0.0
switching frequency 0.1-(Hz)
Note: Acceleration/deceleration patterns are changed from pattern 1 to pattern 2 and from pattern 2 to pattern 3
in increasing order of frequency, regardless of the order in which frequencies are changed. (For example,
if f505 is larger than f513, f513 pattern 1 is selected in the frequency range below the frequency
set with f505. )

F-75
E6581697

Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency

0 Time [s]

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (4) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding
to acceleration time acc to deceleration time f511
(2) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (5) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding
to acceleration time f500 to deceleration time f501
(3) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (6) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding

6
to acceleration time f510 to deceleration time dec

3) Switching using external terminals - Switching the acceleration/deceleration time via external terminals

(1) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (4) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding
to acceleration time acc to deceleration time f511
(2) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (5) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding
to acceleration time f500 to deceleration time f501
(3) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding (6) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding
to acceleration time f510 to deceleration time dec

F-76
E6581697

■ How to set parameters


a) Operating method: Terminal input
Set the operation control mode selection cmod to 0.

b) Use the S2 and S3 terminals for switching. (Instead, other terminals may be used.)

S2: Acceleration/deceleration switching signal 1


S3: Acceleration/deceleration switching signal 2

Title Function Adjustment range Setting value


24 (the second
f115 Input terminal selection 5 (S2) 0-203 acceleration/deceleration
mode selection)
26 (the third
f116 Input terminal selection 6 (S3) 0-203 acceleration/deceleration
mode selection)

■ Acceleration/ deceleration pattern


Acceleration/deceleration patterns can be selected individually, using the acceleration/deceleration 1, 2
and 3 parameters.
1) Linear acceleration/deceleration
2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 1 6
3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 2

Title Function Adjustment range Setting value


f502 Acceleration/ deceleration 1 pattern 0: Linear 0
f503 Acceleration/ deceleration 2 pattern 1: S-pattern 1 0
2: S-pattern 2
f512 Acceleration/ deceleration 3 pattern 0
+ For an explanation of acceleration/deceleration patterns, see 6.23.1.
+ Both the settings of the S-pattern lower-limit and upper-limit adjustment parameters ( and
) are applied to any acceleration/deceleration S-pattern.

F-77
E6581697

6.24 Protection functions

6.24.1 Setting motor electronic thermal protection


thr : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1
173 : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 2
f607 : Motor 150% overload detection time
f632 : Electronic-thermal memory

• Function
This parameter allows selection of the appropriate electronic thermal protection characteristics
according to the particular rating and characteristics of the motor.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Motor electronic-thermal protection
thr 10-100 (%) / (A) 100
6 f173
level 1
Motor electronic-thermal protection
level 2
10-100 (%) / (A) 100

f607 Motor 150% overload detection time 10-2400 (s) 300


f632 Electrical-thermal memory 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0
Refer to section 3.5 for details.
Note 1: The 100% standard value is the rated output current indicated on the nameplate.

6.24.2 Setting of stall prevention level


f601 : Stall prevention level 1
f185 : Stall prevention level 2

Caution
• Do not set the stall prevention level (f601) extremely low.
If the stall prevention level parameter (f601) is set at or below the no-load current of the motor, the
stall preventive function will be always active and increase the frequency when it judges that
Prohibited regenerative braking is taking place.
Do not set the stall prevention level parameter (f601) below 30% under normal use conditions.

• Function
This parameter adjusts the output frequency by activating a current stall prevention function against a
current exceeding the -specified level.

F-78
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f601 Stall prevention level 1 10-199 (%) / (A),
150
f185 Stall prevention level 2 200: Disabled

[Display during operation of the stall prevention]


During an oc alarm status, (that is , when there is a current flow in excess of the stall prevention level),
the output frequency changes. At the same time, to the left of this value, "c" is displayed flashing on
and off.
Example of display
c 50

+ The switching from f601 to f185 can be performed by entering a command through terminals.
Refer to section 6.4.1 for details.

Note. The 100% standard value is the rated output current indicated on the nameplate.

6.24.3 Inverter trip retention


f602 : Inverter trip retention selection 6
• Function
If the inverter trips, this parameter will retain the corresponding trip information. Trip information that
has thus been stored into memory can be displayed, even after power has been reset.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Cleared with power off
f602 Inverter trip retention selection 0
1: Retained with power off
+ The causes of up to eight trips that occurred in the past can be displayed in status monitor mode. (Refer
to section 8.3)
+ Data displayed in status monitor mode when the inverter is tripped is cleared when power is turned off.
Check the details monitor for the history of past trips. (Refer to section 8.2.2)
+ Trip records are retained even if power is turned off and turned back on during retry operation.

F-79
E6581697

■ Flow of operation when f602=

Reset the
inverter by Completion of reset Normal operation
panel or
terminal
Occurrence of a
operation. The relay trips again.
trip
If the cause of the ・Display of the cause
trip is not ・Failure signal FL
Turn power off,
eliminated activated
then turn it back
on to reset the
inverter. Trip state is retained
If the cause of the
・Display of the cause
trip is eliminated
・Failure signal FL not
activated

6.24.4 Emergency stop


f515: Deceleration time at emergency stop

f603: Emergency stop selection
f604: DC braking time during emergency stop
6
• Function
Set the stop method for an emergency. When operation stops, a trip occurs (e displays) and failure
signal FL operates.
When f603 is set to 2 (Emergency DC braking), set f251 (DC braking amount) and f604
(DC braking time during emergency stop).
When f603 is set to 3 (Deceleration stop), set f515 (Deceleration time at emergency stop).

1) Emergency stop from terminal


Emergency stop occurs at contact a or b. Follow the procedure below to assign a function to an input
terminal and select a stop method.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f515 Deceleration time at emergency stop 0.0-3600 (360.0) (s) 10.0
0: Coast stop
1: Deceleration stop
2: Emergency DC braking
f603 Emergency stop selection 0
3: Deceleration stop (f515)
4: Quick deceleration stop
5: Dynamic quick deceleration stop
DC braking time during emergency 1.0
f604 0.0-25.5 (s)
stop
f251 DC braking current 0 ∼ 100 (%) 50

F-80
E6581697

Setting example) When assigning the emergency stop function to S2 terminal


Title Function Adjustment range Setting
20: EXT (Emergency
f114 Input terminal selection 4A (S1) 0 - 203
stop by external signal)
Setting value 21 is reverse signal.
Note 1) Emergency stopping via the specified terminal is possible, even during panel operation.

2) Emergency stopping from the operation panel


Emergency stopping from the operation panel is possible
by pressing the STOP key on the panel twice while the inverter is not in the panel control mode.
(1) Press the STOP key ............................."eoff " will blink.
(2) Press the STOP key once again...........Operation will come to a trip stop in accordance with the setting
of the f603 parameter.
After this, "e" will be displayed and a failure detection signal
generated (FL relay is activated).

Note: While an emergency stop signal is input at a terminal, the trip cannot be reset. Clear the signal and
then reset the trip.

6.24.5 Output phase failure detection 6


f605 : Output phase failure detection selection

• Function
This parameter detects inverter output Phase failure. If the Phase failure status persists for one
second or more, the tripping function and the FL relay will be activated. At the same time, a trip
information epho will also be displayed.
Set f605 to 5 to open the motor-inverter connection by switching commercial power operation to
inverter operation.
Detection errors may occur for special motors such as high-speed motors.

f605=0: No tripping (FL relay deactivated).


f605=1: With the power on, the phase failure detection is enabled only at the start of the first operation.
The inverter will trip if the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.
f605=2: The inverter checks for output phase failures each time it starts operation. The inverter will trip if
the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.
f605=3: The inverter checks for output phase failures during operation. The inverter will trip if the Phase
failure status persists for one second or more.
f605=4: The inverter checks for output phase failures at the start of and during operation. The inverter will
trip if the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.
f605=5: If it detects an all-phase failure, it will restart on completion of reconnection. The inverter does
not check for output phase failures when restarting after a momentary power failure.

F-81
E6581697

Note1) A check for output phase failures is made during auto-tuning, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
Note2) When parameter pt=5 or 6 is selected, f605=3 to 5 do not work.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
1: At start-up (only one time after
power on)
Output phase failure detection
f605 2: At start-up (each time) 0
selection
3: During operation
4: At start-up + during operation
5: Detection of cutoff on output side

6.24.6 Input phase failure detection


f608 : Input phase failure detection selection

• Function
This parameter detects inverter input Phase failure. If the abnormal voltage status of main circuit

6 capacitor persists for few minutes or more, the tripping function and the FL relay will be activated.
Trip display is eph1. Detection may not be possible when operating with a light load, or when the
motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity.
If the power capacity is larger than the inverter capacity (more than 200kVA or more than 10 times),
detection errors may occur. If this actually happens, install an AC reactor .
f608=0: No tripping (Failure signal FL not activated)
f608=1: Phase failure detection is enabled during operation. The inverter will trip if the abnormal voltage
status of main circuit capacitor persists for few minutes or more. (Failure signal FL activated)

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
f608 Input phase failure detection selection 1
1: Enabled

Note1: Setting  to  (input phase failure detection: disabled) may result in a breakage of the
capacitor in the inverter main circuit if operation is continued under a heavy load in spite of the
occurrence of an input phase failure.
Note2: Parameter f608 is invalid for single-phase input model.
Note3: When operating the inverter with DC input, set f608=0 (none).

F-82
E6581697

6.24.7 Control mode for small current


f609 : Small current detection hysteresis
f610 : Small current trip/alarm selection
f611 : Small current detection current
f612 : Small current detection time

• Function
If the output current falls below the value set at f611 and doesn’t return above f611+f609
for a time that exceeds the value set at f612, tripping or output alarm will be activated.
uc is displayed in the event of a trip.

f610=0: No tripping (Failure signal FL not activated).


A small current alarm can be put out by setting the output terminal function selection parameter.
f610=1: The inverter will trip (Failure signal FL activated) if a current below the current set with f611
flows for the period of time specified with f612.

[Parameter setting]

f609
Title Function
Small current detection hysteresis
Adjustment range
1-20 (%)
Default setting
10
6
0: Alarm only
f610 Small current trip/alarm selection 0
1: Tripping
f611 Small current detection current 0-150 (%) / (A) 0
f612 Small current detection time 0-255 (s) 0

<Example of operation>
Output terminal function: 26 (UC) Low current detection
f610 = 0 (Alarm only)
ON
Low current OFF OFF
signal output

Output current (%)  or less 

+


Time [sec]

* When setting f610 to 1 (Trip), trip after low current detection time setting of f612. After tripping,
the low current signal remains ON.

F-83
E6581697

6.24.8 Detection of output short-circuit



f613 : Detection of output short-circuit at start-up

• Function
This parameter detects inverter output short-circuit. It can be usually detected in the length of the
standard pulse. When operating low-impedance motor such as high-speed motor, however, select the
short-time pulse.

f613=0: Detection is executed in the length of the standard pulse every time you start up the inverter.
f613=1: Detection is executed in the length of standard pulse only during the first start-up after putting on
the power or after resetting.
f613=2: Detection is executed with the short-time pulse every time you start up the inverter.
f613=3: Detection is executed with the short-time pulse only for the first time after putting power on or
after resetting.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Each time (standard pulse)

6 f613
Detection of output short-circuit at
start-up
1: Only one time after power on
(standard pulse)
2: Each time (short pulse)
0
3: Only one time after power on
(short pulse)

F-84
E6581697

6.24.9 Over-torque trip


f615 : Over-torque trip/alarm selection
f616 : Over-torque detection level
f618 : Over-torque detection time
f619 : Over-torque detection hysteresis

• Function
If the torque value exceeds the value set at f616 and doesn’t return below f616-f619
for a time that exceeds the value set at f618, tripping or output alarm will be activated.
ot is displayed in the event of a trip.

f615=0: .......... No tripping (FL relay deactivated).


An over-torque alarm can be put out by setting the output terminal function selection
parameter.

6
f615=1: .......... The inverter is tripped (FL relay activated) only after a torque exceeding the f616-
specified level has been detected for more than the f618-specified time.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Alarm only
f615 Over-torque trip/alarm selection 0
1: Tripping
0 (disabled),
f616 Over-torque detection level 150
1-250 (%)
f618 Over-torque detection time 0.0-10.0 (s) Note 0.5
f619 Over-torque detection hysteresis 0-100 (%) 10
Note: f618= 0.0 seconds is the shortest time detected on control.

F-85
E6581697

<Example of operation>
1) Output terminal function: 28 (OT) Over-torque detection
f615=0 (Alarm only)

Over-torque OFF ON OFF


signal output

less than  


-

Torque (%)

Time [sec]
6 When f615 = 1 (tripping), the inverter will trip if over-torque lasts for the period of time set with
f618. In such a case, the over-torque signal remains ON.

6.24.10 Cooling fan control selection


f620 : Cooling fan ON/OFF control

• Function
Set to operate the fan only when the ambient temperature is high during operation. When the inverter
is on, the service life of the cooling fan is longer than if it is always running.

f620=0: Cooling fan automatically controlled. Cooling fan operates only when the ambient temperature is
high during operation.
f620=1: Cooling fan not automatically controlled. Fan is always running when the inverter is on.

+ If the ambient temperature is high, even when the inverter is stopped, the cooling fan automatically
operates.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f620 Cooling fan ON/OFF control 0: ON/OFF control, 1: Always ON 0

F-86
E6581697

6.24.11 Cumulative operation time alarm setting


f621 : Cumulative operation time alarm setting

• Function
This parameter allows you to set the inverter so that it will put out an alarm signal after a lapse of the
cumulative operation time set with f621.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Cumulative operation time
f621 0.0-999.0 (100 hours) 876.0
alarm setting
+ "0.1" displayed on the monitor refers to 10 hours, and therefore "1.0" denotes 100 hours.
Ex.: 38.5 displayed on the monitor = 3850 (hours)
+ Monitor display of cumulative operation time alarm.
It can be confirmed in parts replacement alarm information of status monitor mode.
An example of display: 
+ Signal output of cumulative operation time alarm
Assign the cumulative operation time alarm function to any output terminal.

Ex.: When assigning the cumulative operation alarm signal output function to the OUT terminal
6
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
Output terminal selection
f131 0-255 56: COT (Cumulative operation time alarm)
2A (OUT)
Setting value 57 is reverse signal.
+ The cumulative operation time until present time can be monitored in status monitor mode.
(Refer to chapter 8)
+ The monitor value of cumulative operation time is reset to 0(zero) by setting typ=5 (cumulative
operation time clear).
(Refer to section 4.3.2)

F-87
E6581697

6.24.12 Undervoltage trip


f627 : Undervoltage trip/alarm selection

• Function
This parameter is used for selecting the control mode when an undervoltage is detected. Trip
information is displayed as "up1".

f627=0: The inverter is stopped. However, it is not tripped (Failure signal FL not activated).
The inverter is stopped when the voltage does not exceed about 64 % of its rating.
f627=1: Inverter is stopped. It is also tripped (Failure signal FL activated), only after detection of a voltage
not exceeding about 64% of its rating.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Alarm only
Undervoltage trip/alarm
f627 1: Tripping 0
selection
2: -

6 6.24.13 Analog input break detection


f633 : Analog input break detection level (VIC)
f644 : Operation selection of analog input break detection (VIC)
f649 : Fallback frequency
• Function
The inverter will trip if the VIC value remains below the specified value for about 0.3 seconds. In such
a case, trip "e-18" and alarm "al05" is displayed.
f633=0: Disabled....Not detected.
f633=1-100....The inverter will trip if the VIC input remains below the specified value for about 0.3 seconds.
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Analog input break detection level 0: Disabled
f633 0
(VIC) 1-100%
0: Tripping
1: Alarm only (Coast stop)
Operation selection of analog input 0
f644 2: Alarm only (f649 frequency)
break detection (VIC)
3: Alarm only (Maintain running)
4: Alarm only (Deceleration stop)
f649 Fallback frequency ll-ul(Hz) 0.0
Note : The VIC input value may be judged earlier to be abnormal, depending on the degree of deviation of
the analog data detected.

F-88
E6581697

6.24.14 Parts replacement alarms


f634 : Annual average ambient temperature (Parts replacement alarms)
• Function
You can set the inverter so that it will calculate the remaining useful lives of the cooling fan, main
circuit capacitor and on-board capacitor from the ON time of the inverter (cumulative power on time),
the operating time of the motor (cumulative operation time), cooling fan operation time (cumulative
fan operation time), the output current (inverter load factor) and the setting of f634, and that it will
display and send out an alarm through output terminals when each component is approaching the
time of replacement.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
1: -10 to +10°C
2: 11-20°C
Annual average ambient temperature 3: 21-30°C
f634 3
(parts replacement alarms) 4: 31-40°C
5: 41-50°C
6: 51-60°C
+ Display of part replacement alarm information
Part replacement alarm information (Refer to chapter 8) in the Status monitor mode allows you to check on
the time of replacement.
An example of display: 
6
+ Output of part replacement alarm signal
The parts replacement alarm is assigned to the output terminal.
Setup example) When the parts replacement alarm is assigned to the OUT terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
Output terminal selection 2A 128: LTA (Parts replacement
f131 0-255
(OUT) alarm)
Setting value 129 is reverse signal.
Note 1: Using f634 enter the annual average temperature around the inverter. Be careful not to enter the
annual highest temperature.
Note 2: Set f634 at the time of installation of the inverter, and do not change its setting after the start of
use. Changing the setting may cause parts replacement alarm calculation error.

+ The cumulative power on time, cumulative fan operation time and cumulative operation time until present
time can be monitored by setting status monitor mode. (Refer to chapter 8)
+ The monitor value of cumulative fan operation time and cumulative operation time are reset to 0(zero) by
parameter typ. (Refer to section 4.3.2)

F-89
E6581697

6.24.15 Motor PTC thermal protection



f147 : Logic input / PTC input selection (S3)

f645 : PTC thermal selection
f646 : Resistor value for PTC detection

• Function
This function is used to protect motor from overheating using the signal of PTC built-in motor.
The trip display is “e-32”.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Logic input
f147 Logic input / PTC input selection (S3) 0
1: PTC input
1: Tripping 1
f645 PTC thermal selection 2: Alarm only
3000
6 f646 PTC detection resistor value 100-9999 (Ω)
Note : Protecting PTC thermal, set f147=1 (PTC input) and slide switch SW2 to PTC side.
+ Tripping level is defined by f646 setting. Alarm level is defined by 60% of f646 setting.
+ Connect the PTC of PT100 characteristic between S3 and CC terminals.
Detection temperature can be set by f646 setting.

[Connection]

S3

PT100
CC

+ Output of PTC input alarm signal


The PTC input alarm is assigned to the output terminal.
Setup example) When the PTC input alarm is assigned to the OUT terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
Output terminal selection 2A 150: PTCA
f131 0-255
(OUT) (PTC input alarm signal)
Setting value 151 is reverse signal.

F-90
E6581697

6.24.16 Number of starting alarm


f648 : Number of starting alarm

• Function
Counting the number of starting, when it will reach the value of parameter f648 setting, it will be
displayed and alarm signal is output.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f648 Number of starting alarm 0.0-999.0 (10000 times) 999.0
+ “0.1” displayed on the monitor refers to 1000 times, and therefore "1.0" denotes 10000 times.
Ex.: 38.5 displayed on the monitor = 385000 (times)
+ Display of number of starting alarm information
Number of starting alarm information (Refer to chapter 8) in the Status monitor mode allows you to check
on the time of replacement.
An example of display:  
+ Output of number of starting alarm signal
The number of starting alarm is assigned to the output terminal.
Setup example) When the number of starting alarm is assigned to the OUT terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Setting
6
162: NSA (Number of
f131 Output terminal selection 2A (OUT) 0-255
starting alarm)
Setting value 163 is reverse signal.
+ The number of starting, forward number of starting and reverse number of starting until present time can
be monitored by setting status monitor mode. (Refer to chapter 8)
+ The monitor value of the number of starting, forward number of starting and reverse number of starting are
reset to 0(zero) by setting typ=12 (number of starting clear). (Refer to section 4.3.2)

F-91
E6581697

6.25 Forced fire-speed control function


f650 : Forced fire-speed control selection
f294 : Preset-speed frequency 15

• Function
Forced fire-speed control is used when operating the motor at the specified frequency in case of an
emergency. Two kind of operation are selectable by assignment of terminal board function.
(1)Input terminal function 56 (FORCE) : Input signal is kept to hold once signal is ON.
Motor runs at the speed set by the parameter “f294”.
Motor does not stop as possible as when the trip is occurred.
Note: This case needs to power off in order to stop

(2)Input terminal function 58 (FIRE) : Input signal is kept to hold once signal is ON.
Motor runs at the speed set by the parameter “f294”.
Note: This case needs to power off or input terminal function (emergency stop) in order to stop.

6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Disabled
f650 Forced fire-speed control selection 0
1: Enabled
f294 Preset-speed frequency 15 ll-ul (Hz) 0.0

[Setup example of the forced operation input terminal]


The terminal “RES” shall be assigned.
Title Function Adjustment range Setting value
f113 Input terminal selection 3A (RES) 0 - 203 56 ( Forced run operation )
f113 Input terminal selection 3A (RES) 0 - 203 58 ( Fire speed operation )
Each setting value 57, 59 are reverse signal.
+ “fire” and output frequency are blinking during forced run operation and fire-speed operation.

F-92
E6581697

6.26 Override
f205 : VIA input point 1 rate
f206 : VIA input point 2 rate
f214 : VIB input point 1 rate
f215 : VIB input point 2 rate
f220 : VIC input point 1 rate
f221 : VIC input point 2 rate
f660 : Override addition input selection
f661 : Override multiplication input selection
f729 : Operation panel override multiplication gain

• Function
These parameters are used to adjust reference frequencies by means of external input.
6
[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
 VIA input point 1 rate 0-250 (%) 0
 VIA input point 2 rate 0-250 (%) 100
 VIB input point 1 rate -250-+250 (%) 0
 VIB input point 2 rate -250-+250 (%) 100
 VIC input point 1 rate 0-250 (%) 0
 VIC input point 2 rate 0-250 (%) 100
0: Disabled
1: VIA
f660 Override addition input selection 2: VIB 0
3: VIC
4: fc
0: Disabled
1: VIA
Override multiplication input
f661 2: VIB 0
selection 3: VIC
4: f729

  Operation panel override


multiplication gain
-100-+100 (%) 0

F-93
E6581697

The override functions calculate output frequency by the following expression:

Value [%] selected with 


Frequency command value × (1+ )+Value [Hz] selected with f660
100

1) Additive override
In this mode, an externally input override frequency is added to operation frequency command.

[Ex.1: VIA (Reference frequency), VIC (Override input)] [Ex.2: VIB (Reference frequency), VIA (Override input)]

Output frequency
Output frequency Over-ridden frequency Over-ridden frequency

 Forward run 

Override

( ) ( )
VIA input (VI/II input) VIB input
(Reference (Reference
6 Override
frequency)
-10V
frequency)

0
(VIC input) 10V
0
10V

Reverse run


Ex.1:
f660=3 (VIC input), f661=0 (disabled)
Output frequency = Reference frequency + Override (VIC input [Hz])

Ex.2:
f660=1 (VIA input), f661=0 (disabled)
Output frequency = Reference frequency + Override (VIA input [Hz])

F-94
E6581697

2) Multiplicative override
In this mode, each output frequency is multiplied by an externally override frequency.

[Ex.1: VIA (Reference frequency), VIC (Override input)] [Ex.2: VIB (Reference frequency), VIA (Override input)]

Output
frequency Over-ridden frequency

Output 
frequency Over-ridden frequency

( )
 Forward run VIB input
(Reference
frequency)

( )
-10V
VIA input
(Reference 0
10V
frequency)

0
10V

 Reverse run 6


Ex.1:
f660=0 (Disabled), f661=3 (VIC input), fmod=1(VIA input), fh=8=0, ul=8=0
VIA input, (f201=0, f202==0, f203=100, f204=8=0)
VIC input (f216=0, f220=0, f218=100, f221=100)
⇒ Setting of VIA input: Refer to Section 7.3.1, Setting of VIC input: Refer to Section 7.3.2.
Output frequency = Reference frequency × {1 + Override (VIC input [%]/100)}

Ex.2:
f660=0 (Disabled), f661=1 (VIA input), fmod=2 (VIB input), fh=8=0, ul=8=0
VIB input (f210=0, f211==0, f212=100, f213=8=0)
VIA input (f201=0, f205=0, f203=100, f206=100)
⇒ Setting of VIB input: Refer to Section 7.3.3, Setting of VIA input: Refer to Section 7.3.1.
Output frequency = Reference frequency × {1 + Override (VIA input [%]/100)}

Ex.3:
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f729 Operation panel override multiplication gain -100- +100% 0

Output frequency = Reference frequency × {1 + Override (f729 setting value [%]/100}

F-95
E6581697

6.27 Analog input terminal function selection


f214 : VIB input point 1 rate
f215 : VIB input point 2 rate
f663 : Analog input terminal function selection (VIB)

• Function
Parameter inputting is normally set from operation panel. However some parameters can be continuously
set from external analog input by using this function.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
f214 VIB input point 1 rate -250-+250 (%) 0
f215 VIB input point 2 rate -250-+250 (%) 100
0: Frequency command
1: Acceleration/deceleration time
2: Upper limit frequency
3, 4: -
Analog input terminal function
6 f663 5: Torque boost value 0
selection (VIB) 6: Stall prevention level
7: Motor electronic-thermal protection level
8 to 10: -
11: Base frequency
+ VIB terminal can be assigned analog input terminal function. The range of analog input voltage is 0% to +100%.
From -100% to 0% cannot be used.
+ The parameter that is selected by f663 can be adjusted range as following table.

Setting of f663 Object parameter VIB : 0% input VIB : 100% input


0: Frequency
- - -
command
1: Acceleration/ acc, dec, f500, Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x
deceleration time f501, f510, f511 f214 f215
2: Upper limit Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x
ul
frequency f214 f215
5: Torque boost Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x
vb, f172
value f214 f215
6: Stall prevention Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x
f185, f601
level f214 f215
7: Motor electronic-
thr, f173 Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x
thermal protection
f214 f215
level

vlv, f171 Parameter setting value x Parameter setting value x


11: Base frequency
f214 f215
Note: Adjustments are made by the inverter itself, so no changes are made to parameter settings

F-96
E6581697

6.28 Adjustment parameters


6.28.1 Pulse train output for meters
f669 : Logic output/pulse train output selection (OUT)
f676 : Pulse train output function selection (OUT)
f677 : Maximum numbers of pulse train output
f678 : Pulse train output filter

• Function
Pulse trains can be sent out through the OUT output terminals.
To do so, it is necessary to select a pulse output mode and specify the number of pulses.

Ex.: When operations frequencies (0 to 60Hz) are put out by means of 0 to 600 pulses
fh=60.0, f669=1, f676=0, f677=0.60
[Parameter setting]
Reference
of maximum Default
Title Function Adjustment range

Logic output/pulse train 0: Logic output


value of
f677
setting
6
f669 output selection (OUT) 1: Pulse train output – 0
0: Output frequency fh
1: Output current 185%
2: Frequency reference fh
3: Input voltage (DC detection) 150%
4: Output voltage (command value) 150%
5: Input power 185%
6: Output power 185%
7: Torque 250%
8: - -
9: Motor cumulative load factor 100%
10: Inverter cumulative load factor 100%
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative 100%
load factor
Pulse train output function 12:Frequency setting value (after fh
f676 selection (OUT) compensation) 0
13:VIA input value 10 V
14:VIB input value 10 V
15:Fixed output 1 185%
(output current 100% equivalent)
16:Fixed output 2 185%
(output current 50% equivalent)
17:Fixed output 3 100%
(Other than the output current)
18:Communication data 100.0%
19: - -
20: VIC input value 20mA
21, 22: - -
23: PID feedback value 100%

F-97
E6581697

Reference
of maximum Default
Title Function Adjustment range
value of setting
f677
Maximum numbers of
f677 pulse train 0.50-2.00 (kpps) – 0.80

f678 Pulse train output filter 2-1000 (ms) – 64

, Digital panel meter for reference


Type: K3MA-F (OMRON)
Connection terminal: OUT-E4, NO-E5

Note 1: When item of f676 reaches “Reference of max. value”, the number of pulse train set by f677
are sent to output terminals (OUT)
Note 2: The ON pulse width is maintained constant.
The ON pulse width is fixed at a width that causes the duty to reach 50% at the maximum pulse
number set with f677.
Therefore, the duty is variable.
For example, the ON pulse width is approximately 0.6 ms when f677=0.80,
approximately 0.5 ms when f677=1.00,
approximately 0.3 ms when f677=1.60.

6
Note 3: The minimum pulse output rate is 10pps. Keep in mind that no pulses can be put out at any rate
smaller than this.
Note 4: f676 = 12 is the motor drive frequency.

6.28.2 Calibration of analog output


f681 : Analog output signal selection
f684 : Analog output filter
f691 : Inclination characteristic of analog output
f692 : Analog output bias

• Function
Output signal from the FM terminal can be switched between 0 to 1mAdc output, 0 to 20mAdc output,
and 0 to 10Vdc output with the f681 setting. The standard setting is 0 to 1mAdc output.
* Optional frequency meter: When using QS60T, set f681=0 (meter option (0 to 1mA) output).

F-98
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Meter option (0 to 1mA)
f681 Analog output signal selection 1: Current (0 to 20mA) output 0
2: Voltage (0 to 10V) output
f684 Analog output filter 2-1000 (ms) 2
Inclination characteristic of analog 0: Negative inclination (downward slope)
f691 1
output 1: Positive inclination (upward slope)
f692 Analog output bias -1.0 - +100.0 (%) 0.0
Note 1: With 0 to 20mAdc (4 to 20mAdc) output, or 0 to 10Vdc output, set f681 to 1 or 2.

■ Example of setting
f681=1, f691=1, f692=0(%) f681=1, f691=1, f692=20(%)

(mA) (mA)
20 20
Output current

6
f692
0
0 100% 0 100%
Internal calculated value Internal calculated value

f681=1, f691=0, f692=100(%) f681=1, 691=0, f692=100(%)

(mA) (mA)
20 20
Output current

Output current

:Large gain :Small gain


f692

4
0
0 100% 0 100%
Internal calculated value Internal calculated value

, The analog output inclination can be adjusted using the parameter .

F-99
E6581697

6.29 Operation panel parameter

6.29.1 Prohibition of key operations and parameter settings


f700 : Parameter protection selection
f730 : Panel frequency setting prohibition (fc)
f731 : Disconnection detection of remote keypad
f732 : Local/remote key prohibition of remote keypad
f733 : Panel operation prohibition (RUN key)
f734 : Panel emergency stop operation prohibition
f735 : Panel reset operation prohibition
f736 : cmod/fmod change prohibition during operation
f737 : All key operation prohibition
6
f738 : Password setting (f700)
f739 : Password verification

• Function
These parameters allow you to prohibit or allow operation of the RUN and STOP keys on the
operation panel and the change of parameters. Using these parameters, you can also prohibit
various key operations. Lock parameters with a password to prevent configuration.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Permitted
1: Writing prohibited (Panel and
remote keypad)
2: Writing prohibited (1 + RS485
f700 Parameter protection selection communication) 0
3: Reading prohibited (Panel and
remote keypad)
4: Reading prohibited (3 + RS485
communication)
Panel frequency setting prohibition
f730 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
(fc)
Disconnection detection of remote
 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
keypad
Local/remote key prohibition of remote
f732 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 1
keypad
Panel operation prohibition
f733 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
(RUN key)

F-100
E6581697

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


Panel emergency stop operation
f734 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
prohibition
f735 Panel reset operation prohibition 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
cmod / fmod change prohibition
f736 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 1
during operation
 All key operation prohibition 0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited 0
0: Password unset
f738 Password setting (f700) 1-9998 0
9999: Password set
0: Password unset
f739 Password verification 1-9998 0
9999: Password set
, Assigning the parameter editing permission (function number 110, 111) to any logic input terminal,
parameters can be written regardless of the setting of f700.
Note1: f700=2 and 4 will be available after reset operation.

When protection using a password is necessary, set and remove with the following method.

■ Password setup method


Preparation: Parameters other than f700, f738, and f739 cannot be changed when f700 is set
to 1 to 4.
6
(1) When f738 or f739 are read out and the value is 0, a password is not set. A password can be set.
(2) When f738 or f739 are read out and the value is 9999, a password is already set.
(3) If a password is not set, one can be set. Select and register a value between 1 and 9998 for f738.
The number becomes the password. It must be entered to remove the password, so do not forget it.
(4) The settings for parameter f700 cannot be changed.

Note2: If you forget the password, it cannot be removed. Do not forget this password as we cannot retrieve it.
Note3: Password cannot be set when parameter f700=0 setting.
Set the password after parameter f700=1 to 4 setting.
Note4: Reading out password to parameter writer (option) is possible in 5 minutes after setting .
Please note that reading out is impossible after elapse of 5 minutes or power off because of protection
of password.

■ Password examination method


(1) When f738 or f739 are read out and the value is 9999, a password is set. Changing the
parameter requires removing the password.
(2) Enter a the number (1 to 9998) registered to f738 when the password was set for f739.
(3) If the password matches, pass blinks on the display and the password is removed.
(4) If the password is incorrect, fail blinks on the display and f739 is displayed again.
(5) When the password is removed, the setting for parameter f700 can be changed.
(6) By setting parameter f700=0, the settings of all parameters can be changed.

Note5: Entry of  setting is possible up to 3 times. Please note it is impossible to set, if you set the
wrong number over 3 times. Number of times is reset after power off.

F-101
E6581697

When protecting a parameter is necessary with the external logic input terminal, set with the following method.

■ Prohibit changing parameters settings and reading parameters from logic input
Set "Parameter editing prohibition" or "Parameter reading/editing prohibition" for any input terminal.
Activating the "Parameter editing prohibited" function prevents changes to parameters.
Activating the "Parameter reading/editing prohibition" function prevents reads and writes to parameters.
The following table shows an example of setting input terminal S1 and S2.

Title Function Adjustment range Setting


Input terminal selection 4A 200: PWP
f114 0-203
(S1) (Parameter editing prohibition)
Input terminal selection 5 202: PRWP
f115 0-203
(S2) (Parameter reading prohibition)
Setting value 201, 203 are reverse signal.

F-102
E6581697

6.29.2 Changing the unit (A/V) from a percentage of current


and voltage
f701 :Current/voltage unit selection

• Function
These parameters are used to change the unit of monitor display.
% ⇔ A (ampere)/V (volt)

Current 100% = Rated current of inverter


Input/output voltage 100% = 200Vac (240V class), 400Vac (500V class)

■ Example of setting
During the operation of the VFMB1S-2015PL (rated current: 8.0A) at the rated load (100% load), units are
displayed as follows:

1) Display in percentage terms 2) Display in amperes/volts

%Output current: Output current:


  
6
100% 8.0A

 %Input100%
voltage:
 Input voltage:
200V

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Current/voltage unit 0: %
f701 0
selection 1: A (ampere) / V (volt)

* The f701 converts the following parameter settings:


• A display : Current monitor display: Load current, torque current
Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1 & 2 , f173
DC braking current f251
Stall prevention level 1 & 2 f601, f185
Small current detection current f611
• V display : Input voltage, output voltage
Note) Base frequency voltage 1 & 2(, ) always displayed in the unit of V.

F-103
E6581697

6.29.3 Displaying the motor or the line speed


f702 : Frequency free unit display magnification
f703 : Frequency free unit coverage selection
f705 : Inclination characteristic of free unit display
f706 : Free unit display bias

• Function
The frequency or any other item displayed on the monitor can be converted freely into the rotational
speed of the motor, the operating speed of the load, and so on.
Using these parameters, the units of the amounts of processing and feedback in PID control can also
be changed.

The value obtained by multiplying the displayed frequency by the f702-set value will be displayed as
follows:

Value displayed = Monitor-displayed or parameter-set frequency × f702


6
1) Displaying the motor speed
To switch the display mode from 60Hz (default setting) to 1800min-1 (the rotating speed of the 4P motor)

  Hz 
=. =
×.=

2) Displaying the speed of the loading unit


To switch the display mode from 60Hz (default setting) to 6m/min-1 (the speed of the conveyer)

  Hz 
=. =.
×.=.

Note: This parameter displays the inverter output frequency as the value obtained by multiplying it by a
positive number. This does not mean that the actual motor speed or line speed are indicated
with accuracy.

F-104
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Frequency free unit display 0.00: Disabled (display of frequency)
f702 0.00
magnification 0.01-200.0 (times)
Frequency free unit coverage 0: All frequencies display
f703 0
selection 1: PID frequencies display
0: Negative inclination (downward
Inclination characteristic of free unit
f705 slope) 1
display
1: Positive inclination (upward slope)
f706 Free unit display bias 0.00-fh (Hz) 0.00

* The f702 converts the following parameter settings:


In case of f703=0
• Free unit Frequency monitor display Operation frequency command, Operation
frequency, PID feedback, Frequency command
value After correction, Operation frequency
command at trip
Frequency-related parameters fc, fh, ul, ll, sr1 ∼ sr7,
f100, f101, f102, f167, f190,
f192, f194, f196, f198, f202,
f204, f211, f213, f217, f219
f240, f241, f242, f250, f260, 6
f265, f267, f268, f270 to f275,
f287 ∼ f294, f330, f331, f346,
f350, f367, f368, f383,
f390 to f393, f505, f513, f649,
f812, f814, a923 to a927

In case of f703=1
• Free unit PID control -related parameters fpid, f367, f368
Note) The unit of the Base frequency 1 and 2 are always Hz.

■ An example of setting when fh is 80 and f702 is 10.00


f705=1, f706=0.00 f705=1, f706=20.00

F-105
E6581697



f705=0, f706=80.00

6.29.4 Changing the steps in which the value increment


f707 : Free step 1 (1-step rotation of setting dial)
f708 : Free step 2 (panel display)

6 • Function
It is possible to change the step width changed at panel frequency setting.
This function is useful when only running with frequencies of intervals of 1 Hz, 5 Hz, and 10 Hz units.

Note 1: The settings of these parameters have no effect when the free unit selection () is enabled.
Note 2: Set f707 to other than 0. When increasing the frequency by turning the setting dial right and if
ul (Upper limit frequency) is exceeded by rotating 1 step more, the hi alarm displays before this
happens and the frequency cannot be increased beyond this point.
Similarly, when decreasing the frequency by turning the setting dial left and if the rotating 1 step more
lowers it below ll (lower limit frequency), the lo alarm displays before this happens and the
frequency cannot be lowered beyond this point.

■ When f707 is not 0.00, and f708 = 0 (disabled)

Under normal conditions, the frequency command value from the operation panel increases in steps of 0.1
Hz each time you turn the setting dial right 1 step. If f707 is not 0.00, the frequency command value will
increase by the value with f707 each time you turn the setting dial right 1 step. Similarly, it will decrease
by the value set with f707 each time you turn the setting dial left 1 step.
In this case, the output frequency displayed in standard monitor mode changes in steps of 0.1 Hz, as usual.

■ When f707 is not 0.00, and f708 is not 0


The value displayed on the panel also can also be changed in steps.
Output frequency displayed in standard monitor mode = Internal output frequency × 


F-106
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Free step 1 (1-step rotation of setting 0.00: Disabled
f707 0.00
dial) 0.01-fh (Hz)
0: Disabled
f708 Free step 2 (panel display) 0
1-255

■ Operation example 1
f707 = 0.00 (disabled)
By rotating the setting dial 1 step, the panel frequency command value changes only 0.1 Hz.
When f707 = 10.00 (Hz) is set
Rotating the setting dial 1 step changes the panel frequency command value in 10.00 Hz increments, from
0.00 up to 60.00 (Hz).

■ Operation example 2
When f707=1.00 (Hz), and f708=1:
By rotating the setting dial 1 step, the frequency setting fc changes in steps of 1Hz: 0→ 1 → 2 → ... → 60
(Hz) and also the value displayed on the operation panel changes in steps of 1. Use these settings to hide
decimal fractions and also the value displayed on the operation panel changes in steps of 1. Use these
settings to hide decimal fractions.

6
6.29.5 Changing the initial display of the panel
f710 : Initial panel display selection

f720 : Initial remote keypad display selection

• Function
This parameter specifies display format while power is ON.

■ Changing the display format while power is ON


When the power is ON, the standard monitor mode displays the operation frequency (default setting) in the
format of "0.0" or "off". This format can be changed to any other monitor display format by setting
f710. This new format, however, will not display an assigned prefix such as t or c. When the power is
ON, the display of the extension panel is set at f720.

, When the power is ON, the main panel and the remote keypad can be set to display differently.

F-107
E6581697

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Operation frequency (Hz/free unit)
1: Output current (%/A)
2: Frequency setting value (Hz/free unit)
3: Input voltage (DC detection) (%/V)
4: Output voltage (command value) (%/V)
5: Input power (kW)
6: Output power (kW)
7: Torque (%)
8: -
9: Motor cumulative load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor
f710 Initial panel display selection 0
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative load
factor
12: Frequency setting value (after
compensation) (Hz/free unit)
13: VIA input value (%)
14: VIB input value (%)
15 to 17: -
18: Arbitrary code from communication
19: -
20: VIC input value (%)
6 21: Pulse train input value (kpps)
22: -
23: PID feedback value (Hz/free unit)
24: Input power (kWh)
25: Output power (kWh)
26: Motor load factor (%)
27: Drive load factor (%)
28: Drive rated current (A)
29: FM output value (%)
30: Pulse train output value (kpps)
31: Cumulative power on time (100 hours)
Initial remote keypad display 32: Cumulative fan operation time (100
f720 0
selection hours)
33: Cumulative operation time (100 hours)
34: Number of starting (10000 times)
35: Forward number of starting (10000
times)
36: Reverse number of starting (10000
times)
37 to 39: -
40: Inverter rated current (Carrier
frequency corrected)
41 to 51: -
, For details on f710 / f720=18, see the Communications Function Instruction Manual.
Note: If f720=18 setting, fixed value is displayed.

F-108
E6581697

6.29.6 Changing display of the status monitor


f711 to f718 : Status monitor 1 to 8
Change monitor display items in the status monitor mode.
⇒ Refer to chapter 8 for details.

6.29.7 Changing the status monitor condition


f709 : Standard monitor hold function
f746 : Status monitor filter

• Function
The standard monitor display can be hold.
And a part of status monitors can be filtered to display.

, If  is set to , the monitored values selected with  (standard monitor display selection
parameter) are displayed one after another. For peak hold values and minimum hold values, the minimum
6
values in each operation mode are displayed. When the motor is at a standstill, the values monitored last are
held as they were until the motor is started the next time.
The maximum and minimum values monitored after power is turned on or after the reset with the EASY key
are always displayed no matter whether the motor is in operation or at a standstill.
, “Output current”, “Input voltage”, “Output voltage” and “Torque” can be filtered by f746.
⇒ Refer to chapter 8 about status monitor.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
0: Real time
 Standard monitor hold function 1: Peak hold 0
2: Minimum hold
f746 Status monitor filter 8-1000 (ms) 200

F-109
E6581697

6.29.8 Canceling the operation command


f719 : Canceling of operation command when standby terminal (ST) is turned
off

• Function
When the standby (ST) terminal is turned off during panel operation, the inverter will restart operation
if the ST terminal is turned back on. Using this parameter, you can also set the inverter so that, even
if the ST is turned back on, it will not restart operation until you press the RUN key.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Canceling of operation
0: Operation command canceled (cleared)
f719 command when standby 1
1: Operation command retained
terminal (ST) is turned off

6.29.9 Selection of operation panel stop pattern


6 f721 : Selection of operation panel stop pattern

• Function
This parameter are used to select a mode in which the motor started by pressing the RUN key on
the operation panel is stopped when the STOP key is pressed.

1) Deceleration stop
The motor slows down to a stop in the deceleration time set with  (or  or ).
2) Coast stop
The inverter cuts off power supply to the motor. The motor comes to a stop after coasting for a while by
inertia. Depending on the load, the motor may keep running for a good long time.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
Selection of operation panel stop 0: Deceleration stop
f721 0
pattern 1: Coast stop

F-110
E6581697

6.30 Tracing functions


f740 : Trace selection f742 : Trace data 1
f741 : Trace cycle f743 : Trace data 2
f744 : Trace data 3
f745 : Trace data 4

• Function
These parameters are used to memorize and read out the data collected at the time of tripping or triggering.
Up to 4 kinds of data can be selected from 43 kinds of data, and the data collected at 100 consecutive
points can be stored in memory as trace data.
Here is the time at which trace data is acquired.
• Tripping: Data collected before the occurrence
• Triggering: Data collected after triggering

Note: To read data on a PC.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting 6


0: Disabled
1: At tripping
f740 Trace selection 1
2: At triggering
3: 1+2
0: 4ms
1: 20ms
f741 Trace cycle 2: 100ms 2
3: 1s
4: 10s
f742 Trace data 1 0-42 0
f743 Trace data 2 0-42 1
f744 Trace data 3 0-42 2
f745 Trace data 4 0-42 3
Note1: For saving trace data, do not disconnect power supply after inverter tripped.
Note2: When f741=0 or 1 setting, set the value of f678 (Constant at the time of filtering) lower than
f741 setting time (trace cycle time).

F-111
E6581697

1) To acquire trace data at the occurrence of tripping: f740=1


(Examples of current date output)

Trip

Monitor value of output current

Failure FL signal

:Trace data

6 Trace data 1

2) To acquire trace data at the time of triggering: f740=2

Trigger input

Trace data 1

F-112
E6581697

Ex.) When using the S3 terminal as the tracing back trigger signal terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Example of setting
76: TRACE (Trace
f116 Input terminal function selection 6 (S3) 0-203
back trigger signal)
Setting value 77 is reverse signal.

Note 1: If the inverter trips when no trigger signal is given, trace data is overwritten with tripping data.
Note 2: Trace data is overwritten each time a trigger signal is given.
Note 3: When retry operation is occurred, the data at first tripping is written. The trace data is cleared at retry success.

[Setup values of f742 to f745]


Communication Communication
Default setting Trace (monitor) function
No. unit at tracing
0 FD00 Operation frequency 0.01Hz
1 FD03 Output current 0.01%
2 FD02 Frequency setting value 0.01Hz
3 FD04 Input voltage (DC detection) 0.01%
4 FD05 Output voltage (command value) 0.01%
5 FD29 Input power 0.01kW
6
7
FD30
FD18
Output power
Torque
0.01kW
0.01%
6
9 FD23 Motor cumulative load factor 0.01%
10 FD24 Inverter cumulative load factor 0.01%
11 FD25 PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative load factor 0.01%
12 FD15 Frequency setting value (after compensation) 0.01Hz
13 FE35 VIA input value 0.01%
14 FE36 VIB input value 0.01%
18 FA51 Arbitrary code from communication -
20 FE37 VIC input value 0.01%
21 FE56 Pulse train input value 1pps
23 FD22 PID feedback value 0.01Hz
24 FE76 Input power 1kWh
25 FE77 Output power 1kWh
26 FE26 Motor load factor 1%
27 FE27 Drive load factor 1%
40 FD06 Input terminal status -
41 FD07 Output terminal status -
42 FD01 Inverter status -

■ Acquisition of trace data


Trace data is acquired through a communication device.

F-113
E6581697

■ Trace data communication number

Communication Minimum setting Default


Function Setting/readout range
No. /readout unit setting
E000 Trace data 1~4 pointer 1/ 1 0~99 0
E100 Data 1 of trace data 1 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
 Data 2~99 of trace data 1 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E199 Data 100 of trace data 1 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E200 Data 1 of trace data 2 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
 Data 2~99 of trace data 2 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E299 Data 100 of trace data 2 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E300 Data 1 of trace data 3 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
 Data 2~99 of trace data 3 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E399 Data 100 of trace data 3 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E400 Data 1 of trace data 4 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
 Data 2~99 of trace data 4 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
E499 Data 100 of trace data 4 1/ 1 0~ffff 0
Ex.) When operation frequency data is acquired through a communication device
Data acquired (1f40) h=8000 ⇒ 8000×0.01Hz=80.0Hz
■ Relationship between pointer and data
6 The table below shows the relationship between pointer (E000 set value) and trace data (1 to 4).

Pointer (E000 set value) 0 1 2 - 98 99


Trace data 1(E100~E199) E100 E101 E102 - E198 E199
Trace data 2(E200~E299) E200 E201 E202 - E298 E299
Trace data 3(E300~E399) E300 E301 E302 - E398 E399
Trace data 4(E400~E499) E400 E401 E402 - E498 E499

<Example of setting> If E000 is set to 2:


(Earliest data) (Latest data)
Trace data 1 E102 ~ E199, E100, E101
Trace data 2 E202 ~ E299, E200, E201
Trace data 3 E302 ~ E399, E300, E301
Trace data 4 E402 ~ E499, E400, E401

Note 1: Use the parameters f742 through f745 to specify the types of trace data (1 to 4).
Note 2: Communication numbers E000 is automatically incremented by the inverter when data is traced
continuously.
* In ordinary cases, these parameters do not need to be rewritten.

F-114
E6581697

6.31 Integrating wattmeter


f748 : Integrating wattmeter retention selection
f749 : Integrating wattmeter display unit selection

• Function
At the main power off ,it is selectable whether retention of integral output power values or not.
And also, the display unit is selectable.
The integrating wattmeter display can be cleared by external input signal by assignment of the terminal
function. Input terminal function 74, 75 (Integrating wattmeter display clear)

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


0: Disabled
f748 Integrating wattmeter retention selection 0
1: Enabled
0:1=1kWh Depends on
1:1=10kWh the capacity
f749 Integrating wattmeter display unit selection (Refer to
2:1=100kWh
3:1=1000kWh section 11.4)

6
6.32 Parameter registration to easy setting mode
f750 : EASY key function selection
f751 to f782 : Easy setting mode parameter 1 to 32
Up to 32 arbitrary parameters can be registered to easy setting mode.
⇒ Refer to section 4.5 for details.

F-115
E6581697

6.33 Communication function

6.33.1 Setting of communication function


f800 : Baud rate f814 : Communication command 
f801 : Parity point 2 frequency
f802 : Inverter number f829 : Selection of communication
f803 : Communication time-out time protocol
f804 : Communication time-out action f856 : Number of motor poles for
f805 : Communication waiting time communication
f806 : Setting of master and slave for f870 : Block write data 1
communication between inverters f871 : Block write data 2
f808 : Communication time-out f875 : Block read data 1
detection condition f876 : Block read data 2
6 f810 : Communication command point selection f877 : Block read data 3
f811 : Communication command point 1 setting f878 : Block read data 4
f812 : Communication command point 1 frequency f879 : Block read data 5
f813 : Communication command point 2 setting f899 : Communication function reset

Warning
• Set the parameter Communication time-out time (f803) and Communication time-out action (f804).
If these are not properly set, the inverter cannot be stopped immediately in breaking communication and
this could result in injury and accidents.
• An emergency stop device and the interlock that fit with system specifications must be installed.
Mandatory If these are not properly installed, the inverter cannot be stopped immediately and this could result in
action injury and accidents.

Refer to the Communications Function Instruction Manual for details.

F-116
E6581697

• Function
2-wire RS485 communication is built-in as standard.
Connect with the host to create a network for transmitting data between multiple inverters. A computer
link function and Inverter-to-inverter communication function are available.
<Computer-linking functions>
The following functions are enabled by data communication between the computer and inverter
(1) Monitoring inverter status (such as the output frequency, current, and voltage)
(2) Sending RUN, STOP and other control commands to the inverter
(3) Reading, editing and writing inverter parameter settings
< Inverter-to-inverter communication function >
This function allows you to set up a network that makes it possible to carry out proportional operation of
multiple inverters (without using a computer).
+ Timer function …Function used to detect cable interruptions during communication.
When data is not sent even once to the inverter during a user-
defined period of time, an inverter trip (err5 is displayed on the
panel) or an output terminal alarm(“t” is displayed) can be output.
+ Broadcast communication function …Function used to send a command (data write) to multiple
inverters with a single communication.
+ Peer-to-peer communication …Refers to the function that enables the master inverter to send the
function data selected with a parameter to all slave inverters on the same
network. This function allows you to set up a network that makes
it possible to carry out synchronized operation or proportional

+ Communication protocol
operation (setting of point frequencies) in an abbreviated manner.
…Toshiba inverter protocol and Modbus RTU protocol are supported 6
, 2-wire RS485 communication options are as follows.
(1) USB communication conversion unit (Type: USB001Z)
Cable for communication between the inverter and the unit (Type: CAB0011 (1m), CAB0013 (3m),
CAB0015 (5m))
Cable for communication between the unit and computer: Use a commercially available USB 1.1 or 2.0
cables. (Type: A-B, Cable length: 0.25 to 1.5m)
(2) Parameter writer (Type: RKP002Z)
Communication cable (Type: CAB0011 (1m), CAB0013 (3m), CAB0015 (5m))
(3) Remote keypad (Type: RKP007Z)
Communication cable (Type: CAB0071 (1m), CAB0073 (3m), CAB0075 (5m))

Note1) In case of using above options, set the parameter f805=0.00

■ Settings for run/stop via communication


Adjustment
Title Function Standard defaults Setting example
range
2 (RS485
cmod Command mode selection 0-4 1 (Panel keypad)
communications)

F-117
E6581697

■ Settings for speed command via communication


Adjustment Standard
Title Function Setting example
range defaults
Frequency setting mode 4 (RS485
fmod 0 - 11 0 (Setting dial 1)
selection communications)

■ Communication function parameters (2-wire RS485 communication)


Communication speed, parity, inverter number, and communication error trip time settings can be changed
via panel operations or communication.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
3: 9600bps
f800 Baud rate 4: 19200bps 4
5: 38400bps
0: NON (No parity)
f801 Parity 1: EVEN (Even parity) 1
2: ODD (Odd parity)
f802 Inverter number 0-247 0
Communication time-out time 0: Disabled
f803 0.0
*1 0.1-100.0 (s)

6 f804
Communication time-out action
*1
0: Alarm only
1: Trip (Coast stop)
2: Trip (Deceleration stop)
0

f805 Communication waiting time 0.00-2.00 0.00


0: Slave (0 Hz command issued in
case the master inverter fails)
1: Slave (Operation continued in
case the master inverter fails)
Setting of master and slave for 2: Slave (Emergency stop tripping
f806 0
communication between inverters in case the master inverter fails)
3: Master (transmission of
frequency commands)
4: Master (transmission of output
frequency signals)
0: Valid at any time
Communication time-out 1: Communication selection of
f808 1
detection condition fmod or cmod
2: 1 + during operation
Communication command point 0: Disabled 0
f810
selection 1: Enabled
Communication command point 1
f811 0-100 0
setting
Communication command point 1
f812 0.0-fh 0
frequency
Communication command point 2
f813 0-100 100
setting
Communication command point 2
f814 0.0-fh *2
frequency
Selection of communication 0: Toshiba inverter protocol
f829 0
protocol 1: Modbus RTU protocol

F-118
E6581697

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


1: 2 poles
2: 4 poles
3: 6 poles
Number of motor poles for 4: 8 poles
f856 2
communication 5: 10 poles
6: 12 poles
7: 14 poles
8: 16 poles
0: No selection
1: Command information 1
f870 Block write data 1 0
2: Command information 2
3: Frequency setting
4: Output data on the terminal
board
f871 Block write data 2 5: Analog output for communication 0
6: Speed command
0: No selection
f875 Block read data 1 1: Status information 0
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
f876 Block read data 2 4: Output voltage 0
5: Alarm information
6: PID feedback value
f877 Block read data 3 7: Input terminal board monitor
8: Output terminal board monitor
9: VIA terminal board monitor
0
6
f878 Block read data 4 10: VIB terminal board monitor 0
11: VIC terminal board monitor
12: Input voltage (DC detection)
f879 Block read data 5 13: Motor speed 0
14: Torque
0: -
f899 Communication function reset 0
1: Reset (after execution: 0)
*1: Disabled ........... Indicates that the inverter will not be tripped even if a communication error occurs.
Trip ...................The inverter trips when a communication time-over occurs.
In this case a trip information err5 flashes on and off on the operation panel.
Alarm................When a communication time-over occurs, an alarm can be output from the output terminal.
Output terminal function: 78 (RS485 communication error) or 79 (RS485 communication
error reverse)
*2:Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

Note2) Changes to the parameters f800, f801 and f806 do not take effect until the power is turned
off and then on again.

F-119
E6581697

6.33.2 Using RS485


■ Communication function settings
Commands and frequency settings are given priority by communication. (Prioritized by commands from the
panel or terminal block.) Thus, command and frequency settings from communication are activated,
regardless of the command mode selection (cmod) or frequency settings mode selection settings (fmod).
However, setting 48: SCLC (switching from communication to local) with input terminal function selection and
when inputting from an external device, it is possible to operate at command mode selection (cmod) and
frequency setting mode selection (fmod) settings.
Moreover, selecting local mode with the EASY key as Local / remote key function changes to panel
frequency/panel operation mode.

■ Transmission specifications
Item Specifications
TOSHIBA inverter protocol MODBUS-RTU
Communication protocol
protocol
Interface RS485 compliant
Half duplex [path type (Line terminations resistor necessary at both
6 Transmission scheme

Wiring
ends of system)]
2-wire
Transmission distance 500 m max. (total length)
32max. (including upper host computer) Inverters connected in the
Connection terminals
system: 32max.
Synchronization scheme Start-stop synchronization
Communication baud rate 9600 bps to 38.4kbps
<ASCII mode> JIS X0201 8-bit(ASCII) Binary codes fixed to
Character transmission
<Binary mode> Binary codes fixed to 8 bits 8 bits
Error detecting scheme 1 Parity: Even/Odd/Non parity (selectable using a parameter)
Error detecting scheme 2 Checksum CRC
Stop bit length Received by inverter : 1bit / Sent by inverter : 2 bits
Order of bit transmission format Low-order bits transmitted first
Character transmission format 11-bit characters (Stop bit =1 , with parity)
<ASCII mode> 0-99
Inverter Number 1-247
<Binary mode> 0-63 (3Fh)
Inverter Number should be set to
Inverter Number
Broadcast communication <ASCII mode> ** (*? or ?* (?=0-9) is available)
should be set to 0
<Binary mode> 255 (0FFh)
Frame length Variable
Error correction None
Response monitoring None
Inverter operation at communication time-over: Select from
trip/alarm/none
Other
¤ When alarm is selected, an alarm is output from the output terminal.
When trip is selected, err5 blinks on the panel.

F-120
E6581697

■ Connection example when using the computer link function


<Independent communication>
Perform computer-inverter connection as follows to send operation frequency commands from the host
computer to inverter No. 3:

: Wiring
: Data (Host → INV)
Host computer : Response data (INV → Host)

+ + + + +

~
~
INV INV INV INV INV INV
Given Given Given Given Given
No.00 away No.01 away No.02 away No.03 No.29 away No.30 away

"Given away": Only the inverter with the selected inverter number conducts data processing. All other

6
inverters, even if they have received the data, give it away and stand by to receive the
next data.
* : Use the terminal board to branch the cable.

(1) Data is sent from the host computer.


(2) Data from the computer is received at each inverter and the inverter numbers are checked.
(3) The command is decoded and processed only by the inverter with the selected inverter number.
(4) The selected inverter responds by sending the processing results, together with its own inverter
number, to the host computer.
(5) As a result, only the selected inverter starts operating in accordance with the operation frequency
command by communicating independently.

F-121
E6581697

<Broadcast communication>
When sending an operation frequency command via a broadcast from the host computer

: Wiring
: Data (Host → INV)
Host computer : Response data (INV → Host)

+ + + + +

~
~
INV INV INV INV INV INV

No.00 No.01 No.02 No.03 No.29 No.30

+ : Split the cable among terminal blocks.

(1) Send data from the host computer.


(2) The inverters receive data from the host computer and the inverter number is checked.

6 (3) When * is next to the position of an inverter number, it is judged a broadcast. The command is
decoded and processed.
(4) To prevent data conflicts, only inverters where * is overwritten to 0 can reply with data to the host
computer.
(5) As a result, all inverters are operating with the broadcast operation frequency command.

Note: Specify inverter numbers by group for group broadcasts.


(Function only for ASCII mode. For parity mode, see the Communications Function Instruction Manual.)
(Ex) When *1 is set, inverters 01, 11, 21, 31 to 91 can be broadcast to.
In this case, the inverter specified in 01 can reply.

F-122
E6581697

■ Peer-to-peer communication
When all slave inverters are connected they operate at the same frequency as the master inverter (no setting of
point frequencies in this case)

: Wiring
Master inverter : Data (Master → Slave)

+ + + + +

~
~
INV INV INV INV INV INV

No.00 No.01 No.02 No.03 No.29 No.30

+: Use the terminal board to branch the cable.

(1) The master inverter transmits frequency command data to its slave inverters.
(2) The slave inverter calculate a frequency reference from the data received and save the frequency calculated.
(3) As a result, all slave inverters operate at the same frequency as the master inverter.
Note: The master inverter always sends frequency command data to its slave inverters.
The slave inverters are always on standby so that they can receive an frequency command from the 6
master inverter at anytime.

6.33.3 Free notes


f880 : Free notes

• Function
To enable easier management and maintenance of the inverter, it is possible to enter the identification
number.

[Parameter setting]
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting

f880 Free notes 0 – 65530 (65535) 0

6.33.4 CANopen
c700 to c799 : CANopen communication parameters

Refer to “CANopen communication Instruction Manual” for details.

F-123
E6581697

6.33.5 Open network option


c000 to c119 : Communication option common parameters
c150 to c199 : ProfiBus DP option parameters
c200 to c249 : DeviceNet option parameters
c500 to c549 : EtherNet common parameters
c550 to c599 : EtherNet IP option parameters
c600 to c649 : Modbus TCP option parameters

+: ProfiBus DP option (Type: PDP003Z)


DeviceNet option (Type: DEV003Z)
EtherNet IP/Modbus TCP option (Type: IPE002Z)
Refer to each Instruction Manual for option for details.

6.34 Permanent magnet motors

6 f910 : Step-out detection current level


f911 : Step-out detection time
f912 : q-axis inductance
f913 : d-axis inductance

• Function
If the permanent magnet motor (PM motor) steps out and if the exciting current increases (it increases
in such a case) and remains above the value set with f910 for the period of time set with f911,
the inverter will judge the motor to be stepping out and trip it. At that time, the trip message
"sout" is displayed.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting


f910 Step-out detection current level 1 - 150 (%) 100
0.00: No detection
f911 Step-out detection time 0.00
0.01-2.55 (s)
f912 q-axis inductance 0.01-650.0 (mH) 10.00
f913 d-axis inductance 0.01-650.0 (mH) 10.00
⇒ Refer to section 6.21.2 about setting motor constants.
Note 1: When using an PM motor, consult your Toshiba dealer, since the inverter is not compatible with all
types of PM motors.
Note 2: The inverter may fail to detect step-out in some cases, because it uses an electrical method to detect
step-out. To avoid detection failures, you are recommended to install a mechanical step-out detector.

F-124
E6581697

6.35 Traverse function


f980 : Traverse selection
f981 : Traverse acceleration time
f982 : Traverse deceleration time
f983 : Traverse step
f984 : Traverse jump step

Refer to “Traverse function Instruction Manual” for details.

6.36 Logic sequence function


a900 to a977 : Logic sequence function

Refer to “Logic sequence function Instruction Manual” for details. 6

F-125
E6581697

7. Operations with external signal


7.1 Operating external signals
You can control the inverter externally.
The parameter settings differ depending upon your method of operation. Determine your method of operation (the
operational signal input method, speed command input method) before using the procedure below to set the
parameters.

[Procedure for setting parameters]

Check external signal conditions

Run signal: Run signal: Run signal: Run signal:


Panel keypad Panel keypad Terminal board
Speed command: Speed command: Speed command: Terminal board
Panel keypad Terminal Panel keypad Speed command:

Refer to section 3.3 Refer to section 3.3 Refer to section 3.3


Example 1), 2) Example 3) Example 4)

7
With run/stop from the Panel keypad With run/stop from external signal
  =  (terminal board) *
 =  (Panel keypad) , ,  (communication)
* Sink/source logic can be switched.
RUN STOP

With frequency command fromexternal signal


 =  (terminal board VIA)
  (terminal board VIB)
With frequency command from panel keypad   (UP/DOWN from
 =  (setting dial 1) external logic input)
8 (Terminal board VIC)
 =  (setting dial 2) + 11 (Pulse train input)
4, 6, 7 (Communication)

* For settings based on communication, refer to the Communication Instruction Manual or section 6.33.

G-1
E6581697

7.2 Applied operations by an I/O signal (operation from


the terminal block)
Input terminal sink and source logic are set by using slide switch SW1.

7.2.1 Input terminal function


[Control terminal board]

This function is used to send a signal to the SW1


FLA
input terminal from an external programmable RY
SOURCE
controller to operate or configure the inverter. FLB
PLC RC
The ability to select from a variety of functions FLC
SINK
allows for flexible system design. STO
CC
SW2(S3) +SU
FM
LOGIC OUT
CC
NO
PTC VIC
S3
VIB
S2
PP

7
S1
VIA
RES
CC
R
P24
F

„ Settings for the logic input terminal function


Terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
symbol
 Input terminal selection 1A (F) 2 (F)
F  Input terminal selection 1B (F) 0-203 Note 1) 0 (No function)
 Input terminal selection 1C (F) 0 (No function)
 Input terminal selection 2A (R) 4 (R)
R  Input terminal selection 2B (R) 0-203 Note 1) 0 (No function)
 Input terminal selection 2C (R) 0 (No function)
 Input terminal selection 3A (RES) 8 (RES)
RES 0-203 Note 1)
 Input terminal selection 3B (RES) 0 (No function)
 Input terminal selection 4A (S1) 10 (SS1)
S1 0-203 Note 1)
 Input terminal selection 4B (S1) 0 (No function)
S2  Input terminal selection 5 (S2) 0-203 Note 3) 12 (SS2)
S3  Input terminal selection 6 (S3) 0-203 Note 4) 14 (SS3)
VIB  Input terminal selection 7 (VIB) 8-55 Note 5) 16 (SS4)
VIA  Input terminal selection 8 (VIA) 8-55 Note 6) 24 (AD2)
VIA Analog/logic input
 0-4 0
VIB selection (VIA/VIB)
F to VIB  Input terminal response time 1-1000 (ms) Note 7) 1

G-2
E6581697

Note 1) Multiple functions assigned to a single terminal operate simultaneously.


Note 2) In case of setting always active function, assign the menu number to ,  and  (always
active function selection).
Note 3) In case of using terminal S2 as a logic input, set the parameter =0 (logic input).
Note 4) In case of using terminal S3 as a logic input, set the slide switch SW2 to LOGIC side and the parameter
=0 (logic input).
Note 5) In case of using terminal VIB as a logic input, set the parameter =1 to 4 (logic input).
Note 6) In case of using terminal VIA as a logic input, set the parameter =3 or 4 (logic input).
Note 7) When stable operation cannot be attained because of frequency setting circuit noise, increase .

„ Connecting
1) For logic input
Inverter
Relay a-contact
With sink settings
Input terminal
¹Operates by short circuiting between
the input terminal and CC (common).
Use for forward rotation, reverse
rotation, and multi-stage speed.
CC

2) For connection (sink logic) via transistor output


7
Programmable controller
Inverter

Input terminal

¹Control by connecting the input terminal


and CC (common) to the output (non-logic
switch) of the programmable controller.
Use for forward rotation, reverse rotation,
CC
and multi-stage speed. Use a 5 mA
transistor that operates at 24 V dc.

„ Usage example ··· 3-wire operation (one-push operation)


Use the 3-wire operation function to operate the inverter, maintaining operation without using the sequence circuit
by inputting an external signal (reset logic signal).

F Forward run Forward run (F) : Pressing forward run (F) rotates forward at
the specified frequency command value.
R Reverse run Reverse run (R) : Pressing reverse run (R) rotates in reverse
at the specified frequency command value.
S2 HD HD (S2): Pressing HD (S2) decelerates and stops.

CC

G-3
E6581697

Output
Forward frequency

Reverse

ON
HD
OFF

F ON
OFF
R ON
OFF
Power
ON
Supply
OFF

Note 2) Note 3)
7 Note 1) Set  =  (ST: standby) and  =  (terminal board) for 3 wire operation. Assign HD
(operation hold) to any input terminal at input terminal selection. When assigning the S2 terminal
as shown above, set  =  (HD: operation hold).
Note 2) If the terminals are ON before turning on the power, terminal input is ignored when the power is
turned ON. (Prevents sudden movements.) After turning the power ON, turn terminal input ON
again.
Note 3) When HD is OFF, F and R are ignored even when ON. R does not operate even if it's ON when
HD is ON. Likewise in this state, F does not operate even if it's ON. Turn F and R OFF and then
turn them ON.
Note 4) During 3 wire operation, sending the jog run mode command stops operation.
Note 5) Be aware that DC braking continues even if a startup signal is input during DC braking.
Note 6) Only F and R maintain HD (operation hold). When using F or R in combination with other
functions, be aware that the other functions do not hold. For example, when F and SS1 are
assigned, F holds, but SS1 does not.

[Parameter settings]
Terminal symbol Title Function Adjustment range Setting example
S2  Input terminal selection 5 (S2) 0-203 50: HD (Operation hold)

G-4
E6581697

„ List of logic input terminal function settings

Parameter Parameter
programmed value programmed value
Function Function
Positive Negative Positive Negative
logic logic logic logic
    No function     Factory specific coefficient *1
    Forward run command     Integrating wattmeter (kWh) display
clear
    Reverse run command     Trace back trigger signal
    Standby     Light-load high-speed operation
prohibitive signal
    Reset command     Holding of RY-RC terminal output
    Preset-speed command 1     Holding of OUT-NO terminal output
    Preset-speed command 2     Frequency UP *2
    Preset-speed command 3     Frequency DOWN *2
    Preset-speed command 4     Clear frequency UP/DOWN *2
    Jog run mode     Coast stop command
    Emergency stop by external signal     Forward/reverse selection
    DC braking command   Run/Stop command
    2nd acceleration/deceleration   Frequency reference command forced
switching
    3rd acceleration/deceleration   Frequency setting mode terminal board
 
 
 
 
2nd V/F control mode switching
2nd stall prevention level




Command mode terminal board
Parameter editing permission
7
    PID control prohibition   Fast stop command 1
    External thermal error input   Fast stop command 2
    Forced local from communication   Traverse permission signal
    Operation hold (hold of 3-wire operation)   Factory specific coefficient *1
    PID integral/differential clear   Forward deceleration
    PID characteristics switching   Forward stop
    Forced run operation   Reverse deceleration
    Fire speed operation   Reverse stop
    Acceleration/deceleration suspend
 to  Factory specific coefficient *1
signal
    Power failure synchronized signal   Parameter editing prohibition
    Logic sequence function trigger signal   Parameter reading prohibition
*1: Factory specific coefficients are manufacturer setting menus. Do not change the value of these parameters.
*2: Active when  (frequency setting mode selection) =  (UP/DOWN from external logic input) is set.
The frequency setup range is from  to  (upper limit frequency). The acceleration/deceleration time
relative to the set frequency is / while the acceleration/deceleration speed is not switched.

☆ Refer to section 11.6 for details about the input terminal function.

G-5
E6581697

7.2.2 Output terminal function (sink logic)

This function is used to output a variety of [Control terminal block]


signals to external devices from the inverter.
SW1
With the logic output terminal function, you can FLA
SOURCE RY
select from multiple output terminal functions.
FLB
Set two types of functions for the RY-RC, OUT PLC RC
terminal and then you can output when either one FLC
SINK
STO
or both of them is ON. CC
SW2(S3) +SU
FM
LOGIC OUT
CC
NO
PTC VIC
S3
VIB
S2
PP
S1
VIA
RES
CC
R
P24

7 F

„ Usage
FLA
FLA, B, C function: Set at parameter . FLB
Note 1) FL
FLC

RY

RY function: Set at parer  and .


Note 1)

RC

OUT

OUT function: Set at parameter  and .

NO

Note1) A chattering (momentary ON/OFF of contact) is generated by external factors of the vibration and the impact,
etc. In particular, please set the filter of 10ms or more, or timer for measures when connecting it directly with
input unit terminal of programmable controller. Please use the OUT terminal as much as possible when the
programmable controller is connected.

G-6
E6581697

„ Assign one type of function to an output terminal


Terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
symbol
RY-RC  Output terminal selection 1A 4 (Low-speed detection signal)

0 - 255 6 (Output frequency


OUT  Output terminal selection 2A
attainment signal)
FL
 Output terminal selection 3 10 (Fault signal)
(A, B, C)
Note 2) When assigning 1 type of function to the RY-RC terminal, set only .
Leave parameter  as the standard setting ( = ).
Note 3) When assigning 1 type of function to the OUT terminal, set only .
Leave parameter  as the standard setting ( = ).

„ Assign two types of functions to the output terminal (RY-RC, OUT)


Terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
symbol
Output terminal 4 (Low-speed detection
RY-RC 
selection 1A signal)
Output terminal 6 (Output frequency
OUT 
selection 2A attainment signal)
0 - 255
Output terminal
RY-RC 
selection 1B
Output terminal
255 (Always ON) 7
OUT 
selection 2B
0:  and 
 and 
1:  or 
Output terminal logic  and 
RY-RC, OUT  0
selection 2:  and 
 or 
3:  or 
 or 
Note 4)  and  are active only when  = : Logic output (default). 
Function is inactive when  = : Pulse train output is set.

G-7
E6581697

(1) Output signals when two types of functions are simultaneously


turned ON.
Signals are output when parameter  = 0 or 2, and the functions set at parameters  and
 are simultaneously turned ON.

☆ Timing chart
ON

OFF
ON

OFF

ON
RY-RC
Output OFF

(2) Output signals when either one of two types of functions are
simultaneously turned ON.
7 Signals are output when parameter  = 1 or 3, and either of the functions set at parameters
 and  are turned on.

☆ Timing chart
ON

OFF
ON

OFF
ON
RY-RC
Output OFF

G-8
E6581697

(3) The logical product (AND) or logical sum (OR) of the two
functions assigned is put out as a signal.
■ Setting of output terminal function
Terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
symbol
4
RY-RC  Output terminal selection 1A
(LOW)
6
OUT  Output terminal selection 2A
(RCH)
0-255
255
RY-RC  Output terminal selection 1B
(always ON)
255
OUT  Output terminal selection 2B
(always ON)
0:  and 
 and 
1:  or 
RY-RC/  and 
 Output terminal logic selection 0
OUT 2:  and 
 or 
3:  or 
 or 

7
Two different functions can be assigned to the output terminals (RY-RC and OUT-NO), and two logics with
different functions can be selected using .
The logical product (AND) or logical sum (OR) of the two functions assigned is put out as a signal, depending
on the setting of parameter .
If  = , the logical sum (AND) of  and  will be output to RY-RC.
The logical product (OR) of  and  will be output to OUT-NO.
If  = , the logical product (OR) of  and  will be output to RY-RC.
The logical sum (AND) of  and  will be output to OUT-NO.
If  = , the logical sum (AND) of  and  will be output to RY-RC.
The logical product (OR) of  and  will be output to OUT-NO.
If  = , the logical product (OR) of  and  will be output to RY-RC.
The logical product (OR) of  and  will be output to OUT-NO.

, To assign only one function to output terminals, assign the function to  and while leaving
f137 to f139 as they are set by default.

Note: f138 (OUT-NO): Enable only when f669=0


Disabled and the set value cannot be read out, if f669 is set to 1.

G-9
E6581697

(4) Holding the output of signals in ON status


, If the conditions for activating the functions assigned to output terminals RY-RC and OUT-NO agree with
and as a result the output of signals is put in ON status, the output of signals is held ON, even if the
conditions change. (Output terminal holding function)

, Assign input terminal function 80 to 83 to a logic input terminal available.

■ Input terminal function


Function No. Code Function Action
ON: Once turned on, RY-RC are held on.
Holding of RY-RC terminal
80 HDRY OFF: The status of RY-RC changes in real
output
time according to conditions.
ON: Once turned on, OUT-NO are held on.
Holding of OUT-NO terminal
82 HDOUT OFF: The status of OUT-NO changes in real
output
time according to conditions.
Each of the following numbers (81, 83) are reverse signals.

, Once output terminal RY-RC or OUT-NO is turned on when the contact input terminal to which one of the
above functions (function 80 to 83) is assigned is ON, output terminal RY-RC or OUT-NO is held ON.

G-10
E6581697

„ List of output terminal function settings


<Explanation of terminology>
y Alarm …... Alarm output when a setting has been exceeded.
y Pre-alarm …... Alarm output when the inverter may cause a trip during continued operation.

List of detection levels for output terminal selection


Parameter Parameter
programmed value Function programmed value Function
Positive Negative Positive Negative
logic logic logic logic
    Frequency lower limit   Light load output
    Frequency upper limit   Heavy load output
    Low-speed detection signal   Lower limit frequency stop
    Output frequency attainment signal   Power failure synchronized operation
(acceleration/deceleration completed)
    Set frequency attainment signal   Traverse in progress
    Fault signal (trip output)   Traverse deceleration in progress
    Over-current pre-alarm   Parts replacement alarm
    Overload pre-alarm   Over-torque detection pre-alarm
    Overheat pre-alarm   Frequency setting mode selection 1/2
    Overvoltage pre-alarm   Panel / remote selection
    Power circuit undervoltage detection   Forced continuous operation in progress
 
 
 
 
Small current detection
Over-torque detection




Specified frequency operation in progress
Signal in accordance of frequency
7
command
    Braking resistor overload pre-alarm   Fault signal (output also at a retry
waiting)
    Run/Stop   PTC input alarm signal
    Heavy fault   Safe torque off signal
    Light fault   Analog input break detection alarm
    Cooling fan ON/OFF   F terminal state
    In jogging operation   R terminal status
    Operation panel / terminal board   Cooling fan replacement alarm
operation
    Cumulative operation time alarm   Number of starting alarm
    Communication option   Acceleration operation in progress
communication error
    Forward/reverse run   Deceleration operation in progress
    Ready for operation 1   Constant speed operation in progress
    Ready for operation 2   DC braking in progress
    Brake release to  Factory specific coefficient *1
    Pre-alarm to  Logic sequence function output 1 to 16
    RS485 communication error  Always OFF
    Designated data output 1  Always ON
    Designated data output 2 
*1: Factory specific coefficients are manufacturer setting menus. Do not change the value of these parameters.

G-11
E6581697

Note 1) ON with positive logic : Open collector output transistor or relay turned ON.
OFF with positive logic : Open collector output transistor or relay turned OFF.
ON with negative logic : Open collector output transistor or relay turned OFF.
OFF with negative logic: Open collector output transistor or relay turned ON.

☆ Refer to section 11.7 for details about the output terminal functions or levels.

G-12
E6581697

7.3 Speed instruction (analog signal) settings from


external devices
[Control terminal block]
Function of analog input terminals can be
SW1
selected from four functions (external FLA
SOURCE RY
potentiometer, 0 to 10Vdc, 4 (0) to 20mAdc,
FLB
-10 to +10Vdc). PLC RC
The selective function of analog input FLC
SINK
STO
terminals gives system design flexibility. CC
The maximum resolution is 1/1000. SW2(S3) +SU
FM
LOGIC OUT
CC
NO
PTC VIC
S3
VIB
S2
PP
S1
VIA
RES
CC
R

7
P24
F

„ Analog input terminal function settings


Terminal
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting
symbol
-  Frequency priority selection 0, 1 0
 VIA input point 1 setting 0 - 100% 0
 VIA input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0
VIA
 VIA input point 2 setting 0 - 100% 100
 VIA input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1
-  Frequency setting mode selection 2 0-11 1
VIA to VIC  Analog input filter 4 - 1000 ms Note 1) 64
 VIB input point 1 setting 0 - 100% 0
 VIB input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0
VIB
 VIB input point 2 setting 0 - 100% 100
 VIB input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1
 VIC input point 1 setting 0 - 100% 0
 VIC input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0
VIC
 VIC input point 2 setting 0 - 100% 100
 VIC input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1

*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
Note1) When stable operation cannot be attained because of frequency setting circuit noise, increase .

G-13
E6581697

7.3.1 Settings depending on voltage (0 to 10 V) input


You can set the frequency settings by inputting an analog voltage signal of 0 to 10Vdc between the VIA and CC
terminals.

The following shows examples when the run command is input from the terminal.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting Setting example


1 0
 Command mode selection 0–4
(panel keypad) (terminal board)
Frequency setting mode 0 1
 0 – 11
selection (setting dial 1) (terminal board VIA)
0-2
Analog/logic input selection
 0–4 0 (Voltage signal
(VIA/VIB)
(0 – 10V))
 VIA input point 1 setting 0 - 100% 0 0
 VIA input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0 0.0
 VIA input point 2 setting 0 - 100% 100 100
 VIA input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1 50.0/60.0
 Analog input filter 2 - 1000 ms 64 64
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

„ Run and stop settings

7 You can switch between forward run (F)


MCCB Motor
R/L1 U/T1 and reverser run (R), and run/stop with
Power
Supply S/L2 VF-MB1 V/T2
W/T3
IM external signals.
T/L3 „ Setting characteristics for the frequency
* Connect a single-phase setting signal and operation frequency
input model to R/L1 and Set characteristics at two points in the
S/L2/N. Forward diagram below.
FLA
F run „ Connecting and calibrating the
FLB frequency meter
R Reverse Select the type of meter connected at
run
FLC  and calibrate.
RES ⇒ Refer to section 3.4 for details.
S1
Hz
S2
Operation frequency

Point 2
S3 
Point 1
CC

 %
CC VIA PP  
0% 100%
+ (0V) (10 V)
0 to 10 V Voltage input
-
Frequency setting signal

G-14
E6581697

7.3.2 Settings depending on current (4 to 20 mA) input


You can set the frequency settings by inputting an analog current signal of 4 (0) to 20mA dc between the VIC and
CC terminals.

The following shows examples when the run command is input from the terminal.

Title Function Adjustment range Default setting Setting example


1 0
 Command mode selection 0–4
(panel keypad) (terminal board)
Frequency setting mode 0 8
 0 – 11
selection (setting dial 1) (terminal board VIC)
 VIC input point 1 setting 0 – 100% 0 20 (or 0)
 VIC input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0 0.0
 VIC input point 2 setting 0 – 100% 100 100
 VIC input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1 50.0/60.0
 Analog input filter 2 - 1000 ms 64 64
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

„ Run and stop settings


MCCB Motor You can switch between forward run (F) and
R/L1 U/T1 reverser run (R), and run/stop with external
Power
Supply
S/L2 VF-MB1 V/T2
W/T3
IM signals.
T/L3 „ Setting characteristics for the frequency
setting signal and operation frequency
* Connect a single-phase
input model to R/L1 and
S/L2/N. FLA Forward
Set characteristics at two points in the
diagram below.
7
F run „ Connecting and calibrating the frequency
FLB meter
R Reverse
run Select the type of meter connected at 
FLC and calibrate.
RES
⇒ Refer to section 3.4 for details.
S1

S2 Hz
Operation frequency

S3 Point 2

CC Point 1

CC VIC PP  %
 
0% 20% 100%
+ (0mA) (4mA) (20 mA)
4 (0) to 20 mA dc
- Current input
Frequency setting signal

G-15
E6581697

7.3.3 Settings depending on voltage (-10 to +10 V) input


You can set the frequency settings by inputting an analog voltage signal of -10 to +10Vdc between the VIB and
CC terminals.
The following shows examples when the run command is input from the terminal.
Title Function Adjustment range Default setting Setting example
1 0
 Command mode selection 0–4
(panel keypad) (terminal board)
Frequency setting mode 0 2
 0 – 11
selection (setting dial 1) (terminal board VIB)
Analog input terminal 0: 0-+10V 1
 0
selection (VIB) 1: -10-+10V (-10 - +10V)
Analog/logic input selection 0
 0–4 0
(VIA/VIB) (Analog input)
 VIB input point 1 setting 0 - 100% 0 0
 VIB input point 1 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz 0.0 0.0
 VIB input point 2 setting 0 - 100% 100 100
 VIB input point 2 frequency 0.0 - 500.0Hz *1 50.0/60.0
 Analog input filter 2 - 1000 ms 64 64
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

„ Run and stop settings


MCCB Motor You can switch between forward run (F)
Power
R/L1 U/T1 and reverser run (R), and run/stop with
Supply S/L2 VF-MB1 V/T2 IM external signals.

7 * Connect a single-phase
T/L3 W/T3 „ Setting characteristics for the
frequency setting signal and operation
frequency
input model to R/L1 and
S/L2/N. Forward Set characteristics at two points in the
FLA
F run diagram below.
FLB R Reverse „ Connecting and calibrating the
run frequency meter
FLC RES Select the type of meter connected at
 and calibrate.
S1 ⇒ Refer to section 3.4 for details.
S2
Operation frequency (Hz)
S3 Point 2

CC ↑
Forward run
 
%
Reverse run 
↓ Point 1
CC VIB PP

±
-10 to +10 Vdc -100% 0% 100%
0
(-10V) (0V) (+10V)
Frequency setting signal

G-16
E6581697

8. Monitoring the operation status


8.1 Flow of status monitor mode

Status monitor mode


Flow of monitor as following

About
Setting monitor mode
20 kinds of data

MODE
PRG auh MODE
f60.0
☆ Display mode
Standard monitor mode ( Refer to section 4.1)
RUN
60.0 MON fr-f

MODE

t0.10

m <>
About ☆About 20 kinds of data
10 kinds of data can be monitored.
For 8 times Monitor items can be

☆About 10 kinds of
m 2 oc1⇔8
selected by setting
parameter f711 to
f716.
8
predetermined data ・During normal operation :
can be monitored 8 Details monitored in real
time. (Refer to section
times, after power op3⇔3 8.2.1)
off and on.
t8.56 ・In case of a trip : Data
・Data collected at
the time of collected at the time of
occurrence of a trip occurrence of a trip is
is retained. oh⇔2 retained. (Refer to
(Refer to o }1 section 8.3.2)
section 8.2.2)

oc3⇔1

Past trip record detained monitor mode


vw01

Note: To return to the original display mode, press the MODE key.

H-1
E6581697

8.2 Status monitor mode

8.2.1 Status monitor under normal conditions


In this mode, you can monitor the operation status of the inverter.
To display the operation status during normal operation:

Press the MODE key twice.

Setting procedure (eg. operation at 60Hz)


Panel LED Communic
Item displayed Description
operated display ation No.
The operation frequency is displayed (Operation at
Operation
60.0 60Hz). (When standard monitor display selection
frequency *
f10 is set at 0 [operation frequency])
Parameter setting The first basic parameter “auh” (history function)
MODE auh
mode is displayed.
Direction of The direction of rotation is displayed.
MODE fr-f FE01
rotation (fr-f: forward run, fr-r: reverse run)
The operation frequency command value (Hz/free
Frequency setting
Note 1 f60.0 FE02 unit) is displayed.
value *
( In case of f11=2 )
The inverter output current (load current) (%/A) is
Note 2 Output current * c 80 FC02 displayed.
( In case of f12=1 )
The inverter Input voltage (DC detection) (%/V) is
Note 3 Input voltage * 100 FC05 displayed.
( In case of f13=3 )
8 Output voltage * p100 FC08
The inverter output voltage (%/V) is displayed.
( In case of f1= )
The inverter input power (kW) is displayed.
Input power * k12.3 FC06
( In case of f15=5 )
The inverter output power (kW) is displayed.
Output power * h11.8 FC07
( In case of f16=6 )
Inverter The inverter load factor (%) is displayed.
 0 FE27
load factor * ( In case of f1=2 )
The operation frequency (Hz/free unit) is
Note 1 Operation
60.0 FE00 displayed.
frequency *
( In case of f18=0 )
* Monitor items can be selected by setting parameters f10 to f18, (f20). Note 12
Refer to page H-8 for notes. (Continued overleaf)

H-2
E6581697

(Continued)
Panel LED Communic
Item displayed Description
operated display ation No.
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal
input terminals (F, R, RES, S1, S2, S3, VIB, VIA)
are displayed in bits.

ON: 1 }}i}}i}i
Note 4 Input terminal }}i}}i}i FE06 OFF: }
VIA F
VIB R
S3 RES
S2 S1
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal
output terminals (RY-RC, OUT, FL) are displayed
in bits.

Output terminal 0 }ii FE07 ON: 1 0 }ii


Note 5 OFF: }

FL RY-RC
OUT

CPU1 version v101 FE08 The version of the CPU1 is displayed.

CPU2 version vw01 FE73 The version of the CPU2 is displayed.

Inverter rated
a33.0 FE70 The inverter rated current (A) is displayed.
current

Note 6
Overload and
c-u
0998 The inverter overload characteristic and region 8
region setting 0099 setting is displayed.

Note 7 Past trip 1 op2⇔1 FE10 Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 2 oh ⇔2 FE11 Past trip 2 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 3 op3 ⇔3 FE12 Past trip 3 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 4 o1 ⇔ FE13 Past trip 4 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 5 or ⇔5 FD10 Past trip 5 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 6 oc1 ⇔6 FD11 Past trip 6 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 7 oc2 ⇔ FD12 Past trip 7 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 8 rr⇔8 FD13 Past trip 8 (displayed alternately)

Refer to page H-8 for notes. (Continued overleaf)

H-3
E6581697

(Continued)
Panel LED Communic
Item displayed ation No.
Description
operated display
The ON/OFF status of each of the cooling fan,
circuit board capacitor, main circuit capacitor of
parts replacement alarm, cumulative operation
time or number of starting are displayed in bits.

ON: 1
Note 8 Parts replacement OFF: } m }}}}i
m }}}}i FE79
alarm information
Cooling fan
Number of starting
Cumulative Control circuit board
operation time capacitor
Main circuit
capacitor

Number of starting 3.5 FD32 Number of starting (10000 times)

Cumulative The cumulative operation time is displayed.


Note 9 t0.10 FE14
operation time (0.1=10 hours, 1.00=100 hours)
Default display The operation frequency is displayed (Operation at
MODE 60.0
mode 60Hz).

8.2.2 Display of detailed information on a past trip


Details on a past trip (of trips 1 to 8) can be displayed, as shown in the table below, by pressing the center of the
8 setting dial when the trip record is selected in the status monitor mode.
Unlike the "Display of trip information at the occurrence of a trip" in 8.3.2, details on a past trip can be displayed,
even after the inverter is turned off or reset.
Panel
Item displayed LED display Description
operated
Note 10 Past trip 1 oc1 ⇔1 Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)
For oca, ocl and err5 the number of times
(maximum of 31) the same trip occurred in succession is
Continuous trips  2
displayed (unit: times). Detailed information is recorded at
the beginning and ending numbers.
Operation The operation frequency when the trip occurred is
Note 1 60
frequency displayed.
Direction of The direction of rotation when the trip occurred is displayed.
fr-f
rotation (fr-f: Forward run, fr-r: Reverse run)
Frequency setting The operation command value when the trip occurred is
Note 1 f80
value * displayed.
The inverter output current when the trip occurred is
Note 2 Output current c150
displayed. (%/A)
Refer to page H-8 for notes. (Continued overleaf)

H-4
E6581697

(Continued)
Panel
Item displayed LED display Description
operated
The inverter input voltage (DC) when the trip occurred is
Note 3 Input voltage 120
displayed. (%/V).
The inverter output voltage when the trip occurred is
Output voltage p100
displayed. (%/V)
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal input
terminals (F, R, RES, S1, S2, S3, VIB, VIA) are displayed in
bits.

Note 4 Input terminal


ON: 1 }}i}}i}i
}}i}}i}i OFF: }
VIA F
VIB R
S3 RES
S2 S1
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal output
terminals (RY-RC, OUT, FL) are displayed in bits.

ON: 1
Note 5 Output terminal
0 }ii
OFF: } 0 }ii

FL RY-RC
OUT
The cumulative operation time when the trip occurred is
Cumulative
Note 9
operation time
t56 displayed.
(0.1=10 hours, 1.00=100 hours) 8
Past trip 1 MODE oc1 ⇔ 1 Press this key to return to past trip 1.

* The monitor value of a trip is not always recorded as the maximum value because of the time required for
detection.
Refer to page H-8 for notes.

H-5
E6581697

8.3 Display of trip information


8.3.1 Trip code display
If the inverter trips, an error code is displayed to suggest the cause. Since trip records are retained, information
on each trip can be displayed anytime in the status monitor mode.
Refer to section 13.1 for details about trip code display.
☆ The monitor value of a trip is not always recorded as the maximum value because of the time required for
detection.

8.3.2 Display of trip information at the occurrence of a trip


At the occurrence of a trip, the same information as that displayed in the mode described in " 8.2.1 Status monitor
under normal conditions ", can be displayed, as shown in the table below, if the inverter is not turned off or reset.
To display trip information after turning off or resetting the inverter, follow the steps described in " 8.2.2 Display of
detailed information on a past trip ".

■ Example of call-up of trip information


Panel LED Communic
Item displayed Description
operated display ation No.
Status monitor mode (The code blinks if a trip occurs.)
Cause of trip op2
The motor coasts and comes to a stop (coast stop).
Parameter setting The first basic parameter “auh” (history function)
MODE auh is displayed.
mode
Direction of The direction of rotation at the occurrence of a trip is
MODE fr-f FE01 displayed. (fr-f: forward run, fr-r: reverser run).
rotation
8 Note 1
Frequency setting
f60.0 FE02
The operation frequency command value (Hz/free
unit) at the occurrence of a trip is displayed.
value *
( In case of f11=2 )
The output power of the inverter at the occurrence
Note 2 Output current * c130 FC02 of a trip (%/A) is displayed.
( In case of f12=1 )
The inverter input (DC) voltage (%/V) at the
Note 3 Input voltage * 11 FC05 occurrence of a trip is displayed.
( In case of f13=3 )
The output voltage of the inverter at the
Output voltage * p100 FC08 occurrence of a trip (%/V) is displayed.
( In case of f1= )
The inverter input power (kW) is displayed.
Input power * k12.3 FC06
( In case of f15=5 )
The inverter output power (kW) is displayed.
Output power * h11.8 FC07
( In case of f16=6 )
The inverter load factor (%) at the occurrence of a
Inverter load
 0 FE27 trip is displayed.
factor *
( In case of f1=2 )
The inverter output frequency (Hz/free unit) at the
Operation
Note 1 60.0 FE00 occurrence of a trip is displayed.
frequency *
( In case of f18=0 )
* Monitor items can be selected by settings parameters f10 to f18 (f20). Note 12
Refer to page H-8 for notes. (Continued overleaf)

H-6
E6581697

(Continued)
Panel LED Communic
Item displayed Description
operated display ation No.
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal
input terminals (F, R, RES, S1, S2, S3, VIB, VIA)
are displayed in bits.

ON: 1 }}i}}i}i
Note 4 Input terminal }}i}}i}i FE06 OFF: }
VIA F
VIB R
S3 RES
S2 S1
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal
output terminals (RY-RC, OUT, FL) are displayed
in bits.

Output terminal ON: 1


0 }ii
Note 5 0 }ii FE07
OFF: }

FL RY-RC
OUT

CPU1 version v101 FE08 The version of the CPU1 is displayed.

CPU2 version vw01 FE73 The version of the CPU2 is displayed.

Inverter rated

8
a33.0 FE70 The inverter rated current (A) is displayed.
current
Overload and 0998 The inverter overload characteristic and region
Note 6 c-u
region setting 0099 setting is displayed.

Note 7 Past trip 1 op2 ⇔1 FE10 Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 2 oh ⇔2 FE11 Past trip 2 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 3 op3 ⇔3 FE12 Past trip 3 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 4 o1⇔ FE13 Past trip 4 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 5 or ⇔5 FD10 Past trip 5 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 6 oc1 ⇔6 FD11 Past trip 6 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 7 oc2 ⇔ FD12 Past trip 7 (displayed alternately)

Note 7 Past trip 8 rr⇔8 FD13 Past trip 8 (displayed alternately)

Refer to page H-8 for notes. (Continued overleaf)

H-7
E6581697

(Continued)
Panel LED Communic
Item displayed Description
operated display ation No.
The ON/OFF status of each of the cooling fan,
circuit board capacitor, main circuit capacitor of
parts replacement alarm, cumulative operation
time or number of starting are displayed in bits.

ON: 1
Parts replacement OFF: } m }}}}i
Note 8 m }}}}i FE79
alarm information
Cooling fan
Number of starting
Cumulative Control circuit board
operation time capacitor
Main circuit
capacitor

Number of starting 3.5 FD32 Number of starting (10000 times)

Cumulative The cumulative operation time is displayed.


Note 9 t0.10 FE14
operation time (0.1=10 hours, 1.00=100 hours)
Default display
MODE op2 The cause of the trip is displayed.
mode

Note 1: The characters to the left disappear 100 Hz or more. (Ex: 120 Hz is 120.0)
Note 2: You can switch between % and A (ampere)/V (volt), using the parameter f01 (current/voltage unit
selection).

8 Note 3: The input (DC) voltage displayed is 1/ 2 times as large as the rectified d.c. input voltage.
Note 4: < VIA bar > f10 = 3, 4 (Contact input): activated ON/OFF depend on VIA terminal input.
f10 = 0 to 2 (Analog input): always OFF.
< VIB bar > f10 =1 to 4 (Contact input): activated ON/OFF depend on VIB terminal input.
f10 = 0 (Analog input): always OFF.
< S3 bar > f147 = 0 (Contact input): activated ON/OFF depend on S3 terminal input.
f147 =1 (PTC input): always OFF.
< S2 bar > f146 = 0 (Contact input): activated ON/OFF depend on S2 terminal input.
f146 =1 (Pulse train input): always OFF.
Note 5: < OUT bar > f66 = 0 (Logic output): activated ON/OFF depend on OUT terminal output.
f66 =1 (Pulse train output): always OFF.
Note 6: Overload characteristic of inverter and region setting are displayed as following monitor.
c-xx : aul=1 (Constant torque characteristic) is selected.
v-xx : aul=2 (Variable torque characteristic) is selected.
x-eu : Setup menu is selected to eu.
x-as : Setup menu is selected to asia.
x-us : Setup menu is selected to usa.
x-jp : Setup menu is selected to jp.

H-8
E6581697

Note 7: Past trip records are displayed in the following sequence: 1 (latest trip record) ⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6⇔7⇔8
(oldest trip record). If no trip occurred in the past, the message “rr” will be displayed. Details on
past trip record 1 to 8 can be displayed by pressing the center of the setting dial when past trip 1 to 8 is
displayed. Refer to section 8.2.2 for details.
Note 8: Parts replacement alarm is displayed based on the value calculated from the annual average ambient
temperature specified using f63, the ON time of the inverter, the operating time of the motor and the
output current ( load factor). Use this alarm as a guide only, since it is based on a rough estimation.
Note 9: The cumulative operation time increments only when the machine is in operation.
Note 10: If there is no trip record, nerr is displayed.
Note 11: Of the items displayed on the monitor, the reference values of items expressed in percent are listed below.
• Output current: The current monitored is displayed. The unit can be switched to A (amperes).
• Input voltage: The voltage displayed is the voltage determined by converting the voltage
measured in the DC section into an AC voltage. The reference value (100%
value) is 200V (240V class), 400V (500V class). The unit can be switched to V
(volts).
• Output voltage: The voltage displayed is the output command voltage. 100% reference value
is 200V. This unit can be switched to V (volts).
• Load factor of inverter: Depending on the PWM carrier frequency (f300) setting and so on, the
actual rated current may become smaller than the rated output current
indicated on the nameplate. With the actual rated current at that time (after a
reduction) as 100%, the proportion of the load current to the rated current is
indicated in percent. The load factor is also used to calculate the conditions
for overload trip (o1).
8

H-9
E6581697

Note 12: Status monitor of * mark is displayed by f10 to f18 and f20 setting.
The left side character is as following table by each parameter setting number.
Communic
Parameter Setting No. LED display Function Unit
ation No.
0 x60.0 Operation frequency Hz / free unit FE00
1 c16.5 Output current *1 %/A FC02
2 f50.0 Frequency setting value Hz / free unit FE02
3 y100 Input voltage (DC detection) *1 %/V FC05
4 p 90 Output voltage (command value) *1 %/V FC08
5 k 3.0 Input power kW FC06
6 h 2.8 Output power kW FC07
f10
7 q 80 Torque *1 % FC04
to f18,
9 g 60 Motor cumulative load factor % FE23
f20
10 l 80 Inverter cumulative load factor % FE24
PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative load
11 r 80 % FE25
factor
Frequency setting value (after
12 b51.0 Hz / free unit FE15
compensation)
13 a 65 VIA input value % FE35
14 b 45 VIB input value % FE36
f10,
18 xxxx Arbitrary code from communication - FA51
f20
20 c 35 VIC input value % FE37
8 21
23
p0.80
d40.0
Pulse train input value
PID feedback value
kpps
Hz / free unit
FE56
FE22
Depend on
24 k356 Input power FE76
f749
Depend on
25 h348 Output power FE77
f749
26 g 75 Motor load factor % FE26
27 l 70 Inverter load factor % FE27
f10
28 a33.0 Inverter rated current A FE70
to f18,
29 f 70 FM output value % FE40
f20
30 p0.80 Pulse train output value kpps FD40
31 p34.5 Cumulative power on time 100 hours FE80
32 f28.6 Cumulative fan operation time 100 hours FD41
33 t27.7 Cumulative operation time 100 hours FE14
34 n89.0 Number of starting 10000 times FD32
35 f45.5 Forward number of starting 10000 times FD33
36 r43.5 Reverse number of starting 10000 times FD34
Inverter rated current (Carrier
40 a33.0 A FD70
frequency corrected)
*1: These monitor values can be filtered by f6 setting. Refer to section 6.29.7.

H-10
E6581697

9. Measures to satisfy the standards


9.1 How to cope with the CE directive
In Europe, the EMC directive and the low-voltage directive, which took effect in 1996 and 1997, respectively,
made it obligatory to put the CE mark on every applicable product to prove that it complies with the directives.
Inverters do not work alone but are designed to be installed in a control panel and always used in combination
with other machines or systems which control them. So they themselves were not considered to be subject to the
EMC directive. However the component also becomes to be applied to the new EMC directive since 2007. For
this reason, the CE mark must be put on all inverters because they are subject to the low-voltage directive.

The CE mark must be put on all machines and systems with built-in inverters because such machines and
systems are subject to the above directives. It is the responsibility of the manufacturers of such final products to
put the CE mark on each one. If they are "final" products, they might also be subject to machine-related directives.
It is the responsibility of the manufacturers of such final products to put the CE mark on each one. In order to
make machines and systems with built-in inverters compliant with the EMC directive and the low-voltage directive,
this section explains how to install inverters and what measures should be taken to satisfy the EMC directive.

We have tested representative models with them installed as described later in this manual to check for
conformity with the EMC directive. However, we cannot check all inverters for conformity because whether or not
they conform to the EMC direction depends on how they are installed and connected. In other words, the
application of the EMC directive varies depending on the composition of the control panel with a built-in
inverter(s), the relationship with other built-in electrical components, the wiring condition, the layout condition, and
so on. Therefore, please verify yourself whether your machine or system conforms to the EMC directive.

9.1.1 About the EMC directive


9
The CE mark must be put on every final product that includes an inverter(s) and a motor(s). In this series of
inverters are equipped with an EMI filter and complies with the EMC directive if wiring is carried out correctly.

„ EMC directive
2004/108/EC

The EMC standards are broadly divided into two categories; immunity- and emission-related standards, each of
which is further categorized according to the operating environment of each individual machine. Since inverters
are intended for use with industrial systems under industrial environments, they fall within the EMC categories
listed in Table 1 below. The tests required for machines and systems as final products are almost the same as
those required for inverters.

I-1
E6581697

Table 1 EMC standards


Product
Category Subcategory Test standard
standards
Radiation noise CISPR11(EN55011)
Emission
Conductive noise CISPR11(EN55011)
Static discharge IEC61000-4-2
Radioactive radio-frequency IEC61000-4-3
magnetic contactor field
First transient burst IEC 61800-3 IEC61000-4-4
Immunity
Surge IEC61000-4-5
Radio-frequency IEC61000-4-6
induction/transmission interference
Voltage dip/Interruption of power IEC61000-4-11

9.1.2 Measures to satisfy the EMC directive


This subsection explains what measures must be taken to satisfy the EMC directive.

(1) This inverter is equipped with an EMC filter.

Table 2 Combinations of inverter and EMC filter

Single-phase 240 V class


Combination of inverter and filter
Conductive noise Conductive noise
IEC61800-3, IEC61800-3,
category C2 category C2

9 Inverter type (PWM carrier


frequency of 4kHz
and motor wiring
(PWM carrier
frequency of 12kHz
and motor wiring
length of 10m or less) length of 5m or less)
VFMB1S-2002PL
VFMB1S-2004PL
VFMB1S-2007PL Built-in filter Built-in filter
VFMB1S-2015PL
VFMB1S-2022PL

I-2
E6581697

Three-phase 500 V class


Combination of inverter and filter
Conductive noise Conductive noise Conductive noise
IEC61800-3, IEC61800-3, IEC61800-3,
category C2 category C2 category C3
Inverter type (PWM carrier (PWM carrier (PWM carrier
frequency of 4kHz frequency of 12kHz frequency of 12kHz
and motor wiring and motor wiring and motor wiring
length of 10m or less) length of 5m or less) length of 25m or less)
VFMB1-4004PL
VFMB1-4007PL
VFMB1-4015PL Built-in filter Built-in filter -
VFMB1-4022PL
VFMB1-4037PL
VFMB1-4055PL
VFMB1-4075PL
- - Built-in filter
VFMB1-4110PL
VFMB1-4150PL

(2) Use shielded power cables, such as inverter output cables, and shielded control cables. Route the cables and
wires so as to minimize their lengths. Keep a distance between the power cable and the control cable and
between the input and output wires of the power cable. Do not route them in parallel or bind them together,
instead cross at right angle.
(3) It is more effective in limiting the radiation noise to install the inverter in a sealed steel cabinet. Using wires as
thick and short as possible, earth the metal plate and the control panel securely with a distance kept between
the earth cable and the power cable.
(4) Route the input and output wires apart from each other.
(5) To suppress radiation noise from cables, ground all shielded cables through a noise cut plate.
It is effective to earth shielded cables in the vicinity of the inverter and cabinet (within a radius of 10cm from 9
each of them). Inserting a ferrite core in a shielded cable is even more effective in limiting the radiation noise.
(6) To further limit the radiation noise, insert a zero-phase reactor in the inverter output line and insert ferrite cores
in the earth cables of the metal plate and cabinet.

I-3
E6581697

[Example of wiring]

VFMB1S-2002 to 2022PL, VFMB1-4004 to 4037PL

Power supply wiring (Shielded cables)


R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
(R/L1, S/L2/N)

Install the shield cable after


EASY CAM RUN CAM ERR NET
modifying it as shown below.
RUN %
PRG
MON Hz

RUN STOP

EASY MODE

MODBUS
VP10S

Remove the covering of the cable


and fix the shield in the metal saddle.
9

EMC plate

Motor wiring (Shielded cables)


Braking resistor wiring (Shielded cables) U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
PBe, PB

Control wiring (Shielded cables)

I-4
E6581697

VFMB1-4055 to 4150PL

Install the shield cable after


modifying it as shown below.

Remove the covering of the cable


and fix the shield in the metal saddle.
Fixed by
insulation lock

EMC plate
9
Earth wiring Control wiring (Shielded cables)

Braking resistor wiring Motor wiring (Shielded cables)


(Shielded cables) U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
PBe, PB

Power supply wiring Control wiring (Shielded cables)


(Shielded cables)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

I-5
E6581697

9.1.3 About the low-voltage directive


The low-voltage directive provides for the safety of machines and systems. All Toshiba inverters are CE-marked
in accordance with the standard EN 50178 specified by the low-voltage directive, and can therefore be installed in
machines or systems and imported without problem to European countries.

Applicable standard: IEC61800-5-1


Pollution level: 2
Overvoltage category: 3

9.1.4 Measures to satisfy the low-voltage directive


When incorporating the inverter into a machine or system, it is necessary to take the following measures so that
the inverter satisfies the low-voltage directive.
(1) Install the inverter in a cabinet and ground the inverter enclosure. When doing maintenance, be extremely
careful not to put your fingers into the inverter through a wiring hole and touch a charged part, which may
occur depending on the model and capacity of the inverter used.
(2) Connect earth wiring to the earth terminal on the EMC plate. Or install the EMC plate (attached as
standard) and another cable connect to earth terminal on the EMC plate. Refer to the table in 10.1 for
details about earth cable sizes.
(3) Install a non-fuse circuit breaker or a fuse on the input side of the inverter. (Refer to section 10.1 and 9.2.3)

9.2 Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard


9 This inverter that conform to the UL Standard and CSA Standard based on the rated current of the nameplate
have the UL/CSA mark on the nameplate.

9.2.1 Compliance with Installation


A UL certificate was granted on the assumption that the inverter would be installed in a cabinet. Therefore, install
the inverter in a cabinet and if necessary, take measures to maintain the ambient temperature (temperature in the
cabinet) within the specified temperature range. (Refer to section 1.4.4)

9.2.2 Compliance with Connection


Use the UL conformed cables (Rating 75 °C or more, Use the copper conductors only.) to the main circuit
terminals (R/L1, S/L2, S/L2/N, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PB, PBe, PA/+, PC/-).
For instruction in the United States, Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any
additional local codes.
For instruction in the Canada, Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection.

I-6
E6581697

Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.

9.2.3 Compliance with Peripheral devices


Use the UL listed fuses at connecting to power supply.
Short circuit test is performed under the condition of the power supply short-circuit currents in below.
These interrupting capacities and fuse rating currents depend on the applicable motor capacities.

„ AIC, Fuse and Wire sizes


Input Output
Voltage Branch circuit Rating Cable sizes of
Inverter model withstand Interrupt Earth Cable
(V) protection (A) power circuit
rating (kA) rating (kA)
Markig Y (1) X (2) Z1 Z2 - -
VFMB1S-2002PL 240 1 5 Class CC 7 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1S-2004PL 240 1 5 Class J 15 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1S-2007PL 240 1 5 Class J 25 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1S-2015PL 240 1 5 Class J 40 AWG 10 AWG 12
VFMB1S-2022PL 240 1 5 Class J 45 AWG 10 AWG 10
VFMB1-4004PL 500 5 5 Class CC 6 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1-4007PL 500 5 5 Class CC 6 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1-4015PL 500 5 5 Class CC 12 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1-4022PL 500 5 5 Class J 15 AWG 14 AWG 14
VFMB1-4037PL 500 5 5 Class J 25 AWG 12 AWG 14
VFMB1-4055PL 500 22 22 Class J 40 AWG 10 AWG 10
VFMB1-4075PL
VFMB1-4110PL
500
500
22
22
22
22
Class J
Class J
40
60
AWG 8
AWG 8
AWG 10
AWG 10 9
VFMB1-4150PL 500 22 22 Class J 70 AWG 6 AWG 10

Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than___X___rms symmetrical kilo Amperes,___Y___Volts
maximum, when protected by___Z1___with a maximum rating of___Z2___.

(1) Input withstand rating is that for which the product has been designed thermally. Installation on a supply greater than
this level will require additional inductance to satisfy this level.
(2) Output interrupt rating relies on Integral solid state short circuit protection. This does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any
additional local codes. This is dependant on the type of installation.

9.2.4 Motor thermal protection


Selects the electronic thermal protection characteristics that fit with the ratings and characteristics of the motor.
(Refer to section 3.5)
In case of multi motor operation with one inverter, thermal relay should be connected to each motor.

I-7
E6581697

9.3 Compliance with safety standards


This inverter has the “Safe Torque Off” safety function that complies with safety standards.
To ensure safety performance, however, the mechanical system with which this inverter is used has to adhere to
such standards as a whole.
To be more specific, in order for the system to satisfy the following safety standards, it needs to be configured, as
shown on the next page, with the Safe Torque Off terminal (STO terminal on the control terminal board) so that it will
coast or decelerate to a stop in the event of a failure.
To ensure that the motor coasts or decelerates to a stop if an unusual event occurs, the Safe Torque Off circuit is
designed with redundancy and it has a diagnosis circuit that determines whether the unusual event is at a
permissible level or not, in addition to a hardware circuit and software that cut off the operation signal if the unusual
event is judged impermissible. This safety function is certified by the certification organization “INERIS.”
● This inverter meets the IEC/EN61508 SIL2 requirements.
(The term “SIL” is an acronym for “Safety Integrity Level,” which is a safety performance scale.)
● This inverter falls under Category 3 of the safety standard EN954-1 for mechanical systems.
● This inverter supports the two stopping methods defined in IEC/EN61800-5-2.
One is “STO” which refers to “coast and stop”.
EN61508 is an international standard that defines safety performance required for systems provided with electric and
electronic programmable devices, and SIL2 applies to systems that are configured with dangerous failure rates of as
low as 10-6 to 10-7, as shown in the table below. For the relationship between SIL and inverter configuration, see the
following pages.
<<Target for IEC/EN61508 safety performance scale>>
SIL Heavy-duty operation mode or continuous operation mode (Hourly dangerous failure rate)
4 10-9 ~ 10-8
3 10-8 ~ 10-7
2 10-7 ~ 10-6
1 10-6 ~ 10-5

I-8
E6581697

The European standard EN954-1, a basic safety standard for mechanical system, categorizes machines by degree
of danger.
Placed in Category 3 are machines that are designed with redundancy so that a single failure will not cause a
degradation in their safety performance.
For the relationship between each category and the safety function, see the table below.

<<Categories relating to safety according to EN 954-1>>


Categories Basic safety principle Control system requirements Behavior in the event of a fault
B Selection of components Control in accordance with good Possible loss of safety
that conform to relevant engineering practice. function.
standards.
1 Selection of components Use of tried and tested components Possible loss of safety
and basic safety and proven safety principles. function, but with less
principles. probability of this than with B
2 Selection of components Cyclic testing. The test intervals Fault detected at each test.
and basic safety must be suited to the machine and
principles. its applications.
3 Structure of the safety A single fault must not cause loss of Safety function ensured,
circuits. the safety function. except in the event of an
This single fault must be detected if accumulation of faults.
reasonably practicable.
4 Structure of the safety A single fault must not cause loss of Safety function always
circuits. the safety function. ensured.
This fault must be detected at or
before the next demand on the
safety function.
An accumulation of faults must not
cause loss of the safety function.
The three stopping methods described on the following pages were selected in accordance with IEC60204-1.
Stopping method 1 (Stop category 0): Stops the mechanical system by cutting off the power supply immediately.
Stopping method 2 (Stop category 1): First controls the mechanical system to stop it, and then cuts off the power supply.
Stopping method 3 (Stop category 2): First cut off the power supply, and then controls the mechanical system to stop it.
9
Caution
For preventive maintenance, check at least once a year whether the Safe Torque Off safety
function operates normally.

Mandatory
action

I-9
E6581697

Safety category1: EN954-1 category1, IEC/EN61508, SIL1


Stop category1: IEC/EN60204-1

Coast stop under the control of the MC in the main circuit

(1) An example of connection for operation in sink mode (common: CC)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is not used. This connection falls under Stop Category 0 defined in
IEC/EN60204-1.
Braking resistor (option)

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB


Motor
MCCB1 MC1
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 *1 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

MCCB2

B1
400/200V
T1 transformer (a)
(400V class only) F Forward run signal
CP R Reverse run signal
RES Reset
Default
S1 Preset speed 1 settings
Rs STO
MC1 S2 Preset speed 2
S3

9 +SU Preset speed 3


*2 CC Common
Control power supply FLA
backup (option) FLB
b-contact of Surge SOURCE P24
suppressor S Speed reach
overload relay *3
Rs W PLC signal output
1 OUT Ry
FLC
Rs SINK
NO
PB1 (Run) PB2 (Stop) S LOGIC
W CC
2 PTC
From (a)

FM CC VIC VIB VIA PP

(a)
(a) Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
+ (a)
Frequency
meter
Voltage signal : 0~+10V
(a) (or -10~+10V)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-10
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
MC1 Magnetic condactor
MCCB2 Circuit breaker for control transformer
T1 Control transformer 400/200V (For 400V class only)
CP Circuit protector
PB1 Push button switch (Run)
PB2 Push button switch (Stop/emergency stop)
Rs Control relay
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: To back up the inverter’s internal power supply that supplies control power, an external control power backup
device (CPS002Z - optional) is required. The optional control power backup device can be used with both 240V
and 500V classes.
*3: By default, the FL relay is set as a failure FL output relay.

I-11
E6581697

Safety category1: EN954-1 category1, IEC/EN61508, SIL1


Stop category0: IEC/EN60204-1

Coast stop under the control of the MC in the main circuit

(2) An example of connection for operation in source mode (common: P24)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is not used. This connection falls under Stop Category 0 defined in
IEC/EN60204-1.

Braking resistor (option)

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB


Motor
MCCB1 MC1
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 *1 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3

MCCB2

B1

T1 Transformer (a)
F Forward run signal
CP R Reverse run signal
RES Reset
S1 Default
Preset speed 1
Rs STO settings
MC1 S2 Preset speed 2

9
S3 Preset speed 3
+SU
*2
P24 Common
Control power supply FLA
backup (option) OUT
FLB
b-contact of Surge SOURCE NO Ry
suppressor *3
S Speed reach
overload relay Rs W PLC signal output
1 CC
FLC
Rs SINK

PB1 (Run) PB2 (Stop) S LOGIC


W
2 PTC
From (a)

FM CC VIC VIB VIA PP

(a)
(a) Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
+ (a)
Frequency
meter
Voltage signal : 0~+10V
(a) (or -10~+10V)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-12
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
MC1 Magnetic condactor
MCCB2 Circuit breaker for control transformer
T1 Control transformer 400/200V (For 400V class only)
CP Circuit protector
PB1 Push button switch (Run)
PB2 Push button switch (Stop/emergency stop)
Rs Control relay
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: To back up the inverter’s internal power supply that supplies control power, an external control power backup
device (CPS002Z - optional) is required. The optional control power backup device can be used with both 240V
and 500V classes.
*3: By default, the FL relay is set as a failure FL output relay.

I-13
E6581697

Safety category3: EN954-1 category3, IEC/EN61508, SIL2


Stop category0: IEC/EN60204-1

Coast stop under the control of STO

(3) An example of connection for operation in sink mode (common: CC)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is used to connect a safety device. The emergency stop circuit is
supervised by the external safety relay. This safety relay can be shared among several inverters.
• If the STO terminal is turned off, the motor will coast and stop. This operation falls under Stop Category 0
defined in IEC/EN60204-1.
• The motor is prevented from restarting automatically before the STO terminal is turned back on.
• When using the inverter to control the operation of a mechanical brake (for example, when using with a hoist
or crane), connect the cable from the output terminal of the safety relay to the brake control circuit.

Braking resistor (option)

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB


Motor
MCCB1
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 *1 V/T2
M
T/L3 W/T3
L1(+) F1
Pb2
*2
*4
N (-)
B1 ESC
(a) Pb1 *4
F Forward run signal *3
A2 A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 Y43
R Reverse run signal XPSACB2
RES Reset

9
Logic K1
S1 Default
Preset speed 1
settings
S2 Preset speed 2 K2
S3 Preset speed 3
CC 24V, 48V, 115V, 230V K1 K2
Common
A2 PE 14 24 34 Y44

FLA
FLB +SU
SOURCE *5
S STO
W PLC
1 (a)
FLC SINK P24 Speed reach
OUT Ry signal output
S LOGIC
W
2 PTC NO

From (a) CC

FM CC VIB VIC VIA PP

(a)
(a) Voltage signal : 0~+10V
+ (a) (or -10~+10V)
Frequency
meter
Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
(a)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-14
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
B2 Safety relay: XPS-AC (manufactured by Schneider Electric)
F1 Fuse
Pb1 Push button switch 2b contact (for emergency stop)
Pb2 Push button switch (for reset and start)
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: Supply voltage: AC/DC24V, AC48V, AC115V, AC230V
*3: If an emergency stop command is issued, the STO terminal will be turned off to coast and stop the motor.
*4: Pb2 is used to reset/start the inverter after the power is turned on or in the event of an emergency stop.
ESC is used to set reset/start conditions for the external device.
*5: To connect a safety relay to the STO terminal, use a coaxial cable RG174/U (MIL-C17) or KX3B (NFC93-550)
2.54 mm or more in outside diameter and 2 m or less in length. When using a shielded cable, ground it.

I-15
E6581697

Safety category3: EN954-1 category3, IEC/EN61508, SIL2


Stop category0: IEC/EN60204-1

Coast stop under the control of STO

(4) An example of connection for operation in source mode (common: P24)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is used to connect a safety device. The emergency stop circuit is
supervised by the external safety relay. This safety relay can be shared among several inverters.
• If the STO terminal is turned off, the motor will coast and stop. This operation falls under Stop Category 0
defined in IEC/EN60204-1.
• The motor is prevented from restarting automatically before the STO terminal is turned back on.
• When using the inverter to control the operation of a mechanical brake (for example, when using with a hoist
or crane), connect the cable from the output terminal of the safety relay to the brake control circuit.

Braking resistor (option)

PA/+ PC/- PBe PB


Motor
MCCB1
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 *1 V/T2
M
T/L3 W/T3
L1(+) F1
Pb2
*2
*4
N (-)
B1 ESC
Pb1 *4
*3
(a) A2 A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 Y43
F Forward run signal XPSACB2
R K1

9
Reverse run signal Logic
RES Reset Default
S1 settings K2
Preset speed 1
S2 Preset speed 2
24V, 48V, 115V, 230V K1 K2
S3 Preset speed 3
A2 PE 14 24 34 Y44
CC
FLA
+SU
FLB *5
SOURCE STO
S
W PLC (a)
1 P24
FLC SINK
OUT
S LOGIC NO Ry
W Speed reach
2 PTC CC signal output

From (a)

FM CC VIB VIC VIA PP

(a)
(a) Voltage signal : 0~+10V
+ (a) (or -10~+10V)
Frequency
meter
Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
(a)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-16
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
B2 Safety relay: XPS-AC (manufactured by Schneider Electric)
F1 Fuse
Pb1 Push button switch 2b contact (for emergency stop)
Pb2 Push button switch (for reset and start)
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: Supply voltage: AC/DC24V, AC48V, AC115V, AC230V
*3: If an emergency stop command is issued, the STO terminal will be turned off to coast and stop the motor.
*4: Pb2 is used to reset/start the inverter after the power is turned on or in the event of an emergency stop.
ESC is used to set reset/start conditions for the external device.
*5: To connect a safety relay to the STO terminal, use a coaxial cable RG174/U (MIL-C17) or KX3B (NFC93-550)
2.54 mm or more in outside diameter and 2 m or less in length. When using a shielded cable, ground it.

I-17
E6581697

Safety category3: EN954-1 category3, IEC/EN61508, SIL2


Stop category1: IEC/EN60204-1

Deceleration stop under the control of STO

(5) An example of connection for operation in sink mode (common: CC)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is used to connect a safety device. The emergency stop circuit is
supervised by the external safety relay. This safety relay can be shared among several inverters.
• In the event of an emergency stop, the external safety relay issues a deceleration command to the inverter.
At this command, the motor deceleration stops. Then, the safety relay turns off the STO terminal on expiration
of the time limit (max. 30 sec) set for the relay. This operation falls under Stop Category 1 defined in
IEC/EN60204-1.
• For this connection, the function of issuing the forward run command (2) needs to be assigned to the F
terminal, and the function of issuing the reverse run command (4) to the R terminal.

Braking resistor (option)


L1(+) F1
(+) Pb1
*2 (-)
*3
A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 57 67 77 Y+
PA/+ PC/- PBe PB XPS ATE
K1 K2
Motor Logic
- + 1 2
MCCB1
R/L1 U/T1 K1
K1 K3
S/L2 *1 V/T2 M 24V K3 K1 K2 K4 K2
T/L3 W/T3 115V K3 K2 K4
230V
K4

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 24 58 68 78 Y88 ~ Y91


B1 (a) N (-)
F Pb1 ESC *4

9 FLA
FLB
R
RES
S1
Reset
Preset speed 1 Default
*4

S2 Preset speed 2 settings


S3 Preset speed 3
CC
FLC

SOURCE
S +SU
W PLC *6
1 STO
SINK (a)
P24
S Speed reach
LOGIC
W OUT Ry signal output
2 PTC
NO

CC
From (a)

FM CC VIB VIC VIA PP

(a)
(a) Voltage signal : 0~+10V
+ (a) (or -10~+10V)
Frequency
meter Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
(a)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-18
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
B2 Safety relay: XPS-ATE (manufactured by Schneider Electric)
F1 Fuse
Pb1 Push button switch 2b contact (for emergency stop)
Pb2 Push button switch (for reset and start)
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: Supply voltage: AC/DC24V, AC48V, AC115V, AC230V
*3: If an emergency stop command is issued, the STO terminal will be turned off to coast and stop the motor.
*4: Pb2 is used to reset/start the inverter after the power is turned on or in the event of an emergency stop.
ESC is used to set reset/start conditions for the external device.
*5: If a deceleration time of more than 30 seconds is required, use a safety relay XPS-AV, which allows you to set
the deceleration time at a maximum of 300 seconds.
*6: To connect a safety relay to the STO terminal, use a coaxial cable RG174/U (MIL-C17) or KX3B (NFC93-550)
2.54 mm or more in outside diameter and 2 m or less in length. When using a shielded cable, ground it.

I-19
E6581697

Safety category3: EN954-1 category3, IEC/EN61508, SIL2


Stop category1: IEC/EN60204-1

Deceleration stop under the control of STO

(6) An example of connection for operation in source mode (common: P24)


• In this connection, the STO terminal is used to connect a safety device. The emergency stop circuit is
supervised by the external safety relay. This safety relay can be shared among several inverters.
• In the event of an emergency stop, the external safety relay issues a deceleration command to the inverter.
At this command, the motor slows down and stops. Then, the safety relay turns off the STO terminal on
expiration of the time limit (max. 30 sec) set for the relay. This operation falls under Stop Category 1 defined in
IEC/EN60204-1.
• For this connection, the function of issuing the forward run command (2) needs to be assigned to the F
terminal, and the function of issuing the reverse run command (4) to the R terminal.

Braking resistor (option)


L1(+) F1
(-) (+) Pb1
*2
*3
A1 S21 S11 B1 S12 S22 13 23 57 67 77 Y+
PA/+ PC/- PBe PB XPS ATE
K1 K2
Motor Logic
MCCB1 - + 1 2
R/L1 U/T1
K1
K1 K3
S/L2 *1 V/T2 M 24V K3 K1 K2 K4 K2
T/L3 W/T3 115V K3 K2 K4
230V
K4

A2 PE S33 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 24 58 68 78 Y88 ~ Y91


B1
(a) N (-)
F Pb1 ESC *4

9 FLA
FLB
R
RES
S1
Reset
Preset speed 1 Default
*4

S2 Preset speed 2 settings


S3 Preset speed 3
FLC CC

+SU
*6
STO
SOURCE (a)
S
W PLC
1 P24
SINK
OUT
S LOGIC
W NO Ry
Speed reach
2 PTC signal output
CC
From (a)

FM CC VIB VIC VIA PP

(a)
(a) Voltage signal : 0~+10V
+ (a) (or -10~+10V)
Frequency
meter Current signal : 4(0)~20mA
(a)

7.5V-1mA
External potentiometer (1k-10kΩ)
(or 0-10V/4-20mA)
(or voltage signal between VIA and CC:0~10V)

I-20
E6581697

Symbols Description
B1 VF-MB1 inverter
MCCB1 Circuit breaker
B2 Safety relay: XPS-ATE (manufactured by Schneider Electric)
F1 Fuse
Pb1 Push button switch 2b contact (for emergency stop)
Pb2 Push button switch (for reset and start)
*1: Single-phase models are R/L1 and S/L2/N terminals.
*2: Supply voltage: AC/DC24V, AC48V, AC115V, AC230V
*3: If an emergency stop command is issued, the STO terminal will be turned off to coast and stop the motor.
*4: Pb2 is used to reset/start the inverter after the power is turned on or in the event of an emergency stop.
ESC is used to set reset/start conditions for the external device.
*5: If a deceleration time of more than 30 seconds is required, use a safety relay XPS-AV, which allows you to set
the deceleration time at a maximum of 300 seconds.
*6: To connect a safety relay to the STO terminal, use a coaxial cable RG174/U (MIL-C17) or KX3B (NFC93-550)
2.54 mm or more in outside diameter and 2 m or less in length. When using a shielded cable, ground it.

I-21
E6581697

10. Peripheral devices


Warning
• When using switchgear for the inverter, it must be installed in a cabinet.
Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious injury.
Mandatory
action
• Connect earth cables securely.
Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock or fire in case of a failure or short-circuit or electric
leak.
Be Grounded

10.1 Selection of wiring materials and devices

„ Selection of cable size


Cable size (mm2) (Note 4)
Power circuit Braking resistor
Grounding earth cable
Applicable (Note 1, 5) (optional)
Voltage class
motor (kW) For Japan For Japan For Japan
IEC IEC IEC
(JEAC800 (JEAC800 (JEAC800
compliant compliant compliant
1-2005) 1-2005) 1-2005)
0.2 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
0.4 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
1 phase
240V class 0.75 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
1.5 2.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
2.2 4.0 2.0 1.5 2.0 4.0 3.5
0.4 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
0.75 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0
1.5 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.0

3 phase
500V class
2.2
4.0
1.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0 10
5.5 4.0 2.0 1.5 2.0 4.0 3.5
7.5 6.0 3.5 2.5 2.0 6.0 3.5
11 10.0 5.5 4.0 2.0 10.0 5.5
15 16.0 8.0 6.0 3.5 16.0 5.5
18.5 16.0 8.0 - - - -

Note 1: Sizes of the wires connected to the input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 (Single-phase models are R/L1
and S/L2/N) and the output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 when the length of each wire does not exceed
30m. If there is a need to bring the inverter into UL compliance, use wires specified in chapter 9.
Note 2: For the control circuit, use shielded wires 0.75 mm2 or more in diameter.
Note 3: For grounding, use a cable with a size equal to or larger than the above.
Note 4: The cable sizes specified in the above table apply to HIV cables (copper cables shielded with an insulator
with a maximum allowable temperature of 75°C) used at an ambient temperature of 50°C or less.
Note 5: In case of aul=2 setting, be sure to use the cable size of power circuit for 1 rating up motor.

J-1
E6581697

„ Selection of wiring devices


Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) Magnetic contactor
Input current (A)
Applicable Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (MC) (Note 1 to 4)
Voltage motor Without reactor with ACL Without reactor with ACL
class (kW) Without
With ACL Rated Rated Rated Rated
reactor MCCB type MCCB type
current current current Model current Model
(ELCB type) (ELCB type)
(A) (A) (A) (A)
0.2 3.4 2.4 5 5 20 20
0.4 6.0 4.4 10 10 20 CA13 20
1 phase CA13
NJ30E NJ30E
240V 0.75 10.1 8.1 15 10 20 20
class (NJV30E) (NJV30E)
1.5 17.6 15.3 30 20 32 20
CA20
2.2 23.9 21.3 30 30 32 32 CA20

0.4 2.1 1.5 5 5 20 20


0.75 3.6 2.6 5 5 20 20
1.5 6.5 4.7 10 10 20 CA13 20
NJ30E NJ30E CA13
2.2 8.7 6.4 15 10 20 20
(NJV30E) (NJV30E)
3 phase
4.0 13.7 10.3 20 15 20 20
500V
class 5.5 20.7 14.0 30 20 32 20
CA20
Note 6) 7.5 26.5 18.1 30 30 32 32
NJ50EB CA20
11 36.6 24.1 50 40 NJ50EB 50 CA25 32
(NJV50EB)
(NJV50EB)
15 47.3 36.6 60 50 60 CA35 50 CA25
NJ100FB
(NJV100FB) NJ100EB
18.5 52.6 44.0 75 60 80 CA50 60 CA35
(NJV100EB)
The recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) must be connected to primary side of each inverter to
protect the wiring system.

Note 1: Models made by Toshiba Industrial Products Sales Corporation are shown.
Note 2: Be sure to attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the relay and the magnetic contactor.
Note 3: When using the auxiliary contacts 2a of the magnetic contactor MC for the control circuit, connect the

10 contacts 2a in parallel to increase reliability.


Note 4: When a motor is driven by commercial power supply using commercial power supply / inverter switching
circuit, use a magnetic contactor appropriated AC-3 class the motor rated current.
Note 5: Select an MCCB with a current breaking rating appropriate to the capacity of the power supply, because
short-circuit currents vary greatly depending on the capacity of the power supply and the condition of the
wiring system. The MCCB, MC and ELCB in this table were selected, on the assumption that a power
supply with a normal capacity would be used.
Note 6: For the operation and control circuits, regulate the voltage at 200V to 240V with a step-down transformer
for 500V class.
Note 7: In case of aul=2 setting, be sure to select the wiring device for 1 rating up motor.
Note 8: Regarding influence of leakage current, refer to section 1.4.3.

J-2
E6581697

10.2 Installation of a magnetic contactor


If using the inverter without installing a magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit, use an MCCB (with a
power cut off device) to open the primary circuit when the inverter protective circuit is activated.
When using an optional brake module, install a magnetic contactor (MC) or molded-case circuit breaker with a
power cutoff device on the primary power supply of the inverter, so that the power circuit opens when the failure
detection relay (FL) in the inverter or the externally installed overload relay is actuated.

■ Magnetic contactor in the primary circuit


To detach the inverter from the power supply in any of the following cases, insert a magnetic contactor
(primary-side magnetic contactor) between the inverter and the power supply.

(1) If the motor overload relay is tripped


(2) If the protective detector (FL) built into the inverter is activated
(3) In the event of a power failure (for prevention of auto-restart)
(4) If the resistor protective relay is tripped when a braking resistor and braking module (option) are used

When using the inverter with no magnetic contactor (MC) on the primary side, install a molded-case circuit
breaker with a voltage tripping coil instead of an MC and adjust the circuit breaker so that it will be tripped if the
protective relay referred to above is activated. To detect a power failure, use an undervoltage relay or the like.

Inverter
MCCB MC
R/L1 U/T1
Motor
Power supply S/L2 V/T2 M

T/L3 W/T3

FLA

FLB F
Forward run 10
FLC R
Reverse run
CC

Example of connection of a magnetic contactor in the primary circuit

Notes on wiring
• When frequently switching between start and stop, do not use the magnetic contactor on the primary side as
an on-off switch for the inverter.
Instead, stop and start the inverter by using terminals F and CC (forward run) or R and CC (reverse run).
• Be sure to attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the magnetic contactor (MC).

J-3
E6581697

„ Magnetic contactor in the secondary circuit


A magnetic contactor may be installed on the secondary side to switch controlled motors or supply
commercial power to the load when the inverter is out of operation.
Notes on wiring
• Be sure to interlock the magnetic contactor on the secondary side with the power supply to prevent commercial
power from being applied to the inverter output terminals.
• When installing a magnetic contactor (MC) between the inverter and the motor, avoid turning the magnetic
contactor on or off during operation. Turning the magnetic contactor on or off during operation causes a current
to rush into the inverter which could lead to malfunction.

10.3 Installation of an overload relay


1) This inverter has an electronic-thermal overload protective function.
In the following cases, however, an overload relay suitable for the adjustment of the motor electronic
thermal protection level () and appropriate to the motor used should be installed between the inverter
and the motor.
• When using a motor with a current rating different to that of the corresponding Toshiba general-purpose
motor
• When operating a single motor with an output smaller than that of the applicable standard motor or more
than one motor simultaneously.
2) When using this inverter to operate a constant-torque motor, such as the Toshiba VF motor, adjust the
protection characteristic of the electronic thermal protection unit (0m) to the VF motor use.
3) It is recommended to use a motor with a thermal relay embedded in the motor coil to give sufficient
protection to the motor, especially when it runs in a low-speed range.

10

J-4
E6581697

10.4 Optional external devices


The following external devices are optionally available for this inverter series.

Power supply

Molded-case circuit breaker


MCCB

Magnetic contactor
MC

(1) Input AC reactor


(ACL)

(6) Parameter writer : RKP002Z


(7) Remote keypad : RKP007Z
(2) EMC noise reduction filter
(Compliant with European N.F (8) Remote control panel : CBVR-7B1
standards) (3) Zero-phase reactor
core-type
(9) Frequency meter : QS60T
radio noise (10) FRH kit : FRH kit
reduction filter
(11) USB communication converter : USB001Z
(12) Profibus DP communication option : PDP003Z
(13) DeviceNet communication option : DEV003Z
Inverter (14) EtherNet IP/ Modbus TCP communication option 10
: IPE002Z

(4) Braking resistor

(3) Zero-phase reactor


core-type
N.F
radio noise
reduction filter

(5) Motor-end surge voltage


suppression filter
(for 500V models only)

M Motor

J-5
E6581697

„ How to mount the communication option

Turn off all input power, wait at least 15 minutes, and confirm that the charge lamp of inverter is no longer lit.

・Mounting ・Dismounting

①Take out the option cover in the inverter ①Push the tab for release
②Insert the option into the inverter. ②Pull the option out at the same


■Fix the wiring of option to the inverter

・For inverter capacity : 4.0kW or less ・For inverter capacity : 5.5kW or more

10
Fix by plastic band etc.

J-6
E6581697

11. Table of parameters and data


11.1 Frequency setting parameter
Minimum
setting unit User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Default setting Reference
Panel/Comm setting
unication
 Operation Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0 3.2.2
frequency of
operation panel

11.2 Basic parameters


• Five navigation functions
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 - History function - - Displays parameters in groups of five - 4.3
in the reverse order to that in which 5.1
their settings were changed.
* (Possible to edit)
 0093 Guidance function - - 0: - 0 4.3
1: - 5.2
2: Preset speed guidance
3: Analog signal operation guidance
4: Motor 1 & 2 switching operation
guidance
5: Motor constant setting guidance
 0094 Overload - - 0: - 0 3.5
characteristic 1: Constant torque characteristic 5.3
selection (150%-60s) 6.14
2: Variable torque characteristic
(120%-60s)
 0000 Automatic - - 0: Disabled (manual setting) 0 5.4
acceleration/ 1: Automatic
deceleration 2: Automatic (only at acceleration)
 0001 Torque boost - - 0: Disabled 0 5.5
setting macro
function
1: Automatic torque boost + auto-
tuning
2: Vector control + auto-tuning
11
3: Energy saving + auto-tuning

K-1
E6581697

• Basic parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0003 Command mode - - 0: Terminal board 1 3.2
selection 1: Panel keypad (including remote 5.6
keypad) 7.3
2: RS485 communication
3: CANopen communication
4: Communication option
 0004 Frequency setting - - 0: Setting dial 1(save even if power is 0 3.2
mode selection 1 off) 5.6
1: Terminal board VIA 6.3.4
2: Terminal board VIB 6.6.1
3: Setting dial 2(press in center to 7.3
save)
4: RS485 communication
5: UP/DOWN from external logic
input
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
 0005 Meter selection - - 0: Output frequency 0 3.4
1: Output current 5.7
2: Frequency reference
3: Input voltage (DC detection)
4: Output voltage (command value)
5: Input power
6: Output power
7: Torque
8: -
9: Motor cumulative load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative
load factor
12: Frequency setting value (after
compensation)
13: VIA input value
14: VIB input value
15: Fixed output 1
(output current 100% equivalent)
16: Fixed output 2
(output current 50% equivalent)
17: Fixed output 3

11 (Other than the output current)


18: RS485 communication data
19: For adjustments ( set value is
displayed.)
20: VIC input value
21: Pulse train input value
22: -
23: PID feedback value
24: Integral input power
25: Integral output power
 0006 Meter adjustment - - - -
gain
 0008 Forward/reverse - - 0: Forward run 0 5.8
run selection 1: Reverse run
(Panel keypad) 2: Forward run (F/R switching on
remote keypad)
3: Reverse run (F/R switching on
remote keypad)

K-2
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0009 Acceleration time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0 5.4
1
 0010 Deceleration time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0
1
 0011 Maximum Hz 0.1/0.01 30.0-500.0 80.0 5.9
frequency
 0012 Upper limit Hz 0.1/0.01 0.5-  *1 5.10
frequency
 0013 Lower limit Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-  0.0
frequency
 0014 Base frequency 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 20.0-500.0 *1 5.11
 0409 Base frequency V 1/0.1 50-330 (240V class) *1 5.11
voltage 1 50-660 (500V class) 6.15.6
 0015 V/F control mode - - 0: V/F constant *1 5.12
selection 1: Variable torque
2: Automatic torque boost control
3: Vector control
4: Energy-saving
5: Dynamic energy-saving
(For fan and pump)
6: PM motor control
7: V/F 5-point setting
8: -
 0016 Torque boost % 0.1/0.1 0.0-30.0 *2 5.13
value 1
 0600 Motor electronic- % 1/1 10-100 100 3.5
thermal protection (A) 5.14
level 1 6.24.1
 0017 Electronic-thermal - - Setting Overload protection OL stall 0 3.5
protection 0 valid invalid 5.14
1 Standard valid valid
characteristic 2 motor invalid invalid
selection 3 invalid valid
4 valid invalid
5 valid valid
VF motor
6 invalid invalid
7 invalid valid
 0018 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0 3.6
frequency 1 5.15
 0019 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 2
 0020 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 3
 0021 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0

 0022
frequency 4
Preset-speed
frequency 5
Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0 11
 0023 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 6
 0024 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 7
 0025 Process input Hz 0.1/0.01 f368 -  0.0 5.16
value of PID 6.20
control
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.
*8: These parameters can be changed to 0.01s unit by setting f519=1.

K-3
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0007 Default setting - - 0: - 0 3.1
1: 50Hz default setting 4.3
2: 60Hz default setting 4.3.2
3: Default setting 1 (Initialization) 5.17
4: Trip record clear
5: Cumulative operation time clear
6: Initialization of type information
7: Save user setting parameters
8. Load user setting parameters
9. Cumulative fan operation time
record clears
10, 11: -
12: Number of starting clear
13: Default setting 2 (Complete
initialization)
 0099 Checking the - - 0: Start setup menu *1 3.1
region setting 1: Japan (read only) 4.4
*5 2: North America (read only) 5.18
3: Asia (read only)
4: Europe (read only)
 0050 Registered - - 0: Standard setting mode at power on 0 4.5
parameters display 1: Easy setting mode at power on 5.19
selection 2: Easy setting mode only
 - Extended parameter - - - - - 4.2.2
starting at 100
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 200
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 300
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 400
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 500
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 600
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 700
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 800
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at 900
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at A
 - Extended parameter - - - - -
starting at C

11  - Automatic edit


function
- - - - - 4.3.1
5.20
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*5: Set “0” to activate the setup menu. Refer to section 11.5 about setting contents selected in setup menu.

K-4
E6581697

11.3 Extended parameters


• Input/output parameters 1
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0100 Low-speed signal Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0 6.1.1
output frequency
 0101 Speed reach Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0 6.1.3
setting frequency
 0102 Speed reach Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 2.5 6.1.2
detection band 6.1.3
 0104 Always active - - 0-153 *6 0 (No 6.3.1
function selection 1 function)
 0105 Priority selection - - 0: Reverse 1 6.2.1
(Both F and R are 1: Deceleration Stop
ON)
 0107 Analog input - - 0: 0-+10V 0 6.2.2
terminal selection 1: -10-+10V 6.6.2
(VIB) 7.3
 0108 Always active - - 0-153 *6 0 (No 6.3.1
function selection 2 function)
 0109 Analog/logic input 0: Analog input for communications 0 6.2.3
- -
selection VIB - analog input 6.3.2
(VIA/VIB) 1: VIA - analog input 6.6.2
VIB - contact input (Sink) 7.2.1
2: VIA - analog input 7.3
VIB - contact input (Source)
3: VIA - contact input (Sink)
VIB - contact input (Sink)
4: VIA - contact input (Source)
VIB - contact input (Source)
 0110 Always active - - 0-153 *6 6 6.3.1
function selection 3 (ST)
 0111 Input terminal - - 0-203 *6 2 6.3.2
selection 1A (F) (F) 7.2.1
 0112 Input terminal - - 4
selection 2A (R) (R)
 0113 Input terminal - - 8
selection 3A (RES) (RES)
 0114 Input terminal - - 10
selection 4A (S1) (SS1)



0115

0116
Input terminal
selection 5 (S2)
Input terminal
-

-
-

-
12
(SS2)
14
11
selection 6 (S3) (SS3)
 0117 Input terminal - - 8-55 *6 16 6.3.2
selection 7 (VIB) (SS4) 7.2.1
 0118 Input terminal - - 24
selection 8 (VIA) (AD2)
*6: Refer to section 11.6 for details about input terminal function.

K-5
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0130 Output terminal - - 4 6.3.3
selection 1A (LOW) 7.2.2
(RY-RC)
 0131 Output terminal - - 6
selection 2A (OUT) (RCH)
 0132 Output terminal - - 10
selection 3 (FL) 0-255 *7 (FL)
 0137 Output terminal - - 255
selection 1B (always
(RY-RC) ON)
 0138 Output terminal - - 255
selection 2B (OUT) (always
ON)
 0139 Output terminal - - 0:  and  0
logic selection  and 
(RY-RC, OUT) 1:  or 
 and 
2:  and 
 or 
3:  or 
 or 
 0144 Input terminal ms 1/1 1-1000 1 7.2.1
response time
 0146 Logic input / pulse - - 0: Logic input 0 6.6.5
train input 1: Pulse train input
selection (S2)
 0147 Logic input / PTC - - 0: Logic input 0 2.3.2
input selection (S3) 1: PTC input 6.24.15
 0151 Input terminal - - 0 6.3.2
selection 1B (F) 7.2.1
 0152 Input terminal - - 0
selection 2B (R)
 0153 Input terminal - - 0
selection 3B (RES)
0-203 *6
 0154 Input terminal - - 0
selection 4B (S1)
 0155 Input terminal - - 0
selection 1C (F)
 0156 Input terminal - - 0
selection 2C (R)

11  0167 Frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 2.5 6.3.4


command
agreement
detection range
*6: Refer to section 11.6 for details about input terminal function.
*7: Refer to section 11.7 for details about output terminal function.

K-6
E6581697

• Basic parameter 2
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0170 Base frequency 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 20.0-500.0 *1 6.4.1
 0171 Base frequency V 1/0.1 50-330 (240V class) *1
voltage 2 50-660 (500V class)
 0172 Torque boost % 0.1/0.1 0.0-30.0 *2
value 2
 0173 Motor electronic- % 1/1 10-100 100 3.5
thermal protection (A) 6.4.1
level 2 6.24.1
 0185 Stall prevention % 1/1 10-199, 150 6.4.1
level 2 (A) 200 (disabled) 6.24.2
 0190 V/f 5-point setting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-fh 0.0 5.12
VF1 frequency 6.5
 0191 V/f 5-point setting % 0.1/0.01 0.0-125.0 0.0
VF1 voltage
 0192 V/f 5-point setting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-fh 0.0
VF2 frequency
 0193 V/f 5-point setting % 0.1/0.01 0.0-125.0 0.0
VF2 voltage
 0194 V/f 5-point setting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-fh 0.0
VF3 frequency
 0195 V/f 5-point setting % 0.1/0.01 0.0-125.0 0.0
VF3 voltage
 0196 V/f 5-point setting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-fh 0.0
VF4 frequency
 0197 V/f 5-point setting % 0.1/0.01 0.0-125.0 0.0
VF4 voltage
 0198 V/f 5-point setting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-fh 0.0
VF5 frequency
 0199 V/f 5-point setting % 0.1/0.01 0.0-125.0 0.0
VF5 voltage

• Frequency parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0200 Frequency priority - - 0:  (Switchable to  by 0 6.6.1
selection terminal input) 7.3
1:  (Switchable to  at

 0201 VIA input point 1 % 1/1


1.0Hz or less of designated
frequency)
0-100 0 6.6.2
11
setting 7.3
 0202 VIA input point 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 0.0
frequency
 0203 VIA input point 2 % 1/1 0-100 100
setting
 0204 VIA input point 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 *1
frequency
 0205 VIA input point 1 % 1/0.01 0-250 0 6.26
rate
 0206 VIA input point 2 % 1/0.01 0-250 100
rate
 0207 Frequency setting - - 0-11 (Same as ) 1 6.3.4
mode selection 2 6.6.1
7.3
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.

K-7
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0209 Analog input filter ms 1/1 2-1000 6.6.2
64
7.3
 0210 VIB input point 1 % 1/1 -100-+100 0
setting
 0211 VIB input point 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 0.0
frequency
 0212 VIB input point 2 % 1/1 -100-+100 100
setting
 0213 VIB input point 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 *1
frequency
 0214 VIB input point 1 % 1/0.01 -250-+250 0 6.26
rate 6.27
 0215 VIB input point 2 % 1/0.01 -250-+250 100
rate
 0216 VIC input point 1 % 1/1 0-100 0 6.6.2
setting 7.3
 0217 VIC input point 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 0.0
frequency
 0218 VIC input point 2 % 1/1 0-100 100
setting
 0219 VIC input point 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 *1
frequency
 0220 VIC input point 1 % 1/0.01 0-250 0 6.26
rate
 0221 VIC input point 2 % 1/0.01 0-250 100
rate
 0239 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 2A
 0240 Starting frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.1-10.0 0.5 6.7.1
setting
 0241 Operation starting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0 6.7.2
frequency
 0242 Operation starting Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
frequency
hysteresis
 0249 PWM carrier kHz 0.1/0.1 2.0-16.0 4.0 6.8.1
frequency during
DC braking
 0250 DC braking Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
starting frequency
 0251 DC braking %(A) 1/1 0-100 50

11  0252
current
DC braking time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-25.5 1.0
 0254 Motor shaft fixing - - 0: Disabled 0 6.8.2
control 1: Enabled (after DC braking)
 0256 Time limit for s 0.1/0.1 0: Disabled 0.0 6.9.1
lower-limit 0.1-600.0
frequency
operation
 0257 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 2B
 0258 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 2C
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-8
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0260 Jog run frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 -20.0 5.0 6.10
 0261 Jog run stopping - - 0: Deceleration stop 0
pattern 1: Coast stop
2: DC braking stop
 0262 Panel jog run - - 0: Invalid 0
operation mode 1: Valid
 0264 External logic s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.1 6.6.3
input - UP
response time
 0265 External logic Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.1
input - UP
frequency steps
 0266 External logic s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.1
input - DOWN
response time
 0267 External logic Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.1
input - DOWN
frequency steps
 0268 Initial value of Hz 0.1/0.01  0.0
UP/DOWN
frequency
 0269 Change of the - - 0: Not changed 1
initial value of 1: Setting of  changed when
UP/DOWN power is turned off
frequency
 0270 Jump frequency 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0 6.11
 0271 Jumping width 1 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-30.0 0.0
 0272 Jump frequency 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
 0273 Jumping width 2 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-30.0 0.0
 0274 Jump frequency 3 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
 0275 Jumping width 3 Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-30.0 0.0
 0287 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0 3.6
frequency 8 6.12
 0288 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 9
 0289 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 10
 0290 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 11
 0291 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0

11
frequency 12
 0292 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 13
 0293 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0
frequency 14
 0294 Preset-speed Hz 0.1/0.01 - 0.0 3.6
frequency 15 6.25
 0295 Bumpless - - 0: Disabled 0 6.13
operation selection 1: Enabled
 0298 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 2D
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-9
E6581697

• Operation mode parameters


Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0300 PWM carrier kHz 0.1/0.1 2.0 -16.0 4.0 6.14
frequency
 0301 Auto-restart - - 0: Disabled 0 6.15.1
control selection 1: At auto-restart after momentary
stop
2: At ST terminal off and on
3: 1+2
4: At start-up
 0302 Regenerative - - 0: Disabled 0 6.15.2
power ride- 1: Regenerative power ride-through
through control control
(Deceleration 2: Deceleration stop during power
stop) failure
3: Synchronized acceleration /
deceleration (signal)
4: Synchronized acceleration /
deceleration (signal + failure)
 0303 Retry selection Times 1/1 0: Disabled 0 6.15.3
(number of times) 1-10
 0304 Dynamic braking - - 0: Disabled 0 6.15.4
selection 1: Enabled, Resistor overload
protection enabled
2: Enabled
3: Enabled, Resistor overload
protection enabled
(At ST terminal on)
4: Enabled (At ST terminal on)
 0305 Overvoltage limit - - 0: Enabled 2 6.15.5
operation 1: Disabled
(Deceleration stop 2: Enabled (Quick deceleration
mode selection) control)
3: Enabled (Dynamic quick
deceleration control)
 0307 Supply voltage - - 0: Supply voltage uncorrected, *1 6.15.6
correction output voltage limited
(output voltage 1: Supply voltage corrected,
limitation) output voltage limited
2: Supply voltage uncorrected,
output voltage unlimited
3: Supply voltage corrected,
output voltage unlimited

11  0308 Dynamic braking Ω 0.1/0.1 1.0-1000 *2 6.15.4


resistance
 0309 Allowable kW 0.01/0.01 0.01-30.00 *2
continuous
braking resistance
 0310 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 3A
 0311 Reverse-run - - 0: Forward/reverse run permitted 0 6.15.7
prohibition 1: Reverse run prohibited
2: Forward run prohibited
 0312 Random mode - - 0: Disabled 0 6.14
1: Random mode 1
2: Random mode 2
3: Random mode 3
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-10
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0316 Carrier frequency - - 0: Carrier frequency without reduction 1 6.14
control mode 1: Carrier frequency with automatic
selection reduction
2: Carrier frequency not reduced
automatically
Support for 500V models
3: Carrier frequency reduced
automatically
Support for 500V models
 0317 Synchronized s 0.1/0.01 0.0-3600 (360.0) 2.0 6.15.2
deceleration time
(time elapsed
between start of
deceleration to
stop)
 0318 Synchronized s 0.1/0.01 0.0-3600 (360.0) 2.0
acceleration time
(time elapsed
between start of
acceleration to
achievement of
specified speed)
 0319 Regenerative % 1/1 100-160 120 6.15.5
over-excitation
upper limit
 0320 Droop gain % 0.1/0.1 0.0-100.0 0.0 6.16
 0323 Droop insensitive % 1/1 0-100 10
torque band
 0324 Droop output filter - 0.1/0.1 0.1-200.0 100.0
 0328 Light-load high- - - 0:Disabled 0 6.17
speed operation 1:High-speed operation speed set
selection automatically (Power running at F
command: Increase)
2:High-speed operation speed set
automatically (Power running at R
command: Increase)
3:High-speed operation speed set
with f330 (Power running at F
command: Increase)
4:High-speed operation speed set
with f330 (Power running at R
command: Increase)
 0329 Light-load high-
speed learning
function
- - 0:No learning
1:Forward run learning
2:Reverse run learning
0
11
 0330 Automatic light- Hz 0.1/0.01 30.0-ul *1
load high-speed
operation
frequency
 0331 Light-load high- Hz 0.1/0.01 5.0-ul 40.0
speed operation
switching lower
limit frequency
 0332 Light-load high- s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.5
speed operation
load waiting time
 0333 Light-load high- s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 1.0
speed operation
load detection
time
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.

K-11
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0334 Light-load high- s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.5 6.17
speed operation
heavy load
detection time
 0335 Switching load % 1/0.01 -250- +250 50
torque during
power running
 0336 Heavy-load torque % 1/0.01 -250- +250 100
during power
running
 0337 Heavy-load torque % 1/0.01 -250- +250 50
during constant
power running
 0338 Switching load % 1/0.01 -250- +250 50
torque during
regenerative
braking
 0340 Creeping time 1 s 0.01/0.01 0.00-10.00 0.00  6.18.1
 0341 Braking mode - - 0: Disabled 0  
selection 1: Forward winding up
2: Reverse winding up
3: Horizontal operation
 0342 Load portion - - 0: Disabled 0  
torque input 1: VIA
selection 2: VIB
3: VIC
4: f343
 0343 Hoisting torque bias % 1/0.01 -250- +250 100  
input (valid only
when =)
 0344 Lowering torque % 1/0.01 0-100 100  
bias multiplier
 0345 Brake release s 0.01/0.01 0.00-10.00 0.05  
time
 0346 Creeping Hz 0.1/0.01 f240 -20.0 3.0  
frequency
 0347 Creeping time 2 s 0.01/0.01 0.00-10.00 0.10  

 0348 Braking time - 1/1 0:Disabled 0  


learning function 1: Learning (0 after adjustment)
0349 Acceleration/decele - 1/1 0:Disabled 0  6.19
11

ration suspend 1:Parameter setting
function 2:Terminal input
 0350 Acceleration Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0  
suspend frequency
 0351 Acceleration s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.0  
suspend time
 0352 Deceleration Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0  
suspend frequency
 0353 Deceleration s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.0  
suspend time
 0359 PID control s 1/1 0-2400 0 6.20
waiting time
 0360 PID control - - 0: Disabled 0
1: Process type PID control
2: Speed type PID control
 0361 Delay filter s 0.1/0.1 0.0-25.0 0.1

 0362 Proportional gain - 0.01/0.01 0.01-100.0 0.30

K-12
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0363 Integral gain - 0.01/0.01 0.01-100.0 0.20 6.20

 0366 Differential gain - 0.01/0.01 0.00-2.55 0.00

 0367 Process upper Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- *1


limit
 0368 Process lower Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
limit
 0369 PID control - - 0: Disabled 0
feedback signal 1: VIA
selection 2: VIB
3: VIC
4 to 6: -
 0372 Process s 0.1/0.1 0.1-600.0 10.0
increasing rate
(speed type PID
control)
 0373 Process s 0.1/0.1 0.1-600.0 10.0
decreasing rate
(speed type PID
control)
 0375 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 3B
 0376 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 3C
 0378 Number of pulse pps 1/1 100-5000 250 6.6.5
train input
 0380 PID - - 0: Forward 0 6.20
forward/reverse 1: Reverse
characteristics
selection
 0382 Hit and stop - - 0: Disabled 0 6.18.2
control 1: Enabled
2: -
 0383 Hit and stop Hz 0.1/0.01 0.1-30.0 5.0
control frequency
 0384 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 3D
 0385 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 3E
 0386 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 3F
 0389 PID control - - 0: fmod/f207 selected 0 6.20
reference signal
selection
1: Terminal board VIA
2: Terminal board VIB
3: fpid
11
4: RS485 communication
5: UP/DOWN from external logic
input
6: CANopen communication
7: Communication option
8: Terminal board VIC
9, 10: -
11: Pulse train input
 0390 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 3G
 0391 Hysteresis for Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-ul 0.2 6.9.1
lower-limit
frequency
operation
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-13
E6581697

• Torque boost parameters 1


Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0400 Auto-tuning - - 0: Auto-tuning disabled 0 6.21

1: Initialization of  (after


execution : 0)
2: Auto-tuning executed
(after execution: 0)
3: -
4: Motor constant auto calculation
(after execution: 0)
5: 4+2 (after execution: 0)
 0401 Slip frequency % 1/1 0-150 50
gain
 0402 Automatic torque % 0.1/0.1 0.1-30.0 *2
boost value
 0405 Motor rated kW 0.01/0.01 0.01-22.00 *2
capacity
 0412 Motor specific - - - - *4
coefficient 1
 0415 Motor rated A 0.1/0.1 0.1-100.0 *2 6.21
current
 0416 Motor no-load % 1/1 10-90 *2
current
 0417 Motor rated min-1 1/1 100-64000 *1
speed
 0441 Power running % 1/0.01 0-249%, 250 6.22.1
torque limit 1 level 250:Disabled
 0443 Regenerative % 1/0.01 0-249%, 250
braking torque 250:Disabled
limit 1 level
 0444 Power running % 1/0.01 0-249%, 250
torque limit 2 level 250:Disabled
 0445 Regenerative % 1/0.01 0-249%, 250
braking torque 250:Disabled
limit 2 level
 0451 Acceleration/decel - 1/1 0: In sync with acceleration / 0 6.22.2
eration operation deceleration
after torque limit 1: In sync with min. time
 0452 Power running s 0.01/0.01 0.00-10.00 0.00 6.22.3
stall continuous
trip detection time
 0454 Constant output - - 0:Constant output limit 0 6.22.1

11  0458
zone torque limit
selection
Motor specific - -
1:Constant torque limit

- - *4
coefficient 2
 0459 Load inertia Times 0.1/0.1 0.1-100.0 1.0 6.21
moment ratio
 0460 Motor specific - - - - *4
coefficient 3
 0461 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 4
 0462 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 5
 0467 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 6
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.
*4: Motor specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-14
E6581697

• Input/output parameters 2
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0470 VIA input bias - 1/1 0-255 128 6.6.4

 0471 VIA input gain - 1/1 0-255 128

 0472 VIB input bias - 1/1 0-255 128

 0473 VIB input gain - 1/1 0-255 128

 0474 VIC input bias - 1/1 0-255 128

 0475 VIC input gain - 1/1 0-255 128

• Torque boost parameters 2


Minimum
Communications setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ications
 0480 Motor specific - - - - *4
coefficient 7
 0485 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 8
 0490 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 9
 0495 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 10
 0499 Motor specific - - - -
coefficient 11
*4: Motor specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

• Acceleration/deceleration time parameters


Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0500 Acceleration time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0 6.23.2
2
 0501 Deceleration time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0
2



0502

0503
Acceleration/decel
eration 1 pattern
Acceleration/decel
-

-
-

-
0: Linear
1: S-pattern 1
2: S-pattern 2
0

0
6.23.1

6.23.2
11
eration 2 pattern
 0504 Acceleration/decel - - 1: Acceleration/deceleration 1 1
eration selection 2: Acceleration/deceleration 2
(1, 2 , 3) 3: Acceleration/deceleration 3
 0505 Acceleration/decel Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0 (disabled) 0.0
eration 1 and 2 0.1-
switching
frequency
 0506 S-pattern lower- % 1/1 0-50 10 6.23.1
limit adjustment
amount
 0507 S-pattern upper- % 1/1 0-50 10
limit adjustment
amount
 0510 Acceleration time s 0.1/0.01 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0 6.23.2
3
*8: These parameters can be changed to 0.01s unit by setting f519=1.

K-15
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0511 Deceleration time s 0.1/0.01 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0 6.23.2
3
 0512 Acceleration/decel - - 0: Linear 0
eration 3 pattern 1: S-pattern 1
2: S-pattern 2
 0513 Acceleration/decel Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0 (disabled) 0.0
eration 2 and 3 0.1-
switching
frequency
 0515 Deceleration time s 0.1/0.01 0.0-3600 (360.0) *8 10.0 6.24.4
at emergency stop
 0519 Setting of - - 0: - 0 6.23.2
acceleration/decel 1: 0.01s unit (after execution: 0)
eration time unit 2: 0.1s unit (after execution: 0)
*8: These parameters can be changed to 0.01s unit by setting f519=1.

• Protection parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0601 Stall prevention % 1/1 10-199, 150 6.24.2
level 1 (A) 200 (disabled)
 0602 Inverter trip - - 0: Cleared with power off 0 6.24.3
retention selection 1: Retained with power off
 0603 Emergency stop - - 0: Coast stop 0 6.24.4
selection 1: Deceleration stop
2: Emergency DC braking
3: Deceleration stop (f515)
4: Quick deceleration stop
5: Dynamic quick deceleration stop
 0604 DC braking time s 0.1/0.1 0.0-20.0 1.0
during emergency
stop
 0605 Output phase - - 0: Disabled 0 6.24.5
failure detection 1: At start-up (only one time after
selection power on)
2: At start-up (each time)
3: During operation
4: At start-up + during operation
5: Detection of cutoff on output side

11  0607 Motor 150% s 1/1 10-2400 300 3.5


overload detection 6.24.1
time
 0608 Input phase failure - - 0: Disabled 1 6.24.6
detection selection 1: Enabled
 0609 Small current % 1/1 1-20 10 6.24.7
detection
hysteresis
 0610 Small current - - 0: Alarm only 0
trip/alarm 1: Tripping
selection
 0611 Small current % 1/1 0-150 0
detection current (A)
 0612 Small current s 1/1 0-255 0
detection time
 0613 Detection of - - 0: Each time (standard pulse) 0 6.24.8
output short-circuit 1: Only one time after power on
at start-up (standard pulse)
2: Each time (short pulse)
3: Only one time after power on
(short pulse)

K-16
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0615 Over-torque - - 0: Alarm only 0 6.24.9
trip/alarm 1: Tripping
selection
 0616 Over-torque % 1/0.01 0 (disabled) 150
detection level 1-250
 0618 Over-torque s 0.1/0.1 0.0-10.0 0.5
detection time
 0619 Over-torque % 1/1 0-100 10
detection
hysteresis
 0620 Cooling fan - - 0: ON/OFF control 0 6.24.10
ON/OFF control 1: Always ON
 0621 Cumulative 100 0.1/0.1 0.0-999.0 876.0 6.24.11
operation time hours (=10 hours)
alarm setting
 0626 Over-voltage stall % 1/1 100-150 *2 6.15.4
protection level 6.15.5
 0627 Undervoltage - - 0: Alarm only 0 6.24.12
trip/alarm 1: Tripping
selection 2: -
 0631 Inverter overload - - 0: 150%-60s (120%-60s) 0 3.5
detection method 1: Temperature estimation
 0632 Electronic-thermal - - 0: Disabled 0 3.5
memory 1: Enabled 6.24.1
 0633 Analog input % 1/1 0: Disabled, 0 6.24.13
break detection 1-100
level (VIC)
 0634 Annual average - - 1: -10 to +10°C 3 6.24.14
ambient 2: 11-20°C
temperature (parts 3: 21-30°C
replacement 4: 31-40°C
alarms) 5: 41-50°C
6: 51-60°C
 0644 Operation - - 0: Tripping 0 6.24.13
selection of 1: Alarm only (Coast stop)
analog input break 2: Alarm only (f649 frequency)
detection (VIC) 3: Alarm only (Maintain running)
4: Alarm only (Deceleration stop)
 0645 PTC thermal - - 1: Tripping 1 6.24.15
selection 2: Alarm only
 0646 PTC detection Ω 1/1 100-9999 3000
resistor value



0648

0649
Number of starting
alarm
Fallback
10000
times
Hz
0.1/0.1

0.1/0.01
0.0-999.0

ll-
999.0

0.0
6.24.16

6.24.13
11
frequency
 0650 Forced fire-speed - - 0: Disabled 0 6.25
control selection 1: Enabled
 0656 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 6A
 0657 Overload alarm % 1/1 10-100 50 3.5
level
 0660 Override addition - - 0: Disabled 0 6.26
input selection 1: VIA
2: VIB
3: VIC
4: fc
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-17
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0661 Override - - 0: Disabled 0 6.26
multiplication input 1: VIA
selection 2: VIB
3: VIC
4: f729
 0663 Analog input - - 0: Frequency command 0 6.27
terminal function 1: Acceleration/deceleration time
selection (VIB) 2: Upper limit frequency
3, 4: -
5: Torque boost value
6: Stall prevention level
7: Motor electronic-thermal protection
level
8 to 10: -
11: Base frequency

• Output parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0669 Logic output/pulse - - 0: Logic output 0 6.28.1
train output 1: Pulse train output
selection (OUT)
 0676 Pulse train output - - 0: Output frequency 0
function selection 1: Output current
(OUT) 2: Frequency reference
3: Input voltage (DC detection)
4: Output voltage (command value)
5: Input power
6: Output power
7: Torque
8: -
9: Motor cumulative load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative
load factor
12: Frequency setting value (after
compensation)
13: VIA input value
14: VIB input value
15: Fixed output 1

11
(output current 100% equivalent)
16: Fixed output 2
(output current 50% equivalent)
17: Fixed output 3
(Other than the output current)
18: Communication data
19: -
20: VIC input value
21, 22: -
23: PID feedback value
 0677 Maximum numbers kpps 0.01/0.01 0.50-2.00 0.80
of pulse train
output
 0678 Pulse train output ms 1/1 2-1000 64
filter
 0679 Pulse train input ms 1/1 2-1000 2 6.6.5
filter

K-18
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0681 Analog output - - 0: Meter option (0 to 1 mA) 0 3.4
signal selection 1: Current (0 to 20 mA) output 6.28.2
2: Voltage (0 to 10 V) output
 0684 Analog output ms 1/1 2-1000 2
filter
 0691 Inclination - - 0: Negative inclination (downward 1
characteristic of slope)
analog output 1: Positive inclination (upward slope)
 0692 Analog output bias % 0.1/0.1 -1.0-+100.0 0.0
 0693 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 6B

*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

• Operation panel parameters


Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Adjustment range Reference
No. Panel/Commun setting setting
ication
 0700 Parameter - - 0: Permitted 0 6.29.1
protection 1: Writing prohibited (Panel and
selection remote keypad)
2: Writing prohibited (1 + RS485
communication)
3: Reading prohibited (Panel and
remote keypad)
4: Reading prohibited (3 + RS485
communication)
 0701 Current/voltage - - 0: % 0 6.29.2
unit selection 1: A (ampere)/V (volt)
 0702 Frequency free Times 0.01/0.01 0.00: Disabled (display of frequency) 0.00 6.29.3
unit display 0.01-200.0
magnification
 0703 Frequency free - 1/1 0: All frequencies display 0
unit coverage 1: PID frequencies display
selection
 0705 Inclination - 1/1 0: Negative inclination (downward 1
characteristic of slope)
free unit display 1: Positive inclination (upward slope)
 0706 Free unit display Hz 0.1/0.01 0.00- 0.00

 0707
bias
Free step 1
(1-step rotation of
Hz 0.01/0.01 0.00: Disabled
0.01-
0.00 6.29.4 11
setting dial)
 0708 Free step 2 (panel - - 0: Disabled 0
display) 1-255
 0709 Standard monitor - - 0: Real time 0 6.29.7
hold function 1: Peak hold
2: Minimum hold

K-19
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0710 Initial panel - - 0: Operation frequency (Hz/free unit) 0 6.29.5
display selection 1: Output current (%/A) 8.2.1
2: Frequency setting value (Hz/free unit) 8.3.2
3: Input voltage (DC detection) (%/V)
4: Output voltage (command value) (%/V)
5: Integral input power (kW)
6: Integral output power (kW)
7: Torque (%)
8: -
9: Motor cumulative load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor
11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative
load factor
12: Frequency setting value (after
compensation) (Hz/free unit)
13: VIA input value (%)
14: VIB input value (%)
15 to 17: -
18: Arbitrary code from communication
19: -
20: VIC input value (%)
21: Pulse train input value (kpps)
22: -
23: PID feedback value (Hz/free unit)
24: Input power (kWh)
25: Output power (kWh)
26: Motor load factor (%)
27: Inverter load factor (%)
28: Inverter rated current (A)
29: FM output value (%)
30: Pulse train output value (kpps)
31: Cumulative power on time (100
hours)
32: Cumulative fan operation time
(100 hours)
33: Cumulative operation time (100
hours)
34: Number of starting (10000 times)
35: Forward number of starting
(10000 times)
36: Reverse number of starting
(10000 times)
37 to 39: -
40: Inverter rated current (Carrier

11
frequency corrected)
41 to 51: -

K-20
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0711 Status monitor 1 - - 0: Operation frequency (Hz/free unit) 2 6.29.6
1: Output current (%/A) 8.2.1
2: Frequency setting value (Hz/free unit) 8.3.2
3: Input voltage (DC detection) (%/V)
4: Output voltage (command value) (%/V)
5: Input power (kW)
 0712 Status monitor 2 - - 1
6: Output power (kW)
7: Torque (%)
8: -
9: Motor cumulative load factor
10: Inverter cumulative load factor
 0713 Status monitor 3 - - 11: PBR (Braking resistor) cumulative 3
load factor
12: Frequency setting value (after
compensation) (Hz/free unit)
13: VIA input value (%)
14: VIB input value (%)
 0714 Status monitor 4 - - 4
15 to 19: -
20: VIC input value (%)
21: Pulse train input value (kpps)
22: -
23: PID feedback value (Hz/free unit)
 0715 Status monitor 5 - - 24: Integral input power (kWh) 5
25: Integral output power (kWh)
26: Motor load factor (%)
27: Inverter load factor (%)
28: Inverter rated current (A)
29: FM output value (%)
 0716 Status monitor 6 - - 30: Pulse train output value (kpps) 6
31: Cumulative power on time (100
hours)
32: Cumulative fan operation time
(100 hours)
 0717 Status monitor 7 - - 33: Cumulative operation time (100 27
hours)
34: Number of starting (10000 times)
35: Forward number of starting
(10000 times)
36: Reverse number of starting
 0718 Status monitor 8 - - (10000 times) 0
37 to 39: -
40: Inverter rated current (Carrier
frequency corrected)
41 to 51: -

11
 0719 Canceling of - - 0: Operation command canceled 1 6.29.8
operation (cleared)
command when 1: Operation command retained
standby terminal
(ST) is turned off
 0720 Initial remote - - 0-51 (Same as f710) 0 6.29.5
keypad display 8.3.2
selection
 0721 Panel stop pattern - - 0: Deceleration stop 0 6.29.9
1: Coast stop
 0729 Operation panel % 1/1 -100-+100 0 6.26
override
multiplication gain

K-21
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0730 Panel frequency - - 0: Permitted 0 6.29.1
setting prohibition 1: Prohibited
()
 0731 Disconnection - - 0: Permitted 0
detection of 1: Prohibited
remote keypad
 0732 Local/remote key - - 0: Permitted 1 6.13
prohibition of 1: Prohibited 6.29.1
remote keypad
 0733 Panel operation - - 0: Permitted 0 6.29.1
prohibition 1: Prohibited
(RUN key)
 0734 Panel emergency - - 0: Permitted 0
stop operation 1: Prohibited
prohibition
 0735 Panel reset - - 0: Permitted 0
operation 1: Prohibited
prohibition
 0736  /  - - 0: Permitted 1
change prohibition 1: Prohibited
during operation
 0737 All key operation - - 0: Permitted 0
prohibition 1: Prohibited
 0738 Password setting - - 0: Password unset 0
() 1-9998
9999: Password set
 0739 Password - - 0: Password unset 0
verification 1-9998
9999: Password set
 0740 Trace selection - - 0: Disabled 1 6.30
1: At tripping
2: At triggering
3: 1+2
 0741 Trace cycle - - 0: 4ms 2
1: 20ms
2: 100ms
3: 1s
4: 10s
 0742 Trace data 1 - - 0

 0743 Trace data 2 - - 1


0-42
 0744 Trace data 3 - - 2

11 


0745
0746
Trace data 4

Status monitor
-

ms
-

- 8-1000
3

200 6.29.7
filter
 0748 Integrating - - 0: Disabled 0 6.31
wattmeter 1: Enabled
retention selection
 0749 Integrating - - 0:1=1kWh *2
wattmeter display 1:1=10kWh
unit selection 2:1=100kWh
3:1=1000kWh
*2: Default setting values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to section 11.4.

K-22
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0750 EASY key function - - 0: Easy / standard setting mode 0 4.5
selection switching function 6.32
1: Shortcut key
2: Local / remote key
3: Monitor peak / minimum hold
trigger
 0751 Easy setting mode - - 3 4.5
parameter 1 6.32
 0752 Easy setting mode - - 4
parameter 2
 0753 Easy setting mode - - 9
parameter 3
 0754 Easy setting mode - - 10
parameter 4
 0755 Easy setting mode - - 600
parameter 5
 0756 Easy setting mode - - 6
parameter 6
 0757 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 7
 0758 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 8
 0759 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 9
 0760 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 10
 0761 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 11
 0762 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 12
 0763 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 13
 0764 Easy setting mode - - 0-2999 999
parameter 14 (Set by communication number)
 0765 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 15
 0766 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 16
 0767 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 17
 0768 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 18
 0769 Easy setting mode - - 999

 0770
parameter 19
Easy setting mode
parameter 20
- - 999 11
 0771 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 21
 0772 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 22
 0773 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 23
 0774 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 24
 0775 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 25
 0776 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 26
 0777 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 27

K-23
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0778 Easy setting mode - - 999 4.5
parameter 28 6.32
 0779 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 29
 0780 Easy setting mode - - 0-2999 999
parameter 30 (Set by communication number)
 0781 Easy setting mode - - 999
parameter 31
 0782 Easy setting mode - - 50
parameter 32
 0799 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 7A

*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

• Communication parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0800 Baud rate - - 3: 9600bps 4 6.33.1
4: 19200bps
5: 38400bps
 0801 Parity - - 0: NON (No parity) 1
1: EVEN (Even parity)
2: ODD (Odd parity)
 0802 Inverter number - 1/1 0-247 0

 0803 Communication s 0.1/0.1 0.0: Disabled, 0.0


time-out time 0.1-100.0
 0804 Communication - - 0: Alarm only 0
time-out action 1: Trip (Coast stop)
2: Trip (Deceleration stop)
 0805 Communication s 0.01/0.01 0.00-2.00 0.00
waiting time
 0806 Setting of master - - 0: Slave (0 Hz command issued in 0
and slave for case the master inverter fails)
communication 1: Slave (Operation continued in case
between inverters the master inverter fails)
2: Slave (Emergency stop tripping in
case the master inverter fails)
3: Master (transmission of frequency
commands)

11  0808 Communication - -


4: Master (transmission of output
frequency signals)
0: Valid at any time 1
time-out detection 1: Communication selection of
condition fmod or cmod
2: 1 + during operation

K-24
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0810 Communication - 1/1 0: Disabled 0 6.6.2
command point 1: Enabled 6.33.1
selection
 0811 Communication % 1/1 0-100 0
command point 1
setting
 0812 Communication Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- 0.0
command point 1
frequency
 0813 Communication % 1/1 0-100 100
command point 2
setting
 0814 Communication Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0- *1
command point 2
frequency
 0829 Selection of - - 0: Toshiba inverter protocol 0 6.33.1
communication 1: Modbus RTU protocol
protocol
 0856 Number of motor - - 1: 2 poles 2
poles for 2: 4 poles
communication 3: 6 poles
4: 8 poles
5: 10 poles
6: 12 poles
7: 14 poles
8: 16 poles
 0870 Block write data 1 - - 0: No selection 0
1: Command information 1
2: Command information 2
3: Frequency setting
 0871 Block write data 2 - - 4: Output data on the terminal board 0
5: Analog output for communication
6: Speed command
 0875 Block read data 1 - - 0: No selection 0
1: Status information
2: Output frequency
 0876 Block read data 2 - - 3: Output current 0
4: Output voltage
5: Alarm information
 0877 Block read data 3 - - 6: PID feedback value 0
7: Input terminal board monitor
8: Output terminal board monitor
 0878 Block read data 4 - - 9: VIA terminal board monitor 0
10: VIB terminal board monitor

 0879 Block read data 5 - -


11: VIC terminal board monitor
12: Input voltage (DC detection)
13: Motor speed
0
11
14: Torque
 0880 Free notes - 1/1 0-65530 (65535) 0 6.33.3

 0898 Factory specific - - - - *3


coefficient 8A
 0899 Communication - - 0: - 0 6.33.1
function reset 1: Reset (after execution: 0)
*1: Default setting values vary depending on the setup menu setting. Refer to section 11.5.
*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-25
E6581697

• PM motor parameters
Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 0900 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 9A
 0901 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9B
 0902 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9C
 0909 Factory specific - - - - 
coefficient 9D
 0910 Step-out detection % 1/1 1-150 100 6.34
current level
 0911 Step-out detection s 0.01/0.01 0.00: No detection 0.00
time 0.01-2.55
 0912 q-axis inductance mH 0.01/0.01 0.01-650.0 10.00 6.21.2
6.34
 0913 d-axis inductance mH 0.01/0.01 0.01-650.0 10.00

 0914 Factory specific - - - - *3


coefficient 9E
 0915 PM control mode - - 0: Mode 0 3 6.21.2
selection 1: Mode 1
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
 0916 Factory specific - - - - *3
coefficient 9F
 0917 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9G
 0918 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9H
 0919 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9I
 0920 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9J
 0930 Factory specific - - - -
coefficient 9K

*3: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

• Traverse parameters
Minimum

11 Title
Communication
No.
Function Unit
setting unit
Panel/Commun
ication
Adjustment range
Default
setting
User
setting
Reference

 0980 Traverse selection - 1/1 0: Disabled 0 6.35


1: Enabled
 0981 Traverse s 0.1/0.1 0.1-120.0 25.0
acceleration time
 0982 Traverse s 0.1/0.1 0.1-120.0 25.0
deceleration time
 0983 Traverse step % 0.1/0.1 0.0-25.0 10.0

 0984 Traverse jump % 0.1/0.1 0.0-50.0 10.0


step

K-26
E6581697

• Logic sequence parameters


Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 A900 Input function - - Input terminal function number 0 6.36
target 11 0: No function
1: Terminal F
2: Terminal R
3: Terminal RES
4: Terminal S1
5: Terminal S2
6: Terminal S3
7: Terminal VIB
8: Terminal VIA
9 to 20: -
21 to 24: Virtual input terminal 1 to 4
25 to 32: Internal terminal 1 to 8
918 to 934: Logic sequence function
number
1000 to 1255: Output selection number
2000 to 2099: FD00 to FD99
3000 to 3099: FE00 to FE99
 A901 Input function - - 0:NOP (not operation) 0
command 12 1:ST (move)
2:STN
3:AND (logical product)
4:ANDN
5:OR (logical sum)
6:ORN
7:EQ (equal)
8:NE (not equal)
9:GT (greater than)
10:GE (greater or equal)
11:LT (less than)
12:LE (less or equal)
13:ASUB (absolute)
14:ON (on delay timer)
15:OFF (off delay timer)
16:COUNT 1 (counter 1)
17:COUNTR 2 (counter 2)
18:HOLD (hold)
19:SET (set)
20:RESET (reset)
21:CLR
22:CLRN
 A902 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 12



A903

A904
Input function
command 13
Input function
-

-
-

-
0-22 (Same as a901)

0-3099 (Same as a900)


0

0
11
target 13
 A905 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 1
 A906 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 21
 A907 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 22
 A908 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 22
 A909 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 23
 A910 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 23
 A911 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 2

K-27
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 A912 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0 6.36
target 31
 A913 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 32
 A914 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 32
 A915 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 33
 A916 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 33
 A917 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 3
 A918 Output percent % 0.01/0.01 0.00
data 1
 A919 Output percent % 0.01/0.01 0.00
data 2
 A920 Output percent % 0.01/0.01 0.00-200.0 0.00
data 3
 A921 Output percent % 0.01/0.01 0.00
data 4
 A922 Output percent % 0.01/0.01 0.00
data 5
 A923 Output frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0
data 1
 A924 Output frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0
data 2
 A925 Output frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0-500.0 0.0
data 3
 A926 Output frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0
data 4
 A927 Output frequency Hz 0.1/0.01 0.0
data 5
 A928 Output time data 1 s 0.01/0.01 0.01

 A929 Output time data 2 s 0.01/0.01 0.01

 A930 Output time data 3 s 0.01/0.01 0.01-600.0 0.01

 A931 Output time data 4 s 0.01/0.01 0.01

 A932 Output time data 5 s 0.01/0.01 0.01

 A933 Number of times times 1/1 0


of output data 1
0-9999
 A934 Number of times times 1/1 0

11 of output data 2

K-28
E6581697

Minimum
Communication setting unit Default User
Title Function Unit Panel/Commun Adjustment range Reference
No. setting setting
ication
 A935 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0 6.36
target 41
 A936 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 42
 A937 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 42
 A938 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 43
 A939 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 43
 A940 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 4
 A941 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 51
 A942 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 52
 A943 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 52
 A944 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 53
 A945 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 53
 A946 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 5
 A947 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 61
 A948 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 62
 A949 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 62
 A950 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 63
 A951 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 63
 A952 Output function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
assigned object 6
 A953 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 71
 A954 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 72
 A955 Input function - - 0-3099 (Same as a900) 0
target 72
 A956 Input function - - 0-22 (Same as a901) 0
command 73



A957

A958
Input function
target 73
Output function
-

-
-

-
0-3099 (Same as a900)

0-3099 (Same as a900)


0

0
11
assigned object 7
 A973 Virtual input - - 0
terminal selection 1
 A974 Virtual input - - 0
terminal selection 2
0-203 *6
 A975 Virtual input - - 0
terminal selection 3
 A976 Virtual input - - 0
terminal selection 4
 A977 Logic sequence - - 0:Disabled 0
function selection 1: Logic sequence function +
permission signal
2: Logic sequence function always
ON

*6: Refer to section 11.6 for details about input terminal function.

K-29
E6581697

• Communication option parameters


Title Function Reference
 Communication option common parameters 6.33.5
 ProfiBus DP option parameters
 DeviceNet option parameters
 EtherNet common parameters
 EtherNet IP option parameters
 Modbus TCP option parameters
 CANopen communication parameters 6.33.4

Note) Refer to each Instruction Manual for option about detailed specifications.

11.4 Default settings by inverter rating


Dynamic Over- Integrating
Dynamic Automatic Motor
Torque braking Motor rated Motor rated voltage stall wattmeter
braking torque no-load
boost value resistor capacity current protection display unit
resistance boost value current
Inverter type capacity level selection
/       
 (%) (A) (%) 
(Ω) (kW) (kW) (%)
(%)
VFMB1S-2002PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 8.3 0.20 1.2 70 136 0
VFMB1S-2004PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 6.2 0.40 2.0 65 136 0
VFMB1S-2007PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 5.8 0.75 3.4 60 136 0
VFMB1S-2015PL 6.0 75.0 0.12 4.3 1.50 6.2 55 136 0
VFMB1S-2022PL 5.0 75.0 0.12 4.1 2.20 8.9 52 136 0
VFMB1-4004PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 6.2 0.40 1.0 65 141 0
VFMB1-4007PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 5.8 0.75 1.7 60 141 0
VFMB1-4015PL 6.0 200.0 0.12 4.3 1.50 2.4 55 141 0
VFMB1-4022PL 5.0 200.0 0.12 4.1 2.20 4.5 52 141 0
VFMB1-4037PL 5.0 160.0 0.12 3.4 4.00 *1 7.4 48 141 1
VFMB1-4055PL 4.0 80.0 0.24 2.6 5.50 10.5 46 141 1
VFMB1-4075PL 3.0 60.0 0.44 2.3 7.50 14.1 43 141 1
VFMB1-4110PL 2.0 40.0 0.66 2.2 11.00 20.3 41 141 1
VFMB1-4150PL 2.0 30.0 0.88 1.9 15.00 27.3 38 141 1
*1: When region setting is JP,  is set to 3.7(kW).

11.5 Default settings by setup menu


11 Supply voltage
V/F control mode correction Motor rated
Frequency Base frequency voltage 1 & 2
selection (output voltage speed
limitation)
Setting Main regions , , , ,  (V)
, ,

, ,   -1
,  240V class 500V class (min )
(Hz)
 Europe 50.0 230 400 0 2 1410
 Asia 50.0 230 400 0 2 1410
 North America 60.0 230 460 0 2 1710
 Japan 60.0 200 400 2 3 1710
Note) Refer to section 3.1 about setup menu.

K-30
E6581697

11.6 Input Terminal Function


It can be assigned the function No. in the following table to parameter f104, f108, f110 to f118, f151 to
f156, a973 to a976.

• Table of input terminal functions 1


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
0,1 - No function Disabled -
2 F Forward run command ON: Forward run, OFF: Deceleration stop 3.2.1
3 FN Inversion of forward run command Inversion of F 7.2.1
4 R Reverse run command ON: Reverse run, OFF: Deceleration stop
5 RN Inversion of reverse run command Inversion of R
6 ST Standby ON: Ready for operation 3.2.1
OFF: Coast stop (gate OFF) 6.3.1
7 STN Inversion of standby Inversion of ST 6.15.1
8 RES Reset command ON: Acceptance of reset command 13.2
ON ¤ OFF: Trip reset
9 RESN Inversion of reset command Inversion of RES
10 SS1 Preset-speed command 1 3.6
11 SS1N Inversion of preset-speed command 1 7.2.1
12 SS2 Preset-speed command 2
13 SS2N Inversion of preset-speed command 2
Selection of 15-speed SS1 to SS4 (SS1N to SS4N) (4 bits)
14 SS3 Preset-speed command 3
15 SS3N Inversion of preset-speed command 3
16 SS4 Preset-speed command 4 3.6
17 SS4N Inversion of preset-speed command 4
18 JOG Jog run mode ON: Jogging mode 6.10
OFF: Jog run canceled
19 JOGN Inversion of jog run mode Inversion of JOG
20 EXT Emergency stop by external signal ON:  trip stop 6.24.4
OFF: After stopped by f603, e trip
21 EXTN Inversion of emergency stop by external signal Inversion of EXT
22 DB DC braking command ON: DC braking, OFF: Brake canceled 6.8.1
23 DBN Inversion of DC braking command Inversion of DB
24 AD2 2nd acceleration/deceleration ON: Acceleration/deceleration 2 6.4.1
OFF: Acceleration/deceleration 1 6.23.2
25 AD2N Inversion of 2nd acceleration/deceleration Inversion of AD2
26 AD3 3rd acceleration/deceleration ON: Acceleration/deceleration 3
OFF: Acceleration/deceleration 1 or 2
27 AD3N Inversion of 3rd acceleration/deceleration Inversion of AD3
28 VF2 2nd V/F control mode switching ON: 2nd V/F control mode 6.4.1
(V/F fixed, , , , )
OFF: 1st V/F control mode
( setting, , , , )
11
29 VF2N Inversion of 2nd V/F control switching Inversion of VF2
32 OCS2 2nd stall prevention level ON: Enabled at the value of  6.4.1
OFF: Enabled at the value of  6.24.2
33 OCS2N Inversion of 2nd stall prevention level Inversion of OCS2
36 PID PID control prohibition ON: PID control prohibited 6.20
OFF: PID control enabled
37 PIDN Inversion of PID control prohibition Inversion of PID
46 OH2 External thermal error input ON: oh2 trip stop, OFF: Disabled 7.2.1
47 OH2N Inversion of external thermal error input Inversion of oh2
48 SCLC Forced local from communication Enabled during communication 5.6
ON: Local (Setting of , ) 6.33
OFF: Communication
49 SCLCN Inversion of forced local from communication Inversion of SCLC
50 HD Operation hold (hold of 3-wire operation) ON: F (forward run), R: (reverse run) held, 3-wire operation 7.2.1
OFF: Deceleration stop
51 HDN Inversion of operation hold (hold of 3-wire Inversion of HD
operation)

K-31
E6581697

• Table of input terminal functions 2


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
52 IDC PID integral/differential clear ON: Integral/differential clear, OFF: Clear canceled 6.20
53 IDCN Inversion of PID integral/differential clear Inversion of IDC
54 DR PID characteristics switching ON: Inverted characteristics of  selection
OFF: Characteristics of  selection
55 DRN Inversion of PID characteristics switching Inversion of DR
56 FORCE Forced run operation ON: Forced run operation if specified faults are occurred 6.25
( frequency)
OFF: Normal operation
57 FORCEN Inversion of forced run operation Inversion of FORCE
58 FIRE Fire speed operation ON: Fire speed operation ( frequency)
OFF: Normal operation
59 FIREN Inversion of fire speed operation Inversion of FIRE
60 DWELL Acceleration/deceleration suspend signal ON: Acceleration/deceleration suspend 6.19
OFF: Normal operation
61 DWELLN Inversion of acceleration/deceleration Inversion of DWELL
suspend signal
62 KEB Power failure synchronized signal ON: Deceleration stop with synchronizing when power failure 6.15.2
OFF: Normal operation
63 KEBN Inversion of power failure synchronized Inversion of KEB
signal
64 MYF Logic sequence function trigger signal ON: Trigger(start operation) signal of logic sequence function 6.36
OFF: Normal operation
65 MYFN Inversion of logic sequence function trigger Inversion of MYF
signal
70, 71 Factory specific coefficient - *1
74 CKWH Integrating wattmeter(kwh) display clear ON: Integrating wattmeter(kwh) monitor display clear 6.31
OFF: Disabled
75 CKWHN Inversion of integrating wattmeter display Inversion of CKWH
clear
76 TRACE Trace back trigger signal ON: Trigger(start) signal of trace function 6.30
OFF: Disabled
77 TRACEN Inversion of trace back trigger signal Inversion of TRACE
78 HSLL Light-load high-speed operation prohibitive ON: Light-load high-speed operation prohibited 6.17
signal OFF: Light-load high-speed operation permitted
79 HSLLN Inversion of light-load high-speed operation Inversion of HSLL
prohibitive signal
80 HDRY Holding of RY-RC terminal output ON: Once turned on, RY-RC are held on. 7.2.2
OFF: The status of RY-RC changes in real time according to
conditions.
81 HDRYN Inversion of holding of RY-RC terminal Inversion of HDRY
output
82 HDOUT Holding of OUT-NO terminal output ON: Once turned on, OUT-NO are held on.

11 83 HDOUT Inversion of holding of OUT-NO terminal


OFF: The status of OUT-NO changes in real time according
to conditions.
Inversion of HDOUT
N output
88 UP Frequency UP ON: Frequency increased 6.6.3
OFF: Frequency increase canceled
89 UPN Inversion of frequency UP Inversion of UP
90 DWN Frequency DOWN ON: Frequency decreased
OFF: Frequency decrease canceled
91 DWNN Inversion of frequency DOWN Inversion of DWN
92 CLR Clear frequency UP/DOWN OFF ¤ ON: Clear frequency UP/DOWN
93 CLRN Inversion of clear frequency UP/DOWN Inversion of CLR
96 FRR Coast stop command ON: Coast stop (Gate OFF) 3.2.1
OFF: Coast stop canceled
97 FRRN Inversion of coast stop command Inversion of FRP
98 FR Forward/reverse selection ON: Forward operation command 7.2.1
OFF: Reverse operation command
99 FRN Inversion of forward/reverse selection Inversion of FR
*1: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-32
E6581697

• Table of input terminal functions 3


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
100 RS Run/Stop command ON: Run command 7.2.1
OFF: Stop command
101 RSN Inversion of run/Stop command Inversion of RS
104 FCHG Frequency reference command forced ON: f207 (f200=0) 5.6
switching OFF: fmod
105 FCHGN Inversion of frequency reference command Inversion of HDRY
forced switching
106 FMTB Frequency setting mode terminal board ON: Terminal board (VIA) enabled
OFF: Setting of 
107 FMTBN Inversion of frequency setting mode terminal Inversion of FMTB
board
108 CMTB Command mode terminal board ON: Terminal board enabled
OFF: Setting of 
109 CMTBN Inversion of command mode terminal board Inversion of CMTB
110 PWE Parameter editing permission ON: Parameter editing permitted 6.29.1
OFF: Setting of 
111 PWEN Inversion of parameter editing permission Inversion of PWE
120 FSTP1 Fast stop command 1 ON: Dynamic quick deceleration command 5.4.1
OFF: Forced deceleration canceled
(Note that operation is resumed when forced deceleration is
canceled)
121 FSTP1N Inversion of fast stop command 1 Inversion of FSTP1
122 FSTP2 Fast stop command 2 ON: Automatic deceleration
OFF: Forced deceleration canceled
(Note that operation is resumed when forced deceleration is
canceled)
123 FSTNP2 Inversion of fast stop command 2 Inversion of FST
134 TVS Traverse permission signal ON: Permission signal of traverse operation 6.35
OFF: Normal operation
135 TVSN Inversion of traverse permission signal Inversion of TVS
136, 137 Factory specific coefficient - *1
140 SLOWF Forward deceleration ON: Forward operation with f383 frequency 6.18.2
OFF: Normal operation
141 SLOWFN Inversion of forward deceleration Inversion of SLOWF
142 STOPF Forward stop ON: Forward stop
OFF: Normal operation
143 STOPFN Inversion of forward stop Inversion of STOPF
144 SLOWR Reverse deceleration ON: Reverse operation with f383 frequency
OFF: Normal operation
145 SLOWRN Inversion of reverse deceleration Inversion of SLOWR
146 STOPR Reverse stop ON: Reverse stop

11
OFF: Normal operation
147 STOPRN Inversion of reverse stop Inversion of STOPR
148 to 151 Factory specific coefficient - *1
200 PWP Parameter editing prohibition ON: Parameter editing prohibited 6.29.1
OFF: Setting of 
201 PWPN Inversion of parameter editing prohibition Inversion of PWP
PRWP Parameter reading prohibition ON: Parameter reading / editing prohibited
202
OFF: Setting of 
203 PRWPN Inversion of parameter reading prohibition Inversion of PRWP
*1: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

Note 1: Function No. that are not described in the table above are assigned "No function".

K-33
E6581697

• Input terminal function priority


2,3 6,7 8,9 10,11 18 20 22 24,25 36,37 48 50 88,89 96 110 122
4,5 12,13 19 21 23 28,29 52,53 49 51 90,91 97 111 123
Function 14,15 32,33 54,55 106 92,93 200
Code
No. 16,17 107 201
108
109
F/ 2,3
X ○ ○ ○ X X ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ X ○ X
R 4,5
ST 6,7 ◎ ○ ◎ ◎ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎

RES 8,9 ○ ○ ○ ○ X ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SS1/ 10,11
SS2/ 12,13
○ X ○ X X X ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ X ○ X
SS3/ 14,15
SS4 16,17
JOG 18,19 ○ X ○ ◎ X X ○ ◎ ○ X ○ X ○ X

EXT 20,21 ◎ ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎

DB 22,23 ◎ X ○ ◎ ◎ X ○ ◎ ○ ◎ ○ X ○ X
AD2/ 24,25
VF2/ 28,29 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
OCS2 32,33
PID/ 36,37
IDC/ 52,53 ○ ○ ○ ○ X ○ X ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PIDSW 54,55
SCLC/ 48,49
FMTB/ 106,107 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CMTB 108,109
HD 50,51 ○ X ○ ○ X X X ○ ○ ○ ○ X ○ X
UP/ 88,89
DWN/ 90,91 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CLR 92,93
FRR 96,97 ◎ ○ ○ ◎ ◎ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ◎

11 PWE/
PWP
110,111
200,201
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

FST 122,123 ◎ X ○ ◎ ◎ X ◎ ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○ X ○

◎ Priority ○ Enabled X Disabled

K-34
E6581697

11.7 Output Terminal Function


It can be assigned the function No. in the following table to parameter f130 to f138, f157, f158.

• Table of output terminal functions 1


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
0 LL Frequency lower limit ON: Output frequency is more than  5.10
OFF: Output frequency is or less
1 LLN Inversion of frequency lower limit Inversion of LL 
2 UL Frequency upper limit ON: Output frequency is or more
OFF: Output frequency is less than 
3 ULN Inversion of frequency upper limit Inversion of UL 
4 LOW Low-speed detection signal ON: Output frequency is  or more 6.1.1
OFF: Output frequency is less than  7.2.2
5 LOWN Inversion of low-speed detection signal Inversion of LOW
6 RCH Output frequency attainment signal ON: Output frequency is within command frequency ± 6.1.2
(acceleration/deceleration completed)  7.2.2
OFF: Output frequency is more than command frequency ±

7 RCHN Inversion of output frequency attainment Inversion of RCHF
signal
(inversion of acceleration/deceleration
completed)
8 RCHF Set frequency attainment signal ON: Output frequency is within ± 6.1.3
OFF: Output frequency is more than  ±
9 RCHFN Inversion of set frequency attainment signal Inversion of RCHF 
10 FL Fault signal (trip output) ON: Inverter tripped 7.2.2
OFF: Inverter not tripped
11 FLN Inversion of fault signal (inversion of trip Inversion of FL 
output)
14 POC Over-current pre-alarm ON: Output current is  or more 6.24.2
OFF: Output current is less than 
15 POCN Inversion of over-current pre-alarm Inversion of POC
16 POL Overload detection pre-alarm ON: (%) or more of calculated value of overload 3.5
protection level
OFF: Less than (%) of calculated value of overload
protection level
17 POLN Inversion overload pre-alarm Inversion of POL
20 POH Overheat pre-alarm ON: Approx. 95°C or more of IGBT element 7.2.2
OFF: Less than approx. 95°C of IGBT element (90°C or less
after detection is turned on)

11
21 POHN Inversion of overheat pre-alarm Inversion of POH
22 POP Overvoltage pre-alarm ON: Overvoltage limit in operation 6.15.5
OFF: Overvoltage detection canceled
23 POPN Inversion of overvoltage pre-alarm Inversion of POP
24 MOFF Power circuit undervoltage detection ON: Power circuit undervoltage (MOFF) detected 6.24.12
OFF: Undervoltage detection canceled
25 MOFFN Inversion of power circuit undervoltage Inversion of MOFF
detection
26 UC Small current detection ON: After output current comes to  or less, value of 6.24.7
less than + for  set time
OFF: Output current is more than 
(+ or more after detection turns on)
27 UCN Inversion of small current detection Inversion of UC
28 OT Over-torque detection ON: After torque comes to  or more, value of more 6.24.9
than - for  set time
OFF: Torque is less than 
(-or less after detection turns on)
29 OTN Inversion of over-torque detection Inversion of OT

K-35
E6581697

• Table of output terminal functions 2


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
30 POLR Braking resistor overload pre-alarm ON: 50% or more of calculated value of  set 6.15.4
overload protection level
OFF: Less than 50% of calculated value of  set
overload protection level
31 POLRN Inversion of braking resistor overload pre- Inversion of POLR setting
alarm
40 RUN Run/stop ON: While operation frequency is output or DC braking is in 7.2.2
operation ()
OFF: Operation stopped
41 RUNN Inversion of run/stop Inversion of RUN
42 HFL Heavy fault ON: At trip (, , , , , , ,
~, , , , , ,
)
OFF: Other than those trip above
43 HFLN Inversion of heavy fault Inversion of HFL
44 LFL Light fault ON: At trip (~, ~, , ~, )
OFF: Other than those trip above
45 LFLN Inversion of light fault Inversion of LFL
50 FAN Cooling fan ON/OFF ON: Cooling fan is in operation 6.24.10
OFF: Cooling fan is off operation
51 FANN Inversion of Cooling fan ON/OFF Inversion of FAN
52 JOG In jogging operation ON: In jogging operation 6.10
OFF: Other than jogging operation
53 JOGN Inversion of in jogging operation Inversion of JOG
54 JBM Operation panel / terminal board operation ON: At terminal board operation command 5.6
OFF: Other than those operation above
55 JBMN Inversion of operation panel/terminal board Inversion of JBM
operation
56 COT Cumulative operation time alarm ON: Cumulative operation time is  or more 6.24.11
OFF: The cumulative operation time is less than 
57 COTN Inversion of cumulative operation time alarm Inversion of COT
58 COMOP Communication option communication error ON: Communication error of communication option occurs 6.33
OFF: Other than those above
59 COMOPN Inversion of communication option Inversion of COMOP
communication error
60 FR Forward/reverse run ON: Reverse run 7.2.2
OFF: Forward run
(Operation command state is output while motor operation is
stopped. No command is to OFF.)
61 FRN Inversion of forward/reverse run Inversion of FR
62 RDY1 Ready for operation 1 ON: Ready for operation (with ST / RUN)
OFF: Other than those above

11 63
64
RDY1N
RDY2
Inversion of ready for operation 1
Ready for operation 2
Inversion of RDY1
ON: Ready for operation (without ST / RUN)
OFF: Other than those above
65 RDY2N Inversion of ready for operation 2 Inversion of RDY2
68 BR Brake release ON: Brake exciting signal 6.18
OFF: Brake releasing signal
69 BRN Inversion of brake release Inversion of BR
70 PAL Pre-alarm ON: One of the following is turned on 7.2.2
ON POL, POHR, POT, MOFF, UC, OT, LL stop, COT,
and momentary power failure deceleration stop.
Or , , ,  issues an alarm
OFF: Other than those above
71 PALN Inversion of pre-alarm Inversion of PAL
78 COME RS485 communication error ON: Communication error occurred 6.33
OFF: Communication works
79 COMEN Inversion of RS485 communication error Inversion of COME

K-36
E6581697

• Table of output terminal functions 3


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
92 DATA1 Designated data output 1 ON: bit0 of FA50 is ON 6.33
OFF: bit0 of FA50 is OFF
93 DATA1N Inversion of designated data output 1 Inversion of DATA
94 DATA2 Designated data output 2 ON: bit1 of FA50 is ON
OFF: bit1 of FA50 is OFF
95 DATA2N Inversion of designated data output 2 Inversion of DATA2
106 LLD Light load output ON: Less than heavy load torque (f335~f338) 6.17
OFF: heavy load torque (f335~f338) or more
107 LLDN Inversion of light load output Inversion of LLD
108 HLD Heavy load output ON: Heavy load torque (f335~f338) or more
OFF: Less than heavy load torque (f335~f338)
109 HLDN Inversion of heavy load output Inversion of HLD
120 LLS Lower limit frequency stop ON: Lower limit frequency continuous operation 6.9.1
OFF: Other than those above
121 LLSN Inversion of lower limit frequency stop Inversion of LLS
122 KEB Power failure synchronized operation ON: Power failure synchronized operation 6.15.2
OFF: Other than those above
123 KEBN Inversion of power failure synchronized Inversion of KEB
operation
124 TVS Traverse in progress ON: Traverse in progress 6.35
OFF: Other than those above
125 TVSN Inversion of traverse in progress Inversion of TVS
126 TVSD Traverse deceleration in progress ON: Traverse deceleration in progress
OFF: Other than those above
127 TVSDN Inversion of traverse deceleration in Inversion of TVSD
progress
128 LTA Parts replacement alarm ON: Any one of cooling fan, control board capacitor, or main 6.24.14
circuit capacitor reaches parts replacement time
OFF: Any one of cooling fan, control board capacitor, or main
circuit capacitor does not reach parts replacement time
129 LTAN Inversion of parts replacement alarm Inversion of LTA
130 POT Over-torque detection pre-alarm ON: Torque current is 70% of f616 setting value or more 6.24.9
OFF: Torque current is less than f616x70%-f619
131 POTN Inversion of over-torque detection pre-alarm Inversion of POT
132 FMOD Frequency setting mode selection 1/2 ON: Select frequency setting mode selection 2 (f207) 5.6
OFF: Select frequency setting mode selection 1 (fmod)
133 FMODN Inversion of frequency setting mode Inversion of FMOD
selection 1/2
136 FLC Panel / remote selection ON: Operation command or panel 5.6
OFF: Other than those above
137 FLCN Inversion of panel / remote selection Inversion of FLC
138

139
FORCE

FORCEN
Forced continuous operation in progress

Inversion of forced continuous operation in


ON: Forced continuous operation in progress
OFF: Other than those above
Inversion of FORCE
6.25
11
progress
140 FIRE Specified frequency operation in progress ON: Specified Frequency operation in progress
OFF: Other than those above
141 FIREN Inversion of specified frequency operation in Inversion of FIRE
progress

K-37
E6581697

• Table of output terminal functions 4


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
144 PIDF Signal in accordance of frequency command ON: Frequency commanded by  and  are 6.3.4
within ±. 6.20
OFF: Other than those above
145 PIDFN Inversion of signal in accordance of Inversion of PIDF setting
frequency command
146 FLR Fault signal (output also at a retry waiting) ON: While inverter is tripped or retried 6.15.3
OFF: While inverter is not tripped and not retried
147 FLRN Inversion of fault signal (output also at a Inversion of FLR 
retry waiting)
150 PTCA PTC input alarm signal ON: PTC thermal input value is f646 or more 6.24.15
OFF: PTC thermal input value is less than f646
151 PTCAN Inversion of PTC input alarm signal Inversion of POT
152 STO Safe torque off signal ON: Safe torque off signal output 9.3
OFF: Other than those above
153 STON Inversion of safe torque off signal Inversion of FMOD
154 DISK Analog input break detection alarm ON: VIB terminal input value is f633 or less 6.24.13
OFF: VIB terminal input value is more than f633
155 DISKN Inversion of Analog input break detection Inversion of FLC
alarm
156 LI1 F terminal state ON: F terminal is ON state 7.2.2
OFF: F terminal is OFF state
157 LI1N Inversion of F terminal status Inversion of FORCE
158 LI2 R terminal status ON: R terminal is ON state
OFF: R terminal is OFF state
159 LI2N Inversion of R terminal status Inversion of FIRE
160 LTAF Cooling fan replacement alarm ON: Cooling fan reaches parts replacement time 6.24.14
OFF: Cooling fan does not reach parts replacement time
161 LTAFN Inversion of cooling fan replacement alarm Inversion of PIDF
162 NSA Number of starting alarm ON: Number of starting alarm is f648 or more 6.24.16
OFF: Number of starting alarm is less than f648
163 NSAN Inversion of number of starting alarm Inversion of NSA 
166 DACC Acceleration operation in progress ON: Acceleration operation in progress 7.2.2
OFF: Other than those above
167 DACCN Inversion of acceleration operation in Inversion of DACC
progress
168 DDEC Deceleration operation in progress ON: Deceleration operation in progress
OFF: Other than those above
169 DDECN Inversion of deceleration operation in Inversion of DDEC
progress
170 DRUN Constant speed operation in progress ON: Constant speed operation in progress
OFF: Other than those above
171 DRUNN Inversion of constant speed operation in Inversion of DRUN

11 172 DDC
progress
DC braking in progress ON: DC braking in progress
OFF: Other than those above
6.8.1

173 DDCN Inversion of DC braking in progress Inversion of DDC


174 to 179 Factory specific coefficient - *1
*1: Factory specific coefficient parameters are manufacturer setting parameters. Do not change the value of these parameters.

K-38
E6581697

• Table of output terminal functions 5


Function
Code Function Action Reference
No.
222 LSFO1 Logic sequence function output 1 ON: Logic sequence function output 1 is ON 6.36
OFF: Logic sequence function output 1 is OFF
223 LSFO1N Inversion of logic sequence function output 1 Inversion of LSFO1
224 LSFO2 Logic sequence function output 2 ON: Logic sequence function output 2 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 2 is OFF
225 LSFO2N Inversion of logic sequence function output 2 Inversion of LSFO2
226 LSFO3 Logic sequence function output 3 ON: Logic sequence function output 3 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 3 is OFF
227 LSFO3N Inversion of logic sequence function output 3 Inversion of LSFO3
228 LSFO4 Logic sequence function output 4 ON: Logic sequence function output 4 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 4 is OFF
229 LSFO4N Inversion of logic sequence function output 4 Inversion of LSFO4
230 LSFO5 Logic sequence function output 5 ON: Logic sequence function output 5 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 5 is OFF
231 LSFO5N Inversion of logic sequence function output 5 Inversion of LSFO5
232 LSFO6 Logic sequence function output 6 ON: Logic sequence function output 6 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 6 is OFF
233 LSFO6N Inversion of logic sequence function output 6 Inversion of LSFO6
234 LSFO7 Logic sequence function output 7 ON: Logic sequence function output 7 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 7 is OFF
235 LSFO7N Inversion of logic sequence function output 7 Inversion of LSFO7
236 LSFO8 Logic sequence function output 8 ON: Logic sequence function output 8 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 8 is OFF
237 LSFO8N Inversion of logic sequence function output 8 Inversion of LSFO8
238 LSFO9 Logic sequence function output 9 ON: Logic sequence function output 9 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 9 is OFF
239 LSFO9N Inversion of logic sequence function output 9 Inversion of LSFO9
240 LSFO10 Logic sequence function output 10 ON: Logic sequence function output 10 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 10 is OFF
241 LSFO10N Inversion of logic sequence function output 10 Inversion of LSFO10
242 LSFO11 Logic sequence function output 11 ON: Logic sequence function output 11 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 11 is OFF
243 LSFO11N Inversion of logic sequence function output 11 Inversion of LSFO11
244 LSFO12 Logic sequence function output 12 ON: Logic sequence function output 12 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 12 is OFF
245 LSFO12N Inversion of logic sequence function output 12 Inversion of LSFO12
246 LSFO13 Logic sequence function output 13 ON: Logic sequence function output 13 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 13 is OFF
247 LSFO13N Inversion of logic sequence function output 13 Inversion of LSFO13
248 LSFO14 Logic sequence function output 14 ON: Logic sequence function output 14 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 14 is OFF
249 LSFO14N Inversion of logic sequence function output 14 Inversion of LSFO14
250

251
LSFO15

LSFO15N
Logic sequence function output 15

Inversion of logic sequence function output 15


ON: Logic sequence function output 15 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 15 is OFF
Inversion of LSFO15
11
252 LSFO16 Logic sequence function output 16 ON: Logic sequence function output 16 is ON
OFF: Logic sequence function output 16 is OFF
253 LSFO16N Inversion of logic sequence function output 16 Inversion of LSFO16
254 AOFF Always OFF Always OFF 7.2.2
255 AON Always ON Always ON
Note 1: As function No. that are not described in the table above are assigned "No function", output signal is always “OFF”
at even number, output signal is always “ON” at odd number.

K-39
E6581697

12. Specifications
12.1 Models and their standard specifications
„ Standard specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage class 1-phase 240V class
Applicable motor (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Type VFMB1S
Form 2002PL 2004PL 2007PL 2015PL 2022PL
Capacity (kVA) Note 1) 0.6 1.3 1.8 3.0 4.2
Rating

Output current (A) 1.5 3.3 4.8 8.0 11.0


Note 2) (1.5) (3.3) (4.8) (8.0) (11.0)
Output voltage Note 3) 3-phase 200V to 240V
Overload current rating 150%-60 seconds, 200%-0.5 second (120%-60 seconds, 165%-0.5 second) Note 2)
Voltage-frequency 1-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz
supply

Allowable fluctuation Voltage 170 to 264V Note 4), frequency ±5%


Power

Required Power supply


0.8 1.4 2.3 4.0 5.4
capacity (kVA) Note 5)
Protective method (IEC60529) IP20
Cooling method Forced air-cooled
Color RAL7016
Built-in filter EMC filter

Item Specification
Input voltage class 3-phase 500V class
Applicable motor (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
Type VFMB1
Form 4004PL 4007PL 4015PL 4022PL 4037PL 4055PL 4075PL 4110PL 4150PL
Capacity (kVA) Note 1) 1.1 1.8 3.1 4.2 7.2 11 13 21 25
Rating

Output current (A) 1.5 2.3 4.1 5.5 9.5 14.3 17.0 27.7 33.0
Note 2) (1.5) (2.3) (4.1) (5.5) (9.5) (17.0) (23.0) (33.0) (40.0)
Output voltage Note 3) 3-phase 380V to 500V
Overload current rating 150%-60 seconds, 200%-0.5 second (120%-60 seconds, 165%-0.5 second) Note 2)
Voltage-frequency 3-phase 380V to 500V - 50/60Hz
supply

Allowable fluctuation Voltage 323 to 550V Note 4), frequency ±5%


Power

Required Power supply


capacity (kVA) Note 5) 1.6 2.6 4.7 6.3 10.1 15.2 19.6 26.9 34.9
Protective method (IEC60529) IP20
Cooling method Forced air-cooled

12
Color RAL7016
Built-in filter EMC filter
Note 1. Capacity is calculated at 220V for the 240V models, at 440V for the 500V models.
Note 2. It is a value when the inverter overload characteristic selection (parameter aul) is the constant torque characteristic.
Value in ( ) for the variable torque characteristic.
The output current must be reduced according to the PWM carrier frequency, ambient temperature and supply
voltage.(Refer to section 6.14)
Note 3. Maximum output voltage is the same as the input voltage.
Note 4. At 180V-264V for the 240V models, at 342V-550V for the 500V models when the inverter is used continuously (load of
100%).
Note 5. Required power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of
the input reactor and cables).

L-1
E6581697

„ Common specification
Item Specification
Control system Sinusoidal PWM control
Output voltage range Adjustable within the range of 50 to 330V (240V class) and 50 to 660V (500V class) by correcting the supply
Note1) voltage
Output frequency range 0.1 to 500.0Hz, default setting: 0.5 to 80Hz, maximum frequency: 30 to 500Hz
Minimum setting steps of 0.1Hz: analog input (when the max. frequency is 100Hz), 0.01Hz: Operation panel setting and communication
frequency setting.
Principal control functions

Frequency accuracy Digital setting: within ±0.01% of the max. frequency (-10 to +60°C)
Analog setting: within ±0.5% of the max. frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Voltage/frequency V/f constant, variable torque, automatic torque boost, vector control, automatic energy-saving. dynamic automatic
characteristics energy-saving control, PM motor control, V/F 5-point setting, Auto-tuning. Base frequency (20-500Hz) adjusting to 1
& 2, torque boost (0-30%) adjusting to 1 & 2, adjusting frequency at start (0.1-10Hz)
Frequency setting signal Setting dial on the front panel, external frequency potentiometer (connectable to a potentiometer with a rated
impedance of 1k-10kΩ), 0-10Vdc / -10-+10Vdc (input impedance: 30kΩ), 4-20mAdc (Input impedance: 250Ω).
Terminal board base The characteristic can be set arbitrarily by two-point setting. Possible to set: analog input (VIA, VIB, VIC).
frequency
Frequency jump Three frequencies can be set. Setting of the jump frequency and the range.
Upper- and lower-limit Upper-limit frequency: 0 to max. frequency, lower-limit frequency: 0 to upper-limit frequency
frequencies
PWM carrier frequency Adjustable range of 2.0k to 16.0kHz (default: 4.0kHz).
PID control Setting of proportional gain, integral gain, differential gain and control wait time. Checking whether the amount of
processing amount and the amount of feedback agree.
Acceleration/deceleration Selectable from among acceleration/deceleration times 1 & 2 & 3 (0.0 to 3600 sec.). Automatic
time acceleration/deceleration function. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 1 & 2 and S-pattern adjustable. Control of
forced rapid deceleration and dynamic rapid deceleration.
DC braking Braking start-up frequency: 0 to maximum frequency, braking rate: 0 to 100%, braking time: 0 to 25.5 seconds,
emergency DC braking, motor shaft fixing control.
Dynamic Braking Drive Control and drive circuit is built in the inverter with the braking resistor outside (optional).
Circuit
Input terminal function Possible to select from among about 110 functions, such as forward/reverse run signal input, jog run signal input,
(programmable) operation base signal input and reset signal input, to assign to 8 input terminals. Logic selectable between sink and
source.
Output terminal functions Possible to select from among about 150 functions, such as upper/lower limit frequency signal output, low speed
(programmable) detection signal output, specified speed reach signal output and failure signal output, to assign to FL relay output,
open collector output terminal, and RY output terminals.
Forward/reverse run The RUN and STOP keys on the operation panel are used to start and stop operation, respectively.
Operation specifications

Forward/reverse run possible through communication and logic inputs from the terminal block.
Jog run Jog mode, if selected, allows jog operation from the terminal board and also from remote keypad.
Preset speed operation Base frequency + 15-speed operation possible by changing the combination of 4 contacts on the terminal board.
Retry operation Capable of restarting automatically after a check of the main circuit elements in case the protective function is
activated. 10 times (Max.) (selectable with a parameter)
Various prohibition settings Possible to write-protect parameters and to prohibit the change of panel frequency settings and the use of operation
/ Password setting panel for operation, emergency stop or resetting. Possible to write-protect parameters by setting 4 digits password
and terminal input.
Regenerative power ride- Possible to keep the motor running using its regenerative energy in case of a momentary power failure (default:
through control OFF).
Auto-restart operation In the event of a momentary power failure, the inverter reads the rotational speed of the coasting motor and outputs
a frequency appropriate to the rotational speed in order to restart the motor smoothly. This function can also be

12 Light-load high-speed
operation
used when switching to commercial power.
Increases the operating efficiency of the machine by increasing the rotational speed of the motor when it is operated
under light load.
Drooping function When two or more inverters are used to operate a single load, this function prevents load from concentrating on one
inverter due to unbalance.
Override function External input signal adjustment is possible to the operation frequency command value.
Relay output signal 1c- contact output and 1a- contact output: Note2)
Maximum switching capacity : 250Vac-2A (At resistive load cosΦ=1), 30Vdc-1A , 250Vac-1A (cosΦ=0.4)
Minimum permissible load : 5Vdc-100mA, 24Vdc-5mA
<Continued overleaf>

L-2
E6581697

<Continued>
Item Specification
Protective function Stall prevention, current limitation, over-current, output short circuit, over-voltage, over-voltage limitation,
Protective function

undervoltage, ground fault, detection, input phase failure, output phase failure, overload protection by electronic
thermal function, armature over-current at start-up, load side over-current at start-up, over-torque, undercurrent,
overheating, cumulative operation time, life alarm, emergency stop, various pre-alarms
Electronic thermal Switching between standard motor and constant-torque VF motor, switching between motors 1 & 2, setting of
characteristic overload trip time, adjustment of stall prevention levels 1 & 2, selection of overload stall
Reset function Function of resetting by closing contact 1a or by turning off power or the operation panel. This function is also used
to save and clear trip records.
Alarms Overcurrent, overvoltage, overload, overheat, communication error, under-voltage, setting error, retry in process,
upper/lower limits
Causes of failures Overcurrent, overvoltage, overheat, output short-circuit, ground fault, overload on inverter, arm overcurrent at start-
up, overcurrent on the load side at start-up, CPU fault, EEPROM fault, RAM fault, ROM fault, communication error.
(Selectable: dynamic braking resistor overload, emergency stop, under-voltage, small current, over-torque, motor
overload, input phase failure, output phase failure)
Monitoring function Operation frequency, operation frequency command, forward/reverse run, output current, input voltage (DC
detection), output voltage, torque, load factor of inverter, input power, output power, information on input terminals,
information on output terminals, overload and region setting, version of CPU1, version of CPU2, PID feedback
value, frequency command (after compensation), causes of past trips 1to 8, parts replacement alarm, cumulative
operation time
Display function

Past trip monitoring Stores data on the past eight trips: number of trips that occurred in succession, operation frequency, operation
function frequency command, forward/reverse run, output current, input voltage (DC detection), output voltage, information
on input terminals, information on output terminals, and cumulative operation time when each trip occurred.
Output for frequency Analog output for motor: 1mA dc full-scale dc ammeter
meter 0 - 20mA (4 to 20mA) output: DC ammeter (allowable load resistance: Less than 750Ω)
0 - 10V output: DC voltmeter (allowable load resistance: Over 1kΩ)
Resolution: Maximum of 1/1000
4-digit 7-segments LED Frequency: inverter output frequency.
Alarm: stall alarm “c”, overvoltage alarm “p”, overload alarm “l”, overheat alarm “h”, communication
alarm “t”.
Status: inverter status (frequency, cause of activation of protective function, input/output voltage, output
current, etc.) and parameter settings.
Free-unit display: arbitrary unit (e.g. rotating speed) corresponding to output frequency.
Indicator Lamps indicating the inverter status by lighting, such as RUN lamp, MON lamp, PRG lamp, % lamp, Hz lamp, EASY
lamp, CANopen lamp, NET lamp. The charge lamp indicates that the main circuit capacitors are electrically charged.
Location of use Indoors; not exposed to direct sunlight, corrosive gas, explosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, or dust; and vibration
Environments

2
of less than 5.9m/s (10 to 55Hz).
Elevation 3000 m or less (current reduction required over 1000 m) Note 3)
Ambient temperature -10 to +60°C Note 4)
Storage temperature -25 to +70°C
Relative humidity 5 to 95% (free from condensation and vapor).
Note 1. Maximum output voltage is the same as the input voltage.
Note 2. A chattering (momentary ON/OFF of contact) is generated by external factors of the vibration and the impact, etc. In
particular, please set the filter of 10ms or more, or timer for measures when connecting it directly with input unit
terminal of programmable controller. Please use the OUT terminal as much as possible when the programmable
controller is connected.
Note 3. Current must be reduced by 1% for each 100 m over 1000 m. For example, 90% at 2000m and 80% at 3000m.
Note 4. Above 50°C: Use the inverter with the output current reduced.
12
. Side by side installation (with no space between inverters): Use the inverter with the output current reduced.
(Refer to section 6.14 for details)

L-3
E6581697

12.2 Outside dimensions and mass


„ Outside dimensions and mass
Applicable motor Dimensions (mm) Approx. weight
Voltage class Inverter type Drawing
(kW) W H D W1 H1 H2 (kg)
0.2 VFMB1S-2002PL 1.7
0.4 VFMB1S-2004PL 45 29 A
1-phase 240V 0.75 VFMB1S-2007PL 270 232 258 47 1.8
1.5 VFMB1S-2015PL 2.1
60 42 B
2.2 VFMB1S-2022PL 2.2
0.4 VFMB1-4004PL 1.8
0.75 VFMB1-4007PL 45 29 A
1.9
1.5 VFMB1-4015PL 270 258 47
2.2 VFMB1-4022PL 2.2
60 42 B
3-phase 500V 4.0 VFMB1-4037PL 232 2.4
5.5 VFMB1-4055PL
150 220 130 210 12 C 4.3
7.5 VFMB1-4075PL
11 VFMB1-4110PL 6.8
180 310 160 295 20 D
15 VFMB1-4150PL 6.9
Note. H dimension in Fig. C is not included in the protuberance for operation panel.

„ Outline drawing
φ5.5
φ10 14 123 W
7

5.45
258

248

R2
.7
5

φ5
H2

W1(Mounting dimension)

12
8
7

φ5.5
φ10
5.45

H1(Mounting dimension)

R2
.75

Fig.A

L-4
E6581697

φ5.5
φ10 14 123 W
7

5.45
258
248

H
R2
.7
5

φ5

H2
9 W1(Mounting dimension)
φ5.5
7

φ10
5.45
H1(Mounting dimension)

R2
.7
5

Fig.B

φ11 φ5 φ6
7
5
3

φ14
9
8
H1(Mounting dimension)

H1(Mounting dimension)
H

H
R
2.
5

R3
H2

10 W1(Mounting dimension)

12
W
H2

10 W1(Mounting dimension)
W

VF-MB1

VF-MB1
D

94.5
88

74.5
70

150 178
EMC plate EMC plate

Fig.C Fig.D

L-5
E6581697

13. Before making a service call


- Trip information and remedies
13.1 Trip causes/warnings and remedies
When a problem arises, diagnose it in accordance with the following table.
If it is found that replacement of parts is required or the problem cannot be solved by any remedy described in the
table, contact your Toshiba dealer.

[Trip information]
Error code Failure code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 0001 Overcurrent during • The acceleration time  is too short. • Increase the acceleration time .
acceleration
• The V/F setting is improper. • Check the V/F parameter.

• A restart signal is input to the rotating • Use  (auto-restart) and 
motor after a momentary stop, etc. (ride-through control).
• A special motor (e.g. motor with a small • In case of pt=0, 1, 7, decrease vb.
impedance) is used. • In case of pt=2 to 6, set f415
(Motor rated current) and make an auto-
tuning.
• Low inductance motor especially High • Choose the higher power range drive.
speed motor is used. (1 class up drive is recommended.)
 0002 Overcurrent during • The deceleration time  is too short. • Increase the deceleration time .
deceleration • Low inductance motor especially High • Choose the higher power range drive.
speed motor is used. (1 class up drive is recommended.)
 0003 Overcurrent during • The load fluctuates abruptly. • Reduce the load fluctuation.
constant speed • The load is in an abnormal condition. • Check the load (operated machine).
operation • Low inductance motor especially High • Choose the higher power range drive.
speed motor is used. (1 class up drive is recommended.)
 0004 Overcurrent (An • The insulation of the output main circuit or • Check the secondary wiring and insulation
overcurrent on the motor is defective. state.
load side at start-up) • The motor has too small impedance. • Set f613=2, 3
 0005 Arm overcurrent at • A main circuit elements is defective. • Make a service call.
start-up
* 0008 Input phase failure • A phase failure occured in the input line of • Check the main circuit input line for phase
 the main circuit. failure.
• The capacitor in the main circuit lacks • Check the capacitor in the main circuit for
capacitance. exhaustion.
* 0009 Output phase failure • A phase failure occurred in the output line • Check the main circuit output line, motor,
 of the main circuit. etc. for phase failure.
• Select output phase failure detection
parameter f605.
 000A Overvoltage during
acceleration
• The input voltage fluctuates abnormally.
(1) The power supply has a capacity of
200kVA or more.
• Insert a suitable input reactor.
13
(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is
opened or closed.
(3) A system using a thyristor is connected
to the same power distribution line.
• A restart signal is input to the rotating • Use  (auto-restart) and 
motor after a momentary stop, etc. (ride-through control).

* This marking trips can be selected valid or invalid by parameters.


(Continued overleaf)

M-1
E6581697

(Continued)
Error code Failure code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 000B Overvoltage during • The deceleration time  is too short. • Increase the deceleration time .
deceleration (Regenerative energy is too large.)
• Overvoltage limit operation  is set • Set overvoltage limit operation  to
to 1. (Disabled). 0, 2, 3.
• The input voltage fluctuates abnormally. • Insert a suitable input reactor.
(1) The power supply has a capacity of
200kVA or more.
(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is
opened and closed.
(3) A system using a thyristor is connected
to the same power distribution line.
 000C Overvoltage during • The input voltage fluctuates abnormally. • Insert a suitable input reactor.
constant-speed (1) The power supply has a capacity of
operation 200kVA or more.
(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is
opened or closed.
(3) A system using a thyrister is connected
to the same power distribution line.
• The motor is in a regenerative state • Install an optional dynamic braking
because the load causes the motor to run module.
at a frequency higher than the inverter
output frequency.
 000D Inverter overload • The acceleration time ACC is too short. • Increase the acceleration time .
• The DC braking amount is too large. • Reduce the DC braking amount 
and the DC braking time .
• The V/F setting is improper. • Check the V/F parameter setting.
• A restart signal is input to the rotating • Use  (auto-restart) and 
motor after a momentary stop, etc. (ride-through control).
• The load is too large. • Use an inverter with a larger rating.
 000E Motor overload • The V/F setting is improper. • Check the V/F parameter setting.
• The motor is locked up. • Check the load (operated machine).
• Low-speed operation is performed • Adjust  to the overload that the
continuously. motor can withstand during operation in a
• An excessive load is applied to the motor low speed range.
during operation.
 003E Main module • The carrier frequency is high and load • Raise the operation frequency.
overload current has increased at low speeds • Reduce the load.
(mainly at 15Hz or less). • Reduce the carrier frequency.
• When an operating motor is started up at
0Hz, use the auto-restart function.
• Set carrier frequency control mode
selection f316 to 1. (carrier frequency
with automatic reduction).
 000F Dynamic braking • The deceleration time is too short. • Increase the deceleration time .
resistor overload trip • Dynamic braking is too large. • Increase the capacity of dynamic braking
resistor (wattage) and adjust PBR
capacity parameter .
* 0020 Over-torque trip 1 • Over-torque reaches to a detection level • Enable  (over-torque trip selection).

13 
 0041 Over-torque trip 2
during operation.

• Overcurrent stall or torque limit is


• Check system error.

• Reduce the load.


occurred in f452 or more during power • Increase the overcurrent stall level or
running. torque limit level.
* This marking trips can be selected valid or invalid by parameters.
(Continued overleaf)

M-2
E6581697

(Continued)
Error code Failure code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 0010 Overheat • The cooling fan does not rotate. • The fan requires replacement if it does
not rotate during operation.
• The ambient temperature is too high. • Restart the operation by resetting the
inverter after it has cooled down enough.
• The vent is blocked up. • Secure sufficient space around the inverter.
• A heat generating device is installed close • Do not place any heat generating device
to the inverter. near the inverter.
 002E Thermal trip stop • A thermal trip command (input terminal • The motor is overheated, so check
command from function:  or ) is issued by an whether the current flowing into the motor
external device external control device. exceeds the rated current.
 0011 Emergency stop • During automatic operation or remote • Reset the inverter.
operation, a stop command is entered • If the emergency stop signal is input,
from the operation panel or a remote reset after releasing this signal.
input device.
 0012 EEPROM fault 1 • A data writing error occurs. • Turn off the inverter, then turn it again. If it
does not recover from the error, make a
service call.
 0013 EEPROM fault 2 • Power supply is cut off during  • Turn the power off temporarily and turn it
operation and data writing is aborted. back on, and then try  operation
• The error occurred when various data again.
was written. • Write the data again. Make a service call
when it happening frequently.
 0014 EEPROM fault 3 • A data reading error occurred. • Turn off the inverter, then turn it again. If it
does not recover from the error, make a
service call.
 0015 Main unit RAM fault • The control RAM is defective. • Make a service call.
 0016 Main unit ROM fault • The control ROM is defective. • Make a service call.
 0017 CPU fault 1 • The control CPU is defective. • Make a service call.
 0018 Communication error • The communication was broken off. • Check the remote control device, cables,
etc.
 001A Current detector fault • The current detector is defective. • Make a service call.
 001B Optional unit fault 1 • An optional device has failed. • Check the connection of optional board.
(such as a communication device)
 001C Remote keypad • After run signal is activated by RUN key • In case the remote keypad is
disconnection fault of the remote keypad, disconnection is disconnected, press STOP key before.
occurred in 10 seconds or more. • This fault is disabled by f731=1
setting.
* 001D Low-current • The output current decreased to a low- • Enable  (low-current detection).
operation current detection level during operation. • Check the suitable detection level for the

Trip system (, , ).
• Make a service call if the setting is
correct.
* 001E Undervoltage trip • The input voltage (in the main circuit) is • Check the input voltage.
(main circuit) too low. • Enable  (undervoltage trip

selection).
• To take measures to momentary power
failure, set =, Regenerative

* This marking trips can be selected valid or invalid by parameters.


power ride-through control f302 and
Auto-restart control selection f301. 13
(Continued overleaf)

M-3
E6581697

(Continued)
Error code Failure code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 0028 Auto-tuning error • The motor parameter , , , • Set the left column parameters correctly
0054 ,  are not set correctly. as a motor name plate and make an auto-
 0055 tuning again.
 0056 • Set parameter f416 to smaller 70% of
 the present value, and execute the auto-
tuning again.
• The motor with the capacity of 2 classes • Set the left column parameters correctly
or less than the inverter is used. as a motor name plate and make an auto-
• The output cable is too thin. tuning again.
• The inverter is used for loads other than • Then set f400=1, when trip occurs.
those of three-phase induction motors.
• The motor is not connected. • Connect the motor.
• Check whether the secondary magnetic
contactor.
• The motor is rotating. • Make an auto-tuning again after the
rotation of the motor stops.
• Parameter pt=6 is set and High speed • Choose the higher power range drive.
motor is connected. (1 class up drive is recommended.)
 0022 Ground fault trip • A ground fault occurs in the output cable • Check the cable and the motor for ground
or the motor. faults.
• Overcurrent of dynamic braking resistor • Increase the deceleration time dec.
• Set the supply voltage correction f307
to 1 or 3.
* 002F Step-out (for PM • The motor shaft is locked. • Unlock the motor shaft.
motor drive only) • One output phase is open. • Check the interconnect cables between

the inverter and the motor.
• An impact load is applied. • Prolong the acceleration / deceleration
time.
• Using the DC braking function. • Turn off the Step-out function when using
the DC braking function or change the DC
braking to Servo lock function.
 003B Safe torque off error • Error of safe torque off circuit • Make a service call.

 0029 Inverter type error • It may be a breakdown failure. • Make a service call.
 002D Over speed fault • The input voltage fluctuates abnormally. • Check the input voltage.
• Over speed fault due to the overvoltage • Install an optional dynamic braking
limit operation. module.
* 0032 Brea in analog signal • The input signal from VIC is equal to or • Check the VIC signal cable for breaks.
cable less than the  setting. Also, check the input signal value or

setting of .
 0033 CPU communications • A communications error occurs between • Make a service call.
error control CPUs.
 0034 Excessive torque • The automatic torque boost parameter • Set a lower automatic torque boost
boosted  setting is too high. parameter  setting.
• The motor has too small impedance. • Make an auto-tuning.
 0035 CPU fault 2 • The control CPU is defective. • Make a service call.

 0037 Optional unit fault 2 • An optional device is defective. • Make a service call.

 003A CPU fault 3 • The control CPU is defective. • Make a service call.

13 

0040
0045
PTC fault
Servo lock fault
• PTC thermal protection is occurred. • Check the PTC in motor.
• The motor shaft is not locked in servo lock • Reduce the load in servo lock operation.
operation.
* This marking trips can be selected valid or invalid by parameters.

M-4
E6581697

[Alarm information] Each message in the table is displayed to give a warning but does not cause the inverter to trip.
Error code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 ST terminal OFF • The ST-CC circuit is opened. • Close the ST-CC circuit.

 Undervoltage in main • The supply voltage between R, S and T is • Measure the main circuit supply voltage.
circuit under voltage. If the voltage is at a normal level, the inverter
requires repairing.
 Retry in process • The inverter is in process of retry. • The inverter restarts automatically. Be careful
• A momentary stop occurred. of the machine because it may suddenly
The motor speed is being detected. restart.
 Frequency point • The frequency setting signals at points 1 • Set the frequency setting signals at points 1
setting error alarm and 2 are set too close to each other. and 2 apart from each other.
 Clear command • This message is displayed when pressing • Press the STOP key again to clear the trip.
acceptable the STOP key while an error code is
displayed.
 Emergency stop • The operation panel is used to stop the • Press the STOP key for an emergency stop.
command acceptable operation in automatic control or remote To cancel the emergency stop, press any
control mode. other key.
/ Setting error alarm / • An error is found in a setting when data is • Check whether the setting is made correctly.
An error code and reading or writing.

data are displayed
alternately twice
each.
/ Display of first/last • The first and last data item in the  • Press MODE key to exit the data group.
data items data group is displayed.

 DC braking • DC braking in process • The message goes off in several tens of
seconds if no problem occurs. Note)
 Flowing out of • The number of digits such as frequencies • Lower the frequency free unit magnification
excess number of is more than 4. .
 digits (The upper digits have a priority.)

 Momentary power • The slowdown stop prohibition function • To restart operation, reset the inverter or input
failure deceleration set with  (momentary power an operation signal again.
stop prohibition failure ride-through operation) is
function activated. activated.
 Auto-stop because of • The automatic stop function selected with • This function is cancelled, when frequency
continuous operation  was activated. reference reaches LL+0.2Hz or operation
at the lower-limit command is OFF.
frequency
 Parameters in the • Parameters are being initialized to default • Normal if the message disappears after a
process of values. while (several seconds to several tens of
initialization seconds).
 Points setting alarm 1 • In case of pt=7, there are same setting • Set the points to different values.
value at least two on parameter vl,
f190, f192, f194, f196, or
f198 except 0.0Hz.
 Points setting alarm 2 • In case of pt=7, the inclination of V/f is • Set the inclination of V/f to be flat.
too high.
 Output frequency • An attempt was made to operate at a • Operate at a frequency within 10 times the
upper limit frequency higher than 10 times the base base frequency.
frequency ( or ).
 Operation panel key • The RUN or STOP key is held down for • Check the operation panel.
fault more than 20 seconds.

 S3 terminal alarm


• The RUN or STOP key is faulty.
• Slide switch SW2 and parameter f147 • Match the settings of SW2 and f147.
13
settings are different. • Power supply OFF and ON after these
settings.
 Auto-tuning • Auto-tuning in process • Normal if it the message disappears after a
few seconds.
Note) When the DC braking (DB) function is assigned by using the input terminal function 22 or 23,
it is normal if “” disappears when opening the circuit between the terminal and CC.
(Continued overleaf)

M-5
E6581697

(Continued)
Error code Problem Possible causes Remedies
 Break in analog • The signal input via VIC is below the • Check the cables for breaks. And check the
signal cable analog signal detection level set with setting of input signal or setting value of
 and setting value of  is  and .
one or more.
 In forced operation • “” and operation frequency is • It is normal the alarm is gone out after the
displayed alternately in operation of forced forced fire-speed control operation.
fire-speed control.
 STO signal OFF • STO terminal is in open-circuit. • Close STO and + SU circuit.
/ Password verification • After the password setting (f738), the • If the password is correct, pass is displayed
result password was input to f739 (password and if it is incorrect, fail is displayed.
 verification).
/ Switching display of • The EASY key was pushed in the • When easy is displayed, setting mode
Easy setting mode / standard monitor mode. becomes easy setting mode. When std is
 Standard setting displayed, it becomes standard setting mode.
mode
 Input requirement of • Checking the region setting parameter • Set a region setting by using setting dial.
region setting set was set to 0. Refer to section 3.1.
 No trip of past trip • No new record of past trip, after past trips • Normal operation.
were clear.
 No detailed • The detailed information of past trip is • Normal operation.
information of past read by pushing the center of setting dial To be returned by pressing MODE key.
trip during blinking nerr ⇔ number.

[Prealarm display]
 Overcurrent alarm Same as  (overcurrent)
 Overvoltage alarm Same as  (overvoltage)
 Overload alarm Same as  and  (overload)
 Overheat alarm Same as  (overheat)
 Communication alarm Same as err5 (communication fault)

If two or more problems arise simultaneously, one of the following alarms appears and blinks.
, , 
The blinking alarms , , , h, t are displayed in this order from left to right.

13

M-6
E6581697

13.2 Restoring the inverter from a trip


Do not reset the inverter when tripped because of a failure or error before eliminating the cause. Resetting the
tripped inverter before eliminating the problem causes it to trip again.

The inverter can be restored from a trip by any of the following operations:

(1) By turning off the power (Keep the inverter off until the LED turns off.)
Note) See inverter trip hold selection  for details.
(2) By means of an external signal (Short circuit across RES and CC on control terminal block → Open): The
reset function must be assigned to the input terminal block. (function number 8, 9)
(3) By panel keypad operation
(4) By inputting a trip clear signal from communication (Refer to communication manual for details.)

To reset the inverter by panel keypad operation, follow these steps.


1. Press the STOP key and make sure that  is displayed.
2. Pressing the STOP key again will reset the inverter if the cause of the trip has already been eliminated.

, When any overload function [: inverter overload, : motor overload, : braking resistor
overload] is active, the inverter cannot be reset by inputting a reset signal from an external device or
by operation panel operation before the virtual cooling time has passed.

Virtual cooling time ...  : about 30 seconds after the occurrence of a trip
 : about 120 seconds after a occurrence of a trip
 : about 20 seconds after a occurrence of a trip

, In case of a trip due to overheat (), the inverter checks the temperature within. Wait until the
temperature in the inverter falls sufficiently before resetting the inverter.
, The inverter cannot be reset while the emergency stop signal is being input from the terminal.
, The inverter cannot be reset while the pre-alarm is occurred.

[Caution]
Turning the inverter off then turning it on again resets the inverter immediately. You can use this mode of
resetting if there is a need to reset the inverter immediately. Note, however, that this operation may damage
the system or the motor if it is repeated frequently.

13

M-7
E6581697

13.3 If the motor does not run while no trip message is


displayed ...
If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed, follow these steps to track down the cause.

YES:
The motor does not run.
NO :

Is the 7-segment LED Check the power supply and the MCCB. Supply the power
extinguished? Is power being supplied normally? normally.

Make a service call.

Is  displayed? • The ST-CC circuit is opened. Close the circuit between CC and the terminal to which
the ST (standby) function on the control circuit terminal is assigned.
• The FRR and CC circuit is closed. Open across CC and the terminal that is assigned
the FRR (coast) on the control terminal block.
• Check the always active functions selection parameter () setting. (Refer to
section 6.3.1)

Is any failure message Track down and eliminate the cause of the failure and then reset the inverter.
displayed? Refer to section 13.2 for the way to reset.
(Refer to section 1.3.1)

Are  and a failure The inverter is in the process of retrying. The retry function can be disabled by normal
message displayed alternately? or emergency stop operation, or by turning off the inverter.

Is the LED of the RUN/STOP • When operation panel operation is selected ... Press the RUN key to start the operation.
key lighted? • Check whether the operation panel operation frequency is set properly.
(Refer to section 3.2.2.)
• When another control mode is selected ... Change the setting of the operation control
mode selection . (Refer to section 3.2.1)

Is the LED of the RUN/STOP • When operation panel is selected: Change the run operation selection parameter
key off?  setting to 1 or 2. (Refer to section 3.2.1)
• You can check the setting of each input terminal on the monitor. (Refer to section 8.2.1)
• When another control mode is selected ... Check whether the external operation
command is entered.

 displayed? • Check to see that the frequency setting signal is not set at zero.
• Check the settings of the frequency setting signal parameters .

13
(Refer to section 3.2.2)
• Check the settings of frequency setting signal points 1 and 2. (Refer to section 6.6.2)
• Check the operation start frequency setting to see if it is larger than the operation
frequency. (Refer to section 6.7.2)
• Check that the frequency setting (preset-speed operation frequency, etc.) is not set at
zero.
• Check that the motor is not under a too large load or not locked up.
→Reduce the load if necessary.

Determine the cause, using the parameter display function and the status monitoring function.
Refer to chapter 11 for the parameter display function or chapter 8 for the status motoring function.

M-8
E6581697

13.4 How to determine the causes of other problems


The following table provides a listing of other problems, their possible causes and remedies.

Problems Causes and remedies


The motor runs in the • Invert the phases of the output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
wrong direction. • Invert the forward/reverse run-signal terminals of the external input device.
(Refer to section 7.2.1)
• Change the setting of the parameter  in the case of panel operation.
The motor runs but its • The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
speed does not change • The soft stall function is activated. Disable the soft stall function. (Refer to section 3.5)
normally. • The maximum frequency  and the upper limit frequency  are set too low.
Increase the maximum frequency  and the upper limit frequency .
• The frequency setting signal is too low. Check the signal set value, circuit, cables, etc.
• Check the setting characteristics (point 1 and point 2 settings) of the frequency setting
signal parameters. (Refer to section 6.6.2)
• If the motor runs at a low speed, check to see that the stall prevention function is
activated because the torque boost amount is too large.
Adjust the torque boost value () and the acceleration time ().
(Refer to section 5.13 and 5.4)
The motor does not • The acceleration time () or the deceleration time () is set too short.
ac-celerate or decelerate Increase the acceleration time () or the deceleration time ().
smoothly.
A too large current flows • The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
into the motor. • If the motor runs at a low speed, check whether the torque boost value is too large.
(Refer to section 5.13)
The motor runs at a higher • The motor has an improper voltage rating. Use a motor with a proper voltage rating.
or lower speed than the • The motor terminal voltage is too low.
specified one. Check the setting of the base frequency voltage parameter () . (Refer to section
5.11)
Replace the cable with a cable larger in diameter.
• The reduction gear ratio, etc., are not set properly. Adjust the reduction gear ratio, etc.
• The output frequency is not set correctly. Check the output frequency range.
• Adjust the base frequency. (Refer to section 5.11)
The motor speed fluctu-ates • The load is too heavy or too light. Reduce the load fluctuation.
during operation. • The inverter or motor used does not have a rating large enough to drive the load.
Use an inverter or motor with a rating large enough.
• Check whether the frequency setting signal changes.
• If the V/F control selection parameter  is set at 3, check the vector control setting,
operation conditions, etc. (Refer to section 5.12)
Parameter settings cannot • Change the setting of the parameter setting selection prohibited parameter  to
be changed.  (enabled) if it is set to  to 4 (prohibited).
• Set the verification code to , if password has entered by the password setting
. (Refer to section 6.29.1)
• Switch off the logic input terminal, if this terminal is assigned to input terminal
menu 200 to 203 (Parameter editing / reading prohibition).
• For reasons of safety, some parameters cannot be reprogrammed while the inverter is
running. (Refer to section 4.2)
13
How to cope with parameter setting-related problems
If you forget parameters • You can search for all reset parameters and change their settings.
which have been reset * Refer to section 4.3.1 for details.
If you want to return all • You can return all parameters which have been reset to their default settings.
reset parameters to their * Refer to section 4.3.2 for details.
respective default settings

M-9
E6581697

14. Inspection and maintenance

Warning
• The equipment must be inspected every day.
If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be discovered
which could lead to accidents.
• Before inspection, perform the following steps.
(1) Shut off all input power to the inverter.
Mandatory (2) Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.
action (3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (400V/800V DC or more), and check that the voltage to
the DC main circuits (across PA-PC) does not exceed 45V.
Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.
Be sure to inspect the inverter regularly and periodically to prevent it from breaking down because of the environment
of use, such as temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, or deterioration of its components with aging.

14.1 Regular inspection


Since electronic parts are susceptible to heat, install the inverter in a cool, well-ventilated and dust-free place.
This is essential for increasing the service life.
The purpose of regular inspections is to maintain the correct environment of use and to find any sign of failure or
malfunction by comparing current operation data with past operation records.
Inspection procedure
Subject of
Inspection Criteria for judgment
inspection Inspection item Inspection method
cycle
1) Dust, temperature Occasionally 1) Visual check, check 1) Improve the environment if
and gas by means of a it is found to be
thermometer, smell unfavorable.
1. Indoor check
environment 2) Drop of water or Occasionally 2) Visual check 2) Check for any trace of
other liquid water condensation.
3) Room temperature Occasionally 3) Check by means of
3) Max. temperature: 60°C
a thermometer
If something unusual is
found, open the door and
check the transformer,
2. Units and Tactile check of the
1) Vibration and noise Occasionally reactors, contactors, relays,
components cabinet
cooling fan, etc., inside. If
necessary, stop the
operation.
1) Load current Occasionally Moving-iron type AC To be within the rated
3. Operation ammeter current, voltage and
data
(output side)
2) Voltage (*) Occasionally Rectifier
voltmeter
type AC temperature.
No significant difference
from data collected in a
14
3) Temperature Occasionally Thermometer
normal state.
*) The voltage measured may slightly vary from voltmeter to voltmeter. When measuring the voltage,
always take readings from the same circuit tester or voltmeter.

N-1
E6581697

■ Check points
1. Something unusual in the installation environment
2. Something unusual in the cooling system
3. Unusual vibration or noise
4. Overheating or discoloration
5. Unusual odor
6. Unusual motor vibration, noise or overheating
7. Adhesion or accumulation of foreign substances (conductive substances)

■ Cautions about cleaning


To clean the inverter, wipe dirt off only its surface with a soft cloth but do not try to remove dirt or stains from any
other part. If stubborn stains persist, remove them by wiping gently with a cloth dampened with neutral detergent
or ethanol.
Never use any of the chemicals in the table below; the use of any of them may damage or peel the coating away
from molded parts (such as plastic covers and units) of the inverter.

Acetone Ethylene chloride Tetrachloroethane


Benzen Ethyl acetate Trichloroethylene
Chloroform Glycerin Xylene

14.2 Periodical inspection


Make a periodical inspection at intervals of 3 or 6 months depending on the operating conditions.

Warning
•Before inspection, perform the following steps.
(1) Shut off all input power to the inverter.
(2) Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.
Mandatory (3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (400V/800V DC or more), and check that the voltage to
action the DC main circuits (across PA-PC) does not exceed 45V.
Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.
• Never replace any part.
This could be a cause of electric shock, fire and bodily injury. To replace parts, call the local sales
agency.
Prohibited

14

N-2
E6581697

■ Check items
1. Check to see if all screwed terminals are tightened firmly. If any screw is found loose, tighten it again
with a screwdriver.
2. Check to see if all caulked terminals are fixed properly. Check them visually to see that there is no trace
of overheating around any of them.
3. Check all cables and wires for damage. Check them visually.
4. Remove dirt and dust. With a vacuum cleaner, remove dirt and dust. When cleaning, clean the vents
and the printed circuit boards. Always keep them clean to prevent an accident due to dirt or dust.
5. If no power is supplied to the inverter for a long time, the performance of its large-capacity electrolytic
capacitor declines.
When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, supply it with electricity once every two years, for 5
hours or more each, to recover the performance of the large-capacity electrolytic capacitor. And also
check the function of the inverter. It is advisable not to supply the commercial power directly to the
inverter but to gradually increase the power supply voltage with a transformer, etc.
6. If the need arises, conduct an insulation test on the main circuit terminal board only, using a 500V
insulation tester. Never conduct an insulation test on control terminals other than terminals on the
printed circuit board or on control terminals. When testing the motor for insulation performance, separate
it from the inverter in advance by disconnecting the cables from the inverter output terminals U/T1, V/T2
and W/T3. When conducting an insulation test on peripheral circuits other than the motor circuit,
disconnect all cables from the inverter so that no voltage is applied to the inverter during the test.

(Note) Before an insulation test, always disconnect all cables from the main circuit terminal board and test
the inverter separately from other equipment..

R/L 1 S/L 2 T/L 3 U/T 1 V/T 2 W/T 3

500V
(megger)

7. Never test the inverter for pressure. A pressure test may cause damage to its components.
8. Voltage and temperature check
Recommended voltmeter : Input side ... Moving-iron type voltmeter ( )

Output side ... Rectifier type voltmeter ( )

It will be very helpful for detecting a defect if you always measure and record the ambient temperature
before, during and after the operation.
14

N-3
E6581697

■ Replacement of expendable parts


The inverter is composed of a large number of electronic parts including semiconductor devices.
The following parts deteriorate with the passage of time because of their composition or physical properties.
The use of aged or deteriorated parts leads to degradation in the performance or a breakdown of the
inverter. To avoid such trouble, the inverter should be checked periodically.

Note) Generally, the life of a part depends on the ambient temperature and the conditions of use. The life
spans listed below are applicable to parts when used under normal environmental conditions.

1) Cooling fan
The fan for cooling heat-generating parts has a service life of about ten years. The fan also needs to be
replaced if it makes a noise or vibrates abnormally.
2) Smoothing capacitor
The smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor in the main circuit DC section degrades in performance
because of ripple currents, etc. It becomes necessary to replace the capacitor after it is used for about
10 years under normal conditions. Since the smoothing capacitor is mounted on a printed circuit board,
it must be replaced together with the circuit board.
<Criteria for appearance check>
• Absence of liquid leak
• Safety valve in the depressed position
• Measurement of electrostatic capacitance and insulation resistance

Note: Checking the life alarm function is useful for roughly determining the parts replacement time.
To ensure customer safety, you should never replace parts on your own. (It is also possible to
monitor the part replacement alarm and output a signal.)

14

N-4
E6581697

■ Standard replacement cycles of principal parts


As guides, the table below lists part replacement cycles that were estimated based on the assumption that
the inverter would be used in a normal use environment under normal conditions (ambient temperature,
ventilation conditions, and energizing time). The replacement cycle of each part does not mean its service
life but the number of years over which its failure rate does not increase significantly.
Also, make use of the life alarm function.

Standard replacement
Part name Replacement mode and others
cycle Note 1:
Replacement with a new one (To be determined after
Cooling fan 10 years
inspection)
Main circuit
Replacement with a new one (To be determined after
smoothing aluminum 10 years Note 2
inspection)
electrolytic capacitor
Relays - Whether to replace or not depends on the check results
Aluminum electrolytic
Replace with a new circuit board (To be determined after
capacitor mounted on 10 years Note 2
inspection)
a printed circuit board
Note 1: The replacement cycle is calculated on the assumption that the average ambient temperature over
a year is 40°C. The environment must be free of corrosive gases, oil mist and dust.
Note 2: Figures are for when the inverter output current is 80% of the rated current of the inverter.
Note 3: The life of parts varies greatly depending on the operating environment.

14.3 Making a call for servicing


For the Toshiba service network, refer to the back cover of this instruction manual. If defective conditions are
encountered, please contact the Toshiba service section in charge via your Toshiba dealer.
When making a call for servicing, please inform us of the contents of the rating label on the right panel of the
inverter, the presence or absence of optional devices, etc., in addition to the details of the failure.

14.4 Keeping the inverter in storage


Take the following precautions when keeping the inverter in storage temporarily or for a long period of time.

1. Store the inverter in a well-ventilated place away from heat, damp, dust and metal powder.
2. If no power is supplied to the inverter for a long time, the performance of its large-capacity electrolytic
capacitor declines.
When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, supply it with electricity once every two years, for 5 hours
or more each, to recover the performance of the large-capacity electrolytic capacitor. And also check the
function of the inverter. It is advisable not to supply the commercial power directly to the inverter but to
14
gradually increase the power supply voltage with a transformer, etc.

N-5
E6581697

15. Warranty
Any part of the inverter that proves defective will be repaired and adjusted free of charge under the following conditions:

1. This warranty applies only to the inverter main unit.


2. Any part of the inverter which fails or is damaged under normal use within twelve months from the date of delivery shall
be repaired free of charge.
3. For the following kinds of failure or damage, the repair cost shall be borne by the customer even within the warranty
period.
• Failure or damage caused by improper or incorrect use or handling, or unauthorized repair or modification of the
inverter
• Failure or damage caused by the inverter falling or an accident during transportation after the purchase
• Failure or damage caused by fire, salty water or wind, corrosive gas, earthquake, storm or flood, lightning,
abnormal voltage supply, or other natural disasters
• Failure or damage caused by the use of the inverter for any purpose or application other than the intended one
4. All expenses incurred by Toshiba for on-site services shall be charged to the customer, unless a service contract is
signed beforehand between the customer and Toshiba, in which case the service contract has priority over this
warranty.

15

O-1
E6581697

16. Disposal of the inverter


Caution
• If you dispose of the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste disposal(*). If you dispose
of he inverter by yourself, this can result in explosion of capacitor or produce noxious gases, resulting
in injury.
(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste product collectors
Mandatory and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons. "If the collection, transport and disposal of
action industrial waste is done by someone who is not licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the
law. (Laws in regard to cleaning and processing of waste materials)

For safety’s sake, do not dispose of the disused inverter yourself but ask an industrial waste disposal agent.
Disposing of the inverter improperly could cause its capacitor to explode and emit toxic gas, causing injury to persons.

16
P-1
E6581697Ԙ
Safety
precautions I
Introduction
II
Contents

Industrial Inverter Read first


1
For 3-phase induction motors
Connection
2
Operations
3

Industrial Inverter
Instruction Manual Setting
parameters 4
Main
5
TOSVERT TM
VF-MB1 parameters

Other
parameters 6
7
Operation

TOSVERT VF-MB1
with external
signal

Monitoring the
operation status 8
9
Measures
to satisfy the
standards
1-phase 240V class 0.2 VQ2.2kW
3-phase 500V class 0.4 VQ15kW
Peripheral
devices 10
11
Table of
parameters
and data

Specifications
12

Instruction Manual
Before making
a service call 13
NOTICE
1.Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the
Inspection and
maintenance 14
15
end user of the inverter unit.
Warranty
2.Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter

16
unit, and store it in a safe place for reference. Disposal of the
inverter

2010-07

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy